Home

CFW-09 - User`s Guide (v.4.4X)

image

Contents

1. H e 9 For networks remove the jumper For IT networks remove the jumper For IT networks remove the jumper b Models 312 A to 600 A 380 480 V
2. Models 22 to 32 500 600 V fi For networks remove the jumper For networks remove the jumper f Models 107 A to 211 A 500 600 V and 100 A to 179 A 660 690 V A A Figure 3 11 to g Location of jumper to disconnect the varistor and capacitor between phase and ground necessary only in models when IT network is used 60 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 3 2 6 Control Wiring The control wiring analog inputs outputs digital inputs outputs and relay outputs is made on the following terminal blocks of the Electronic Control Board CC9 refer to location in figures 3 7 item 3 2 2 XC1 Digital and Analog Signals XC1A Relay Outputs The following diagram shows the control wiring with the digital inputs as active high as set on factory jumper between 1 8 and 1 10 Termi Factory Default F
3. Fan 8 C3 C3 ES Electrolytic Capacitor 09024873 Electrolytic Capacitor 4700 uF 400 V o 12 18 18 03024801 Electrolytic Capacitor 4700 wc V 03056166 Fuse2A 60V 7 m 0305 6171 FusedA GV HMECFWOMICO 8417102024 KMLCFWOS 5417102035 _______ _ 3 18 2 1 CC9 641509651 Control Board CC9 4 1 3 3 3 1 3 18 1 1 1 1 1 _____ FOB 1 a 1 C3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 01 641512999 Board FCB1 01 FCB2 541513011 Board FCB2 00 E m re EF 1 EN Ex ine E EN 1 EE 3 3 3 3 stata 1 1 1 245 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Types Name Item specification 107 147 211 2471315 343 418 472 Units per inverter EE pq J dr T MD MM c I 541512886 Sona merac Boas 541512887 Signal Interface Board 0615 Ji 11111 15 ranra Bo e Jr GDB1 00 HMI CFW09 LED ceo 01 03 1 Function Expansion Board Optional Pa 1
4. Haz v S OL SOWA S OCHWzwi HIB ONC CRSA 530 NM 12 5H HOON JHEILS SHIH YEO e 2001 62 f c 09 09 83 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION p EPCOS 84143 6005125 Filter Figure 3 20 p EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions mm CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION q Schaffner FN3258 7 45 FN3258 16 45 FN3258 30 47 FN3258 55 52 FN3258 100 35 and FN3258 130 35 filters 190 250 270 250 270 270 B mtos I a amp 90 C 45 j 50 55 3803408 1 Hi pou l Connecto I s zs J MECHANICAL DATA SIDE VIEW D 84 o I gt 2 2 FRONT VIEW Type 35 Terminal block for flexible and rigid cable of 50 mm or AWG 1 0 Max Torque 8 Nm 11 5 0 45 45 Terminal block for 6 mm solid cable 4 flexible cable AWG 12 55 5 2 185 40 5 1 59 0 93 Au 15 m 59 Type 47 Terminal block for 16 mm solid wires 10 mm flexible wires AWG8 I 15 0 71 52 Dimesions mm inch Terminal block for 25 mm solid wires 16 mm flexible wires AWG 6 Figure 3 20 EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions in mm in
5. 37 2 4 CFW 09 Identification Label and Code Number 39 2 5 Receiving and Storage ccccccesceceesceseeceenscesseeeeeccesseesessccseneeesscoues 41 CHAPTER 3 Installation and Connection 3 1 Mechanical Installation 42 3 1 1 Environment Conditions 2 42 3 1 2 Dimensional of CFW 09 42 3 1 3 Mounting Specifications 43 3 1 3 1 Mounting Inside a 44 3 1 3 2 Mounting on Surface aia nnne 45 3 1 3 3 Mounting with the Heatsink Through a Surface 46 3 1 4 Keypad HMI and Cover 48 3 2 Electrical tabat seg copo Iu aou bt eue 49 3 2 1 Power Grounding Terminals 2 49 3 2 2 Location of the Power Grounding Control Connections 51 3 2 3 Rated Voltage Selection 53 3 2 4 Power Grounding Wiring and FUSES 54 3 25 57 3 2 5 1 AC Input Connection 57 3 2 5 2 OUIDULGONMECHONS actos oe See 58 3 2 5 3 Grounding Connections 58 9 2 TF NeUWOIKS ae 59 372507 COMO VV INO a sed na 61 3 2 7 Ty
6. 60 MJO V Sv ZLVO3ECCCISYO060MJO 9 eoipur uoisuedxe uim y 1onpoud e snu 7 19118 y si epoo eui Ud ool ep sej dn eouenbes 1994109 y ui y ul y 1 15 jeuondo Aue peddinbe 60 M49 eu A eui A 062 022 1 eseud 60 MJO V Gv 5 ZSAEZZZLSGVOO6OMAD 104 pue y 1 Z seu SOUS epoo y peuinbaiJ s UOISIBA 5 y seor ep jeuorido Aue peddinbe 1 10 uoisJ8A 5 60 0 94 O S pjeu uondo A 910N 6 Je1deuo A 009 uey y jo LA pue 19 5 Juano 1ndino 104 Aiddns A 009 0 A 006 40 plea S A 069 006 5 eui 20 uano 1ndino 6 Je1deuo 19431 A 1 Juano 104 At V 009 0090 V SIS 9190 V 097 0570 V
7. M Defines how the Speed Reference P001 and the Motor Speed P002 will be displayed For indicating the values in rpm oet the synchronous speed according to table 6 19 Motor Pole Syncronous Frequency Number Speed rpm 3000 E 1500 ____6 1000 pu 1800 6 1200 90 Table 6 19 Synchronous speed reference rom For indicating other values The displayed value when the motor is running at synchronous speed can be calculated through the following equations P002 Speed x 208 Sync speed x 10 Parameter P209 Motor Phase Loss Detection P210 Decimal Point of the Speed Indication P211 Zero Speed Disable CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes P001 Reference x P208 Sync speed x 10 Where Reference Speed Reference in rpm Speed Motor speed in rpm oync Speed Motor synchronous speed 120 x P403 Poles Poles Motor number of poles 120 x P403 P402 Example Desired indication 90 0 at 1800 rpm Motor synchronous speed 1800 rpm Programming P208 900 P210 1 P207 P216 P217 s 209 Motor Phase Loss E15 0 0 Off B 1 On Table 6 20 Actuation motor phase loss detection With the Motor Phase Loss Detector enabled P209 1 E15 happens when the following conditions occur simultaneously during a minimum time of 2 seconds 209 Inverter enab
8. Available Available Available Available avaiable Available Available Available Available RATS Available Available Available Available available Table 8 3 EBB board versions and included features NOTE RS 232 input they can not be used simultaneously The functions analogic outputs AO1 and 2 are identical to the AO1 AO2 outputs of the control board CC9 The use of the RS 485 serial interface does not allow the use of the standard CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Terminal XC5 Factory Default Function Specifications Not Connected eE a5 Motor Thermistor Input 1 PTC1 Actuation 3 9 Release 1 6 RM 2 P270 16 refer to figure 6 33 As DI Min resistance 100 normal refer to 270 figure 6 34 lt Motor Thermistor Input 2 PTC2 Referenced to through a 249 3 DGND DI8 P270 16 refer to figure 6 33 As resistor normal refer to P270 figure 6 34 2500 x 0 V reference of the 24 Vdc source Grounded via a 249 Q resistor NAMES 5 DO1 Transistor Output 1 Not used Isolated open collector 24 Vdc 50 mA a Max allowed load RL gt 500 Commom point for Digital Input DI7 and Digital Outputs 001 and 002 E 7 002 Transistor Output 2 Not Used Isolated open collector 24 Vdc 50 mA 24 Power Supply for the digital inputs 24 Vdc 8 Isolated outputs Capacity 9
9. 0 e E 0298 0001 IGBTModwe300AT200V EUPEC 6 008 9815 BT Meane say ________ 9 emwmer st menm amnes 0208 0016 ThyrstorDiode Module _____ Thyrsto DiodeModue 0303 9986 Thyristor Diode Module TD425N16 Jel 0308 9994 8 _ 298 0003 ThyristorDiodeModuleSKKH 25016 Pre charge Transformer 0307 0212 Transformer of Fan SCR Firing 1 a a Pre charge Resistor 301 9250 VitifiedWireResistor35R75W e e e a 1 Rectifier Bridge CecroicCapacior Elecuolyte Capactor 4700 uF400V a 12 e te 18 e ox Fan 3 esses RetFuseteasoov __ 2 _ DPS2 00 quide DPS20 941511875 Driver and Power Supply Board bps2o1 ___ ijs CRG2 00 Gate sse op i ees ee 15 CIP2 00 841513217 2 1 2 01 541513218 CIP2A 01 Board 1 241 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Type 5 Name Item N Specification 515 600
10. 1 15 8 191deuo 99 VIN3N yuelq 0128 040 9 0U 0 J9J9J suondo yum d pyepuels S ysiueds usiBu3 3 069 099 6999 069 009 6904 009 005 0904 066 066 6000 087 085 8785 Aiddns Jamod V 9 2900 V V 26 22500 V Ze 2200 V 2200 7100 2100 V 0L 0100 2000 7000 V 6 000 A 009 006 V 98 9800 V 04 0400 V 7900 V 9700 V 8c 8200 V 7200 V 91 9100 V 21 2100 V 01 0100 V 4 2000 V 9 9000 A 055 066 5 916 0 1uejsuoo 9 0U 49494 9 SpJeog A ddns 60 seues Jo 2094 4 uoisuedx4 WH oJnso ou3 suondo enuen J MOd DAM _ ome Tatoo sw 3 JAGOW 60 3 AHL 12445 juauno pae 1ndino 25 RECEIVINGAND STORAGE A CHAPTER 2 GENERAL INFORMATION The standard product is defined as described here Degree of protection NEMA 1 IP20 3 6 Ato 240 A 380 480 V models and all 220 230 V and 500 600 V models Protected chassis IP20 361 Ato 600 A 380 480 V models and all 500 690 V and 660 69
11. DOAN 2 edn ve p ug aes 256 8 3 Keypad with LEDs 258 8 4 Remote Keypad and Cables 258 PR 262 8 6 RS 232 PC Communication 262 8 7 Line Reactor DC Bus Choke essem mme 263 8 7 OMEN A E EX odes on SEES MO Sen s 264 8 7 2 DC Link Inductor Built in 266 S26 odd Realo asus v bo vv 267 PRENNENT 267 8 10 DYNAMIC 268 8 10 1 DB Resistor 0 268 9 10 2 AG 2 a 2 0 8 10 3 Dynamic Braking Module DBW 01 and DBW 02 271 8 10 3 1 DBW 01 and DBW 02 Identification Label 2 2 8 10 3 2 Mechanical Installation eese 2 2 8 10 3 3 Installation Connection eene 275 8 11 Through Surface Mounting 277 Mes REED 277 8 12 1 Installation of the Fieldbus 278 O 12 2 PTOIDUST PE oen tee epe Deu tact 281 8 12 3 Profibus DP V1 8 283 9 12 debe 284 8 12 5 DeviceNet Drive Profile 286 9 12 6 esee Oo voa E
12. parameters to 40 permit programming the content of the Input input words 3 to 7 input the inverter sends to the master Using these P parameters it is possible to program the number of another parameter P338 whose content must be made available at the network master input Input Word 5 in If for instance one wants to read from the CFW 09 inverter the motor P339 current in Amps one must program the value 3 in one of these Input Word 6 parameters because the parameter P003 is the one that contains this information It is worthwhile to remind that the value read from any P340 parameter is represented with a 16 bit word with sign in two s Input Word 7 complement Even if the parameter has decimal resolution the value is transmitted without the indication of the decimal point E g if the parameter P003 has the value 4 7 A the value supplied via the network will be 47 These parameters are used only if the number of input output words programmed in P346 were greater than 2 and if the I O instances 102 103 were programmed in P335 In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface refer to the CFW 09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual 206 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P341 0 to 749 These parameters are applicable
13. r Undervoltage 75 95 tay tO t1 t2 t3 t4 Figure 6 42 Actuation of the Ride Through function in Vector Control mode Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit 356 V to 564 V P296 3 534 V 1V 388 V to 615 V P296 4 583 V 1V 425 V to 674 P296 5 638 V 1V 466 V to 737 V P296 6 699 V 1V 486 V to 770 V P296 7 729 V 1V 559 V to 885 V P296 8 838 V 1V P325 0 0 to 63 9 Ride Through 22 8 Proportional Gain 0 1 This parameter is shown on the display s only when 202 4 Vector Control P326 0 000 to 9 999 Ride Through 0 128 Integral Gain 0 001 This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 4 Vector Control CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes 10 Line Loss ti Line Loss Detection t2 Trip by Undervoltage E02 without Ride Through t3 Line Recover t4 Line Recover Detection t5 Trip by Undervoltage E02 with Ride Through Regulator RT Ud Ride Through Blockdiagram figure 6 27 a Input Kp Ki Ud Figure 6 43 Ride Through controller Normally the factory setting for P325 P326 is adequate for most applications 203 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P331 Voltage Ramp P332 Dead Time LU These parameters P331 and P332 are only displayed when 202 0 1 2 075 V F VVW Control 204 Range
14. DI2 013 DI4 DI5 016 DI7 018 and 16 16 16 16 16 and 7 esum Start Stop P269 0 to 22 n General Enable 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 T E NS Function FWD REV Located on the E Local Remote T o aea ERRI No external Faut 4 4 4 1 4 4 mmaeER 5 5 P270 0 0 to 22 Decrease EP 5 5 Digital Input 018 0 Not Used mm2 __ 6 6 Function _ Located on the _ _ optional board EBA Seedos 9 or EBB __ to 10 10 10 10 10 JOG p 5 a 1 reset t2 12 12 12 12 12 Feds 13 13 19 13 18 13 3 14 1 3 4 14 Multispeed MS 7 717 Motor Thermistor Disables Flying HBL A Start mum o 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 Parameter Setting we ve LoadUser 20 20 20 20 20 TimerRL2 21 21 21 21 21 21 TimerRL3 22 22 22 22 22 22 Table 6 41 Functions of the digital inputs Notes about the Digital Inputs Functions Start Stop To ensure the right actuation this function needs p
15. Oth P100 100 64h Basic Variables Number of the Modbus Address Basic Variable Hexadecimal Voo 5000 1388h 01 5001 1389 V08 5008 1390h Status Bits Modbus Address Bit Number Commands Bits Modbus Address Bit Number Bit 100 64h Bit 107 107 6Bh Note All registers parameters and basic variables are considered as holding type registers referenced from 40000 or 4x whilst the bits are referenced from 0000 or Ox The status bits have the same functions of the bits 8 to 15 of the logic status basic variable 2 These bits are available only for read thus any attempt to write command returns error status to the master 319 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 14 3 320 Detailed Function Description Status Bits Bit Number Function Bito 0 Ramp enabling inactive 1 Ramp enabling active Bit 1 0 General enabling inactive 1 General enabling active Bit2 0 Counter clockwise direction of rotation 1 Clockwise direction of rotation Bit 3 0 JOG inactive 1 JOG active Local M Bit 4 0 Local Mode 1 Remote Mode Bit 5 0 No undervoltage 1 With undervoltage Bit 6 Not used 0 faul Bit 7 dE 1 With fault The command bits are available to read and write and they have the same function of the logic command bits 010 7 basic variable 3 however no requiring the use of the mask The basic variable 3 write influences the status of these bits Command Bits Bit Number Functio
16. qi 3 i i i 1 3 Faso 2500 Curent Tneiomer soo aso ma 2 2 2 _ SR D TUE EA 0307 2070 Current Transformer 1000 200 mA LT 10S 2 2 2 Models 500 600 Types Amp res Item N Specification Units per Inverter 608 00 541509651 ControiBoardcoaoo rlr h HMI CFWO9 LCD CRPz00 idu 20600 341618856 Power Board P0460 _ _ P07 6 00 NAE RN 10 6 00 _541512858 Power Board P10 6 00 hf piz600 541512859 Power Board 1260 ji 214600 841512860 Power Board P14800 s 242 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Types Item Specification 2 9 4 2 7 10 12 14 Units per Inverter HMI CFWO09 LED KMR CFWO09 Kit KMR Optional 1 CIF1 01 EBA1 01 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 1 1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 03 EBB 01 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBB 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBB 04 05 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBC1 01 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBC1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional EBC1 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 SCI1 00 541510846 RS 232 Module fo
17. 306 8 13 5 Variables and Errors of the Serial Communication 307 813 0 Basle Variables a 307 8 13 5 2 Examples of Telegrams with Basic Variables 310 8 13 5 3 Parameters Related to the Serial Communication 311 8 13 5 4 Errors Related to the Serial Communication 312 8 13 6 Times for Read Write of 5 312 8 13 7 Physical Connection of the RS 232 and RS 485 Interface 313 Modbus RTU sarees 314 8 14 1 Introduction in the Modbus RTU Protocol 314 8 14 1 1 Transmission Modes 314 8 14 1 2 Message Structure Mode 314 8 14 2 Operation of the CFW 09 in the Modbus RTU Network 316 8 14 2 1 Interface RS 232 and RS 485 Description 316 8 14 2 2 Inverter Configuration in the Modbus RTU Network 317 8 14 2 3 Access to the Inverter 317 8 14 3 Detailed Function Description 2 320 8 14 3 1 Function 01 Read Coils 321 8 14 3 2 Function 03 Read Holding Register 321 8 14 3 3 Function 05 Write Single Coil 322 8 14 3 4 Function 06 Write Single Register
18. 323 8 14 3 5 Function 15 Write Multiple Coils 324 8 14 3 6 Function 16 Write Multiple Registers 325 8 14 3 7 Function 43 Read Device Identification 326 8 14 4 Communication 327 Error ona ins 327 8 15 KIT KME for Extractable 329 8 16 CFW 09 SHARK 330 8 16 1 Enclosure Specifications 330 8 16 2 Mechanical Installation esee 330 8 16 3 Electrical dete 332 8 16 4 Closing the Inverter espe een v nk 332 8 10 5 HOW IO SPECII 333 8 17 CFW 09 Supplied by the DC Link Line HD 333 8 18 CFW 09 RB Regenerative Converter 333 ele ee AlCl cata teint 335 9 Technical Specification oa delli re eee nen 336 9 1 1 Power Supply Specifications 336 9 1 2 220 230 V Power Supply 337 9 1 3 380 480 V Power Supply sese 337 9 1 4 500 600 V Power Supply se
19. 10 Remote 11 Run 12 Ready 13 Fault 14 E00 15 E01 E02 E03 16 204 17 E05 18 4 to 20 mA 19 Fieldbus 20 FWD 21 gt 22 lt 23 Ride Through 24 Pre charge OK 25 Fault 26 Enabled Hours gt Hx 27 PLC 28 Timer 29 gt Nx and Nt gt Nx 30 Brake Actual Speed 31 Brake Total Reference 32 Overweight 33 Slack Cable 34 Torque Polarity 35 Torque Polarity 36 F gt Fx_ 1 37 gt 2 38 Set Point Process Variable 39 No E32 40 Ready 2 P280 Relay Output RL3 Function 0 Not used 180 1 gt Nx 2 N gt Nx 3 N lt Ny 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 6 15 gt Ix 7 15 lt 1 8 gt 9 lt 10 Remote 11 Run 12 Ready 13 2 No Fault 24 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE t Functi Adjustable R aub arameters justapie mange Setting Setting age 14 No E00 15 E01 E02 E03 16 No E04 17 E05 18 4 to 20 mA 19 Fieldbus 20 FWD Proc Var gt VPx 22 lt 23 Ride Through 24 Pre charge OK 25 Fault 26 Enabled Hours gt Hx 27 PLC 28 Timer 29 gt Nx and gt Nx 30 Brake Actual Speed 31 Brake Total Reference 32 Overweight 33 Slack Cable 34 Torque Polarity 35 Torque Polarity 36 F gt 1 37
20. P04 4 00 841512377 Power Board 4400 ATEM 541512385 Power Board POS 400 J at ee 541512393 Power Board 209400 1 541512407 Power Boara Pis400 _ 841512415 Power Board 16400 EN P24 4 00 341512423 Power Board P24 400 P30 4 00 S41509759 Power Board P30 400 HMI CFW09 LED KMR CFWO9 CFI 0i EBA1 01 EBA1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 03 01 EBB 02 EBB 03 04 EBB 05 EBC1 01 1 EBC1 02 EBC1 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 5011 00 E NN 12858 ptt _ 1 239 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Models 380 480 V Type 5 Specification 38 45 70 86 1051142 Units inverter Pre charge Contactor 035502394 Contactor CWMS50 10220V50 60Hz Item 1 EN HMI CFWOS LCD 5417102024 CFIt 00 541509929 KML CFWO9 3417102035 P60 4A 01 541513142 Power Board P60 4A 01 1 P70 4A 00 541513118 Power Board P70 4A 00 70 4 01 541513140 Power Board 70 4 J t 86 4 00 841513108 Power Board P86 4A 00 011 E Jy P86 4A 01 641513109 Power Board P86 4A 01 P105 4A 00 S41513110 Power Board P105 4A 00 P105 4A 01 541513111 105 4
21. Press the PROG key to enter the programming mode Vector with Encoder only Use the Q and Co keys to set the correct encoder PPR value Vector with Encoder only Press the Pros key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Vector with Encoder only N Press the key to to the next parameter 106 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Enter the programming mode Selected Motor Rated Power 7 5 0 hp 3 7 kW Exit the programming mode Encoder Pulses per Rotation Range 0 to 9999 Enter the programming mode Programmed Encoder PPR Exit the programming mode Motor Ventilation Type Selection 0 Self Ventilated 1 Separate Ventilation 2 Optional Flux only for P202 3 3 Increased Protection Press the H key to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to select the motor ventilation type PROC Press the ee key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode N Press the key to to the next parameter Note Display shows during 3 s P409 to P413 0 Run Self tuning Press the pees key to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to select the desired Self tuning mode LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY l1 CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION Enter the programming mode Selected Motor Ventilation Type 0 Self Ventilated Exit the programming mode Se
22. gt de T Mx ax La WO SUT PR Ear 62 5 2 46 111 5 4 39 160 5 6 32 223 8 78 1 Air Flow outlet 390 15 35 84 5 3 33 f1 Air Flow inlet Air Flow outlet 225 8 86 150 5 91 X ft Air Flow inlet 37 5 1 48 372 14 65 400 15 75 0 55 Figure 9 4 Size 3 dimensions in mm inch 348 Conduit for power cable 3x 35 62 8 NM ZUM 583 BS I LR 76 2 99 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 4 7 2 0 28 4 gt Po Air Flow outlet 84 5 3 33 Air Flow inlet Air Flow outlet 252 9 92 150 5 91 452 17 80 480 18 90 51 2 01 0 55 14 ft Air Flow inlet Figure 9 5 Size 4 dimensions in mm inch 349 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 5 34 34 22 5 3 gt B ae men 9 2 0 36 Conduit for e ower e rable m s 3 50 0 perei 167 5 6 59 239 5 9 43 15 29 6 1 17 67 5 2 66 Air Flow outlet 5 200 ee 550 21 65 525 20 67 L 84 5 3 33 Air Flow inlet ft Air Flow outlet 337 13 27 Po EES il TM 555 21 85 T f Air Flow inlet Figure 9 6 Size 5
23. 122 030 AO4 Value 100 to 100 122 040 PID Process Variable 0 to 100 o 122 P042 0 to 65535 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE 6 Factory 4 Parameters Function Adjustable Range Unit Setting 7 Motor Current and Motor Speed 0 to 2600 A rms 123 _ REGULATION PARAMETERS P100 to P199 Ramps P100 Acceleration Time 0 00 999 200 124 P101 DecelerationTime 00099 s 124 P102 AcceleraionTime2 00099 200 s 124 P103 Deceleration Time2 0009 200 s J 124 P104 S Ramp 0 Inactive Linear 0 Inactive 124 1 5096 2 100 Speed References P120 Speed Reference Backup 0 Inactive 1 Active 124 121 Keypad Speed Reference P133 to 134 19010 125 P122 JOG JOG Speed Reference 00 to P134 15002 125 P123 9 125 P1249 Mul speed Referencet P133 to P134 9075 m 126 P1250 Multispeed Reference 2 P133 to P134 300250 126 126 267 Multispeed Reference 3 P133 to P134 600 50 mm 126 P1272 Multispeed Reference 4 P133 to P134 900 750 m 126 P1286 Multispeed Reference 5 P133 to P134 1200 100 1 P129 2 1 pm 126 P1300 Multispeed Reference 7 P133 to P134 1800 1500 1 Speed Limits 100 Disabled p133 Minimum Speed
24. Analog inputs AIZ Al3 Al1 Al2 gt 0 Al1 AIZ Multispeed Serial Fieldbus and PLC NOTE When P203 1 do not use the reference via E P P221 P222 7 When the PID function P203 1 is set The following parameters are automatically changed P223 0 always forward P225 0 JOG disabled P226 0 always forward P228 0 JOG disabled P237 3 PID process variable P265 15 Manual Automatic The JOG Function and the direction of rotation function remain disabled The Enabling and Start Stop controls are defined in P220 P224 and P227 The digital input is programmed automatically for the function Manual Automatic P265 15 according to table 6 64 Dix Operating Mode 0 0 V Manual 1 24 V Automatic Table 6 64 Dlx operating mode Thechange between Manual Automatic can be realized by one of the digital inputs 01310 DI8 P265 to P270 Parameter P040 indicates the value of the Process Variable feedback in the chosen scale unit This parameter can be selected as monitoring variable refer to item 4 2 2 provided P205 6 To prevent saturation of the analog feedback input during the regulation overshoot the signal must vary between OV to 9 0 V 0 to 18 mA 4 to 18 mA The adaptation between the setpoint and the feed back can be realized by changing the gain of the selected analog input as feedback P238 for AI2 or P24
25. Fault Indication and Diagnostics Viewing and programming parameters Operation All functions relating to the CFW 09 operation Start Stop Motor Direction of Rotation JOG Increment Decrement of the Speed Reference and Selection of Local Mode Remote Mode can be performed through the Keypad This is valid with the factory default programming of the inverter All keypad keys are enabled when the Local Mode has been selected These same functions can be performed in Remote Mode by means of digital and analog inputs Flexibility is provided through the ability to program the parameters that define the input and output functions Keypad keys operation description Both 0 keys are enabled when P224 0 I Key for Local Mode and or P227 0 1 Key for Remote Mode Starts inverter via Acceleration Ramp otops the inverter via Deceleration Ramp NOTE It resets the inverter after a Fault Trip always active When the Jog key is pressed it accelerates the motor according to the Acceleration Ramp up to the JOG speed programmed in P122 default is 150 rom When released the motor decelerates according to the Deceleration Ramp and stops Enabled when P225 1 Keypad for Local Mode and or P228 1 Keypad for Remote Mode If a Digital Input is set to General Enable P263 to P270 2 it has to be closed to allow the JOG function Selects the control input and speed reference source toggling be
26. 1 1 C CN 0 A E zum 1 NE 4 ES BE S um P of D gt T S EE l 2 M _p pr 1 1 l TEn n gt ET MEN 5 4 o E 2 co E 6 NES o 2 r E gc a 8 eds 4 1 i BEER E a I co T I EE TIEN ON 5 ZEN E EI E REI 1 zc QE LES 8 EIC qe perte a E NE i d 1 ae 85 x 5 5 o 5 m 8 e X 211 Figure 6 46 Details of the operation of digital functions 2 Normal Condition Light load condition Slack cable condition Im Average Current CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION b Diagram of the Load Detection Logic 212 lt i gt pa Repeat Detection Repeat Detection Ramp Hold Cable OK h lack P364 gt 0 lt i gt pass um S 2 E Cable OK _ Show
27. 86 105 142 180 211 240 312 361 450 515 600 686 855 1140 1283 1710 1468 295 34 62 62 69 22 gt or et lina cse 1 5 O1 60 5 NIN O1 IO 380 480 V Models Size above 500 hp IN 100A 127 179A 225 259 305A 340 A 428 A 492 A 580A 646 A 813A 869 A 969 A 1220 A 68 80 660 690 V Models Size 8E 10E above 500 hp 60 500 690 Models Size 8E 10E Special Models IN 2A 33 A 200 A 230 A 320 A 400 A 570 A 700 A 900 A P 295 38 66 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Table 6 45 Inverter rated current selection CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P296 1 11 O to 8 P296 Inverter Rated Voltage Inverter Rated 0 for models 2204 230 d Voltage 220 230 V 5 400 V 415 V Rated Input Voltage 3 for models 3 440 V 460 V 380 480 V 4 480 V 6 for models 5 500 V 525 V 6 550 V 575 V 500 600 V 7 600 V and 500 690 V 8 660 V 690 V 8 for models Table 6 46 Inverter rated voltage selection 600 690 V Set P296 according to the rated AC line voltage Do not set according to short term peak values For CFW 09 models gt 8
28. Avoid direct exposure to sunlight rain high moisture and sea air Avoid exposure to gases or explosive or corrosive liquids Avoid exposure to excessive vibration dust oil or any conductive particles or materials Allowed environmental conditions Temperature 0 to 40 32 F to 104 F nominal conditions From 40 C to 55 C 104 F to 131 F with 2 96 current derating for each 1 C 33 8 F degree above 40 C 104 F Relative Air Humidity 5 to 90 non condensing Maximum Altitude 1000 m 3 300 ft nominal conditions From 1000 m to 4000 m 3 300 ft to 13 200 ft with 1 96 current reduction for each 100 m 330 ft above 1000 m 3 300 ft Pollution Degree 2 according to 50178 and UL508C It is not allowed the presence of water condensation or conductive dust particles in the air 3 1 2 Dimensional of CFW 09 External dimensions and mounting holes are according to figure 3 1 and table 3 1 Sizes 1 and 2 Sizes 3 to 8 8E Sizes 9 10 and 10E Di asl Jc 5 5 5 6 5 Figure 3 1 Mounting dimensional drawings of CFW 09 42 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Model mm hs i mm Protection in Size 1 9 5 3 5 8 27 5 63 7 72 4 76 7 09 0 43 0 37 3 16 7 7 Size 2 10 5 9 5 6 0 T EO 15 35 8 78 10 79 5 90 14 76 1 44 0 20 1 4 41 9
29. CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION r Schaffner FN3359 150 28 FN3359 250 28 FN3359 400 99 FN3359 600 99 and FN3359 1000 99 filters Types 400 Ato 1000A Types 150 Ato 250A N 28 M10 bolt Bus bar connection Type 99 B 1204 7125 115 135 170 series FN 2259 60 JL 180 210 JL 230 D 185 205 E L 210 230 BIL 6 JC 8 FL 3 2556 C 15 20 CL 40 50 D 40 I 50 HL 120 J 145 10 5 IC i4 KIL 55 62 5 20 1225 MLE MO M2 NL 1 2 o 8 21 These filters are supplied with M12 bolts for the grounding connection Figure 3 20 r EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions in mm wz NOTE The declaration of conformity CE is available on the website www weg net or on the CD which comes with the products 85 4 1 86 DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYPAD Green LED Forward Red LED Reverse CHAPTER 4 KEYPAD HMI OPERATION This chapter describes the CF W 09 operation via the standard Keypad or Human Machine Interface HMI providing the following information General Keypad Description Use of the Keypad Parameter Programming Description of the Status Indicators The standard CFW 09 Keypad has two readout displays a LED readout with a 4 digit seven segment display and a LCD display with two lines o
30. 0 59 Table 8 14 shows the weights of the different DBW 01 types Degree of Fastening Screw Weight Kg 9 Type Protection DBW 01 165 14 2 DBW 01 240 13 8 DBW 02 210 14 2 Table 8 14 Mechanical data of the DBW 01 and DBW 02 2 4 8 10 3 3 Installation Connection CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Location of the power connections is shown in figures 8 29 8 30 and 8 31 A WEGEN E S d y p J X7 2194 UD Figure 8 29 Connection location Figure 8 31 X7 terminal block 00 275 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 2 6 Supply the fan of the braking module with the suitable supply voltage 110 Vrms or 220 Vrms at X7 1 X7 2 connector refer to figure 8 32 The fan requires a current of about 0 14 A The terminals and 4 of the terminal bock X7 are the NC contact of a thermostat that must be installed for the thermal protection of the braking module This protection must be installed external to the braking module refer to figure 8 32 in this example the relay is connected to DI3 XC1 3 9 of the board CC9 and the parameter P265 is programmed as Without External Error P265 4 Ng i i M i att S a AL MSN 2 lt rmt L cafTan jb iE HHESHHE CAMAS po SE 25 24 i
31. 016 Third Previous Fault 017 Fourth Previous Fault 18 Analog Input Al1 Value 19 Analog Input Al2 Value 020 Analog Input AI3 Value 021 Analog Input Al4 Value 022 WEG Use 023 Software Version 024 A D Conversion Value of Analog Input Al4 P025 A D Conversion Value of Current P026 A D Conversion Value of lw Current Range Factory Setting Unit Oto 71 fa Oto 71 Oto 71 A Oto 71 100 to 100 Ds 0 1 96 100 to 100 0 1 96 100 to 100 0 1 100 to 100 E 0 1 96 V4 4X LCD 32768 to 32767 LED 0 to FFFFH 5 0 to 1023 010 1023 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Indicates the numbers of the last second third and fourth previous Faults Fault Sequence Exy P014 P015 P016 P017 60 gt P061 P062 gt P063 P064 P065 Ex When the display shows 0 zero this means 00 1 one means E01 and so on Indicate the percentage value of the analog inputs to The indicated values are obtained after offset action and multiplication by the gain Refer to parameters P234 to P247 Indicates the CFW 09 Software Version Indicates the A D conversion result of the analog input A14 located on the I O Expansion Board The LCD display indicates the conversion value as a decimal number and the LED display as a hexadecimal number wi
32. 1 ELA CC9 No External Fault Control Supply J UUW UU UO LLL B Cable 2 3 m 0307 7560 Thermal Relay Thermostat Resistor Figure 8 34 Connections between the DBW the 09 and the braking resistor A 8 11 THROUGH SURFACE MOUNTING KIT 8 12 FIELDBUS NOTE Through the power contacts of the bimetallic overload relay circulates Direct Current during the DC Braking process DBW 02 has a duplicated XC3 connector A and B The XC3B is for connecting other DBW 02 module for parallel operation It is possible to connect up to 3 DBW 02 modules in parallel The interconnecting cable should be limited to 2 meters maximum cable length The kit for through surface mounting is composed of metallic supports that must be mounted on the rear of the CFW 09 frames 3 to 8 to allow through surface mounting For further information refer to item 3 1 3 3 figure 3 4 and table 3 4 Degree of protection is NEMA 1 IP20 CFW 09 can be connected to Fieldbus networks allowing its control and parameter setting For this purpose you need to include an optional electronic board according to the desired Fieldbus standard Profibus DP DeviceNet or EtherNet IP 277 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES wz NOTE The chosen Fieldbus option can be specified in the suitable field of the CFW 09 coding In this case the CFW 09 will be supplied
33. 2 Analog outputs 4 14 bits 0 006 of the range 10 V bipolar Not l 10 V to 10 V programmable available AVANADE supply Isolated RS 485 serial port Not Available available Digital Input DI7 isolated programmable 24 V Available Available Available Digital Input 018 for special motor thermistor PTC function actuation Available Available Available 2 isolated Open Collector transistor outputs DO1 DO2 24 V 50 mA Available Available Aaile 3 9 release 1 6 programmable Table 8 1 EBA board versions and included features wz NOTE 248 The use of the RS 485 serial interface does not allow the use of the standard RS 232 input they can not be used simultaneously CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Terminal 4 Factory Default Function Specifications Not connected p Motor Thermistor Input 1 PTC1 Actuation Release 1k6Q ae 2 P270 16 refer to figure 6 33 As Min resistance 100 Q normal refer to P270 figure 6 34 Motor Thermistor Input 2 2 Reference to 018 through a 270 16 refer to figure 6 33 As 249 resistor normal P270 figure 6 34 R E Isolated open collector 24 Vdc 50 mA E 20S STOT PUPURI MOSG max allowed load RL gt 500 Q m Common point for Digital Input DI7 MILI Isolated open collector 24 Vdc 50 mA Power Supply for the digital inputs 24 8 I
34. CL8 1 enabling ramp Start Stop CL9 1 general enabling CL10 1 Forward Reverse rotation 11 1 JOG CL12 1 Local Remote CL13 not used CL14 not used CL15 1 inverter RESET BYTE LOW logical level of the desired action MSB CLO CL2 CL3 CL4 308 LSB 1 enabling Start 0 disabling by ramp Stop 12 enabling 0 general disabling stops by inertia 1 forward 0 reverse 1 2 JOG active 0 JOG inactive 1 remote 0 local CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES CL5 not used CL6 not used CL7 the transition in this bit from 0 to 1 causes the inverter RESET when any error condition is present NOTE Disabling via Dix has priority over these disabling To enable the inverter by the serial itis necessary that CLO CL1 1 and that the external disabling is inactive If CLO CL1 0 simultaneously a general disabling occurs V04 code 00804 Reference of Frequency given by Serial reading writing variable It permits sending reference to the inverter provided P221 9 for LOC or P222 9 for REM This variable has a 13 bit resolution refer to item 8 13 3 2 code 00806 Status of the Operation Mode read variable EL2 e d 25 p E 6 MSB EL2 0 1 in setting mode after Reset for Factory M otart up The inverter enter in this status as it is energized by the first or when
35. CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROBLEM Motor speed varies oscillates Motor speed too high or too low Motor does not reach rated speed or it starts to oscillate at rated speed for P202 3 4 Vector Display OFF Motor does not enter the field weakening range for P202 2 3 or 4 Motor speed too low and P009 P169 or P170 motor with torque limitation for P202 24 Vector with encoder 234 POINT TOBE CHECKED Loose Connections Speed Potentiometer Variation of the external analog reference Parameters not set correctly for P202 3 or 4 Programming error 1 reference limits Signal of the 1 reference control 2 Motor Nameplate Data 12 mE Connection of the 1 Keypad Power Supply voltage 1 Blown Fuse s Encoder signals or power connections CORRECTIVEACTION Disable the inverter switch OFF the supply voltage and tighten all connections Check if all internal connection is tightened Replace the speed potentiometer Identify the cause of the variation Refer to chapter 6 parameters P410 P412 P161 P162 P175 and P176 Check if the contents of P133 Min Speed and P134 Max Speed are according to the motor and the application Check the control signal level of the reference Check the programming gains and offset in P234 to P247 Check if the used motor meets the application requirements Reduce P180 set to 90 to
36. COMMUNICATION SERIAL INTERFACE ANALOG INCREMENTAL INPUTS ENCODER DIGITAL ANALOG OUTPUTS ENCODER DIGITAL 9 3 2 I O Expansion Board EBB COMMUNICATION INCREMENTAL ENCODER INPUTS DIGITAL ANALOG OUTPUTS ENCODER DIGITAL SERIAL INTERFACE m CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Isolated RS 485 Serial Interface the RS 485 and RS 232 serial interfaces cannot be used simultaneously 1 Bipolar Analog Input Al4 10 V to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Linearity 14 bits 0 006 96 of 10 V range Programmable Functions Incremental Encoder Feedback Input Internal 12 Vdc 200 mA max isolated power supply Differential inputs A A B B Z and Z signals 100 kHz max 14 bits resolution Used as speed feedback for the speed regulator and digital speed measurement 1 Programmable Isolated 24 Digital Input 077 1 Programmable Digital Input DI8 For motor PTC thermistor Actuation 3 9 Release 1 6 2 Bipolar Analog Outputs 4 10 V to 10 V Linearity 14 bits 0 006 96 of 10 V range Programmable Functions Buffered Encoder Output Input signal repeater Isolated differential outputs 2 Isolated Transistor Outputs DO1 DO2 Open collector 24 Vdc 50 mA Programmable Functions Isolated RS 485 Serial Interface the RS 485 and RS 232 serial interfaces cannot be used simultaneously 1 Isolated Analog Input AI3 0 V to 10 V o
37. Copyright 2006 WEG 3 A All rights reserved Figure 8 47 Open window when accessing the CFW 09 through the WEB 290 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES CFW 09 Frequency Inverter Mozilla Firefox Arquivo Editar Exibir Ir Favoritos Ferramentas Ajuda M Y e o http 192 168 0 1 webjindex_weg htm Ir W E Home CFW 09 Frequency Inverter Logical Status 0 1400 Logical Control Ox f 7 f 0 Motor Speed Ox0000 Motor Speed Reference of 8 Status of the Digital Inputs 0x0000 Status of the Digital Outputs Ox 00 00 Parameter Status 0 0000 Torque Current 0 0000 Motor Current 0 0000 Number of the Parameter to be read Ox 00 17 Number of the Parameter to be changed 03 le Content of the Parameter to changed o Seconds Between Refresh 10 Disable Refresh with 0 SUBMIT Figure 8 48 Control and monitoring window when accessing the CFW 09 through the WEB NOTE It is necessary to have a PC with an EtherNet card connected to the same network of the CFW 09 and a WEB browser MS Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox Configurations Follow the steps below to operate the CFW 09 in an EtherNet IP network 1 Install the KFB EN kit into the CFW 09 variable frequency inverter 2 Atparameter P309 select the EtherNet IP protocol and the number of input output words P309 7 8 or 9 3 Connect the RJ 45 plug of the E
38. Ex When the display show 0 zero this means 200 1 one means E01 and so on Indicates simultaneously the motor current value A and the motor speed value rpm Itis possible to use this parameter to change the speed reference P121 when P221 or P222 0 JE NOTE The LED display shows the speed Shows the command word value set through the network The LCD display of the keypad shows the value in a decimal representation while the LED display shows the value in a hexadecimal representation Shows the speed reference value set through the Fieldbus network The LCD display of the keypad shows the value in a decimal representation while the LED display shows the value in a hexadecimal representation 123 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 6 2 REGULATION PARAMETERS P100 to P199 Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P100 0 0 to 999 Setting the value to 0 0 s results in no Acceleration ramp Acceleration Time 20 Defines the time to accelerate 100 linearly from zero to the s maximum speed P134 or to decelerate P101 linearly from the maximum speed down to 0 rpm P101 0 0 to 999 M Deceleration Time 20 The selection of the acceleration deceleration time ramp 2 P102 or P103 can be made by reprogramming one of the digital inputs 01310 BM Di Refert P265to P270 in ramp 2 P102 0 0to 999 Acceleration Time 2 20 0 1 s lt
39. L chs BH Figure 4 2 Direction of rotation FWD REV LEDs Basic Functions of the Keys The functions described below are valid for factory default programming and Local Mode operation The actual function of the keys may vary if parameters P220 through P228 are re programmed otarts the inverter via acceleration ramp After starting the display sequences through these units at each touch of the Start key in the order shown here refer to item 4 2 2 a Volts Status Torque Hz A Stops disables the inverter via deceleration ramp Also resets the inverter after a fault has occurred Toggles the LED display between the parameter number and its value Number Value Increases the speed the parameter number or the parameter value Decreases the speed the parameter number or the parameter value Reverses the direction of motor rotation between Forward Reverse Toggles between the LOCAL and REMOTE modes of operation Cu Performs the JOG function when pressed Any DIx programmed for General Enable must be closed and the CFW 09 must be stopped to enable JOG function 87 CHAPTER 4 KEYPAD HMI OPERATION 4 2 USE OF THE KEYPAD HMI 4 2 1 Keypad Operation 88 The keypad is used for programming and operating the CFW 09 allowing the following functions Indication of the inverter status and operation variables
40. NOTE When P364 0 the detection logic of slack cable is disabled Output current value used to detect the slack cable condition Output current value used to detect the light load condition At the end of this process the speed reference is increased according to P368 The new speed value is N N x P368 This condition is reset when the motor remains stopped for 1 second NOTE This condition is verified only during the stabilization time Output current value used to detect the overweight condition This function is only enabled during the stabilization time This condition is reset when the motor remains stopped N 0 for 1 second UE NOTE This condition is verified only during the stabilization time This parameter increases the speed reference under the light load condition It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs F gt Fx Og NOTE Details of this function can be obtained in the function description of parameters P275 to P280 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION a Activation of the load detection parameters during the stabilization time and with P361 On Speed Z ar x 1 1 i BE i 3 i po d E 1 B oe MSN MEE 24 2 1 L xd ed uc IN
41. Scalar Control with Imposed Current occurs The minimum speed recommended for Sensorless Vector Control is 18 rom for 60 Hz motors and 15 rom for 50 Hz motors with 4 poles For P135 lt 3 the CFW 09 will always operate in Sensorless Vector Mode when P202 3 there is no transition to the Mode The current level to be applied on the motor in the I F Mode is set at P136 Scalar Control with imposed current means only current control working with current reference level adjusted by P136 There is no speed control just open loop frequency control Sets the current to be applied to the motor when in I F Mode Mode occurs when the motor speed is lower than the value defined by parameter P135 Current I F Mode of P410 Imr 100 111 96 122 96 133 96 144 96 155 96 166 96 177 96 188 96 200 96 P136 BY Table 6 6 Current reference for I F mode Parameter P136 Manual Torque Boost For V F Control P202 0 1 or 2 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 0109 Compensates for the voltage drop on the motor stator resistance at low 1 frequencies and increases the inverter output voltage in order to maintain 1 a constant torque in V F operation Always set P136 to the lowest value that permits the motor to start satisfactorily If the value is higher than required an inverter overc
42. Trimpot Factory default function RA1 AOS Offset RA2 RA4 Table 8 2 b Trimpots configurations EBA board Motor Speed Motor Current NOTE The external signal and control wiring must be connected to XC4 EBA following the same recommendations as for the wiring of the control board CC9 refer to item 3 2 6 The EBB board can be supplied in different configurations combining the features included The available configurations are shown in table 8 3 EBA Board models code EBB 01 EBB 02 EBB 03 EBB 04 EBB 05 1 B3 B4 B5 Not Not Available Available Available Not repeater differential output must use to external 5 V to 15 V power supply Analog input AI3 10 bits isolated unipolar 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA programmable 2 Analog outputs 17 2 11 bits 0 05 of full scale unipolar isolated 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA programmable Isolated RS 485 serial port Digital Input DI7 isolated programmable 24 V Digital Input DI8 for special motor thermistor function actuation 3 9 release 1 6 2 isolated Open Collector transistor outputs DO1 DO2 24 V 50 mA programmable Board with 5 V power supply for the encoder B 2 ot Not Available available Not Available Available Available Available Not Available Available Available available Not Available Available
43. When the option 0 P221 P222 is selected Al2 may supply the speed reference if set to do so at P221 P222 which is subject to the speed limits P133 P134 and the acceleration deceleration ramps P100 to P103 Refer to figure 6 26 The option 1 After Ramp Reference valid only for P202 3 and 4 is generally used as an additional reference signal for instance in applications with a dancer Refer to figure 6 25 It bypasses the accel decel ramp The option 2 Maximum Torque Current permits controlling the torque current limit P169 P170 through the analog input Al2 In this case P169 P170 will be Read Only Parameters Refer to figure 6 26 a For this type of control check if P160 should be equal to one or zero When AI2 is set to maximum P019 100 956 the torque limit will be also maximum P169 P170 180 The option PID Process Variable defines the input Al2 as feedback signal of the PID regulator for instance pressure temperature sensor etc if P524 0 When Al2 is set to its maximum value P019 100 96 the PID process variable will be on its maximum value 100 95 165 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes Option 4 Maximum Torque Current Al2 Al1 When parameters P237 2 and P241 0 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the signal at the Analog Input Al2 When parameters P237 4
44. gt Size 4 1 Een 5 1 a Rud 1 1 p isl Size 5 550 335 274 200 525 675 10 M8 21 65 13 19 10 79 7 87 20 67 2 66 0 39 5 16 Size 6 675 335 300 200 650 67 5 10 M8 NEMA1 26 57 13 19 11 77 7 87 25 59 2 66 0 39 5 16 121 3 20 7 67 5 Sete te 38 38 16 14 14 57 10 83 37 40 2 66 0 39 5 16 220 5 Size 8E 1145 1120 67 5 45 08 16 14 14 57 10 83 44 09 2 66 0 39 5 16 253 Size 9 1020 95 0 59 46 65 27 56 19 33 10 83 45 27 2 95 0 59 3 8 571 T pe 46 65 27 56 22 91 10 83 45 27 2 95 0 59 3 8 682 Table 3 1 Installation data Refer to item 9 1 3 1 3 Mounting Specifications For installing the CFW 09 leave at least the minimum free spaces around the inverter according to figure 3 2 The dimensions of these free spaces are described on table 3 2 Install the inverter in the vertical position according to the following recommendations 1 Install the inverter on a flat surface 2 Do not install heat sensitive components immediately above the inverter 3 For the inverters 45 A to 130 A 220 230 V 30 Ato 600 A 380 480 V 22 to 32 A 500 600 V 44 Ato 79 A 500 600 V 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 428 A 660 690 V First partially tighten the bolts on the surface then install the inverter screw down the bolts For inverters 6 A to 28 220 230
45. s delay set in P213 Timing starts when the zero speed zone conditions are met If these conditions are no longer met during the delay time the timer will reset P214 ids 0 or 1 Line Undervoltage Line Phase Loss 1 ib Phase Fault E03 Detection 0 1 Table 6 23 Actuation line phase loss detection The phase loss detector is active when P214 On and the CFW 09 is enabled The display indication and the updating of the fault memory happen 3 seconds after the fault has occurred NOTE The phase loss detection is not available in types up to 28 A for 220 230 V and 380 480 V supply voltage and in types up to 14 Afor 500 600 V supply voltage independently of the value set in P214 P215 0 to 2 P215 Action Copy Function 0 0 1 gt Transfers the current parameter Keypad and the content of the User 1 2 Memories to the non volatile EEPROM memory of the Keypad The current inverter parameters are not changed 2 Keypad Transfers the content of the Keypad INV HMI memory to the current inverter parameters and to the User 1 2 Memories Table 6 24 Action copy function 152 Range Factory Setting CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter Unit Description Notes The copy function is used to transfer the content of the parameters from one inverter to another The inverters must be of the same type voltage current and the same software version mus
46. 118 6 2 Regulation Parameters P100 to 199 124 6 3 Configuration Parameters P200 to 99 147 6 3 1 Parameters for Crane Applications and for Torque Master Slave FUNCTION s P351 0 citat ocio ceu miu 208 6 4 Motor Parameters P400 to P499 214 6 5 Special Functions Parameters P500 to P699 220 PID Pea aUe cu 220 0 5 2 220 7 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Possible Dues 228 233 73 GOMACHING WEG c 235 7 4 Preventive Maintenance 235 74 1 Cleaning NSIUCIONS cuba age Ea lU amenity cake 236 7 5 Spare PartblSlt econtra oe ed asses 237 CHAPTER 6 CFW 09 Options and Accessories Expansi n oo 8 1 1 EBA I O Expansion Board etis 81 2 EBB VO Expansion Board ene Decet 251 SM 254 Sz Incremental i ie eb 254 8 2 1 EBA EBB 254
47. 17 E05 18 4 to 20 mA 19 Fieldbus 20 FWD 21 Proc Var gt VPx 22 lt 23 Ride Through 24 Pre charge OK 25 Fault 26 Enabled Hours gt Hx 27 Not Used 28 Not Used 29 gt Nx and gt Nx 30 Brake Actual Speed 31 Brake Total Reference 32 Overweight 33 Slack Cable 34 Torque Polarity CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Factory User s p Setting Setting 899 0 Not Used 180 21 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE t Functi Adjustable R joda arameters justapie nange Setting Setting age 35 Torque Polarity 36 F gt Fx_ 1 37 F gt Fx_2 38 Set Point Process Variable 39 No E32 40 Ready 2 P276 Digital Output DO2 Function 0 Not Used 0 Not used 180 Requires optional I O 1 gt Nx expansion board EBA or EBB 2 N gt Nx 3 N lt Ny 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 6 15 gt Ix 7 15 lx 8 gt 9 lt 10 Remote 11 Run 12 Ready 13 No Fault 14 No E00 15 E01 E02 E03 16 204 17 E05 18 4 to 20 mA 19 Fieldbus 20 FWD 21 Proc Var gt VPx 22 lt 23 Ride Through 24 Pre charge OK 25 Fault 26 Enabled Hours gt Hx 27 Not Used 28 Not Used 29 gt Nx and gt Nx 30 Brake Actual Speed 31 Brake Total Reference 32 Overweight 33 Slack Cable
48. 460 V Exit the programming mode Motor Rated Current Range 0 0 to 1 30 x P295 Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated Current 7 9A Exit the programming mode Motor Rated Frequency Range 0 to 300 Hz Press the to enter the programming mode an keys to set the correct motor rated frequency value Press the 6 key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the A key to go to the next parameter Press the to enter the programming mode Use the an C2 keys to set the correct motor rated rpm value Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the key to go to the next parameter LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated Frequency 60 Hz Exit the programming mode Motor Rated rpm Range 0 to 18000 rpm Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated rpm 1730 rpm Exit the programming mode Motor Rated hp Range 1 to 1600 0 hp 1 to 1190 0 kW 105 CHAPTER 5 START UP ACTION Press the cay to enter the programming mode Use the keys to select the motor rated power PR Press the T key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode Press the key to to the next parameter
49. 8 Reverse Run 9 Speed Torque 10 JOG 18 Function Adjustable Range P267 P268 Digital Input DI5 Function Digital Input 016 Function CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Factory NEM User s i Setting Setting 11 JOG 12 Reset 13 Fieldbus 14 Stop 3 wire 15 Man Auto 16 Not used 17 Disables Flying Start 18 DC voltage regulator 19 Parameter Setting Disable 20 Load User 21 Timer RL2 22 Timer RLS 0 Not Used 3 JOG 172 1 Local Remote 2 General Enable 3 JOG 4 No External Fault 5 Increase E P 6 Ramp 2 7 Multispeed 51 8 Fast Stop 9 Speed Torque 10 JOG 11 JOG 12 Reset 13 Fieldbus 14 Start 3 wire 15 Man Auto 16 Not Used 17 Disables Flying Start 18 DC Voltage Regulator 19 Parameter Setting Disable 20 Load User 21 Timer RL2 22 Timer RLS 0 Not Used 6 Ramp 2 173 1 Local Remote 2 General Enable 3 JOG 4 No External Fault 5 Decrease E P 6 Ramp 2 7 Multispeed 52 8 Fast Stop 9 Speed Torque 10 JOG 11 JOG 19 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE User s 12 Reset 13 Fieldbus 14 Stop 3 wire 15 Man Auto 16 Not Used 17 Disables Flying Start 18 DC voltage regulator 19 Parameter setting disable 20 Load user 21 Timer RL2 22 Timer P2
50. 9 1 4 500 600 V Power Supply 2 9 4 2 7 10 12 14 Model Current Voltage 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 Load CTT Maximum Output Current 21 Rated Input Curent A ras 52 52 125 125 15 15 175 175 Rated Switching Frequency kHz _5 5 5 5 Maximum Motor hp kW 9 2 1 5 3 2 2 3 2 2 5 3 7 5 3 7 7 5 5 5 7 5 5 5 10 7 5 10 7 5 12 5 9 2 12 5 9 2 Watts Loss W Lm we roo veo veo zo 200 Frame Size IB t 2 2 2 Note CT Constant Torque VT Variable Torque Factory Default 338 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 22 27 32 Model Current Voltage 500 600 500 600 500 600 Load 0 Power kVA 21 31 9 Rated Output Current 22 32 Maximum Output Current 48 Rated Input Current i 40 Rated Switching Frequency kHz 5 Maximum Motor hp kW 9 20 15 25 18 5 25 18 5 30 22 30 22 Watts Loss W 6 750 Frame Size 4 44 53 63 79 Model Current Voltage 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 Load gr vr vr Power 43 8 98 6 Rated Output Current A 99 Maximum Output Current A 66 66 795 795 945 945 118 5 118 5 Rated Input Current A 46 56 56 66 66 8 83 104 Rated Switching Frequency kHz 2 5 Maximum Motor hp kW 75 55 100 75 Wats Loss kW 9 25 Frame Siz
51. Active error 0 No 1 Yes EL 14 PID Regulator 0 Manual 1 Automatic EL 13 Undervoltage 0 Without 1 With EL 12 Local Remote Control 0 Local 1 Remote EL 11 JOG Control 0 Inactive 1 Active EL 10 Direction of rotation 0 Counter Clockwise 1 Clockwise EL 09 General Enabling 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EL 08 Start Stop 0 Stop 1 Start Low Order Bits they indicate the error code number i e 00 01 09 11 OBh 12 0Ch 13 0Dh 24 18h 32 20h and 41 29h Refer to item 7 1 Faults and Possible Causes 2 Motor Speed This variable is shown by using the 13 bit resolution plus signal Thus the rated value will be equal to 8191 1FFFh clockwise rotation or 8191 E001h counter clock wise rotation when the motor is running at synchronous speed or base speed for instance 1800 rpm for IV pole motor 60 Hz 3 Status of the Digital Inputs Indicates the content of the Parameter P012 where the level 1 indicates active input with 24 V and the level 0 indicates the inactive input with O V Refer to item 6 1 Access and Read Parameter The digital inputs are so distributed in this byte Bit 7 DI1 status Bit 3 DI5 status Bit 6 DI2 status Bit 2 DI6 status Bit 5 DI3 status Bit 1 DI7 status Bit 4 014 status Bit O 018 status 4 Parameter Content This position permits to read the inverter parameter contents that are selected at Position 4 Numb
52. Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P200 0 or 1 P200 Password 1 Result Disables the Password and allows changing parameters content independently of POOO Enables the Password and allows changing parameters content only when is set to the password value Table 6 13 Password The factory default for the password is 5 To change the password refer to POOO P201 47 0 to 3 P201 Language Selection 0 Language Portugu s English Espanol 3 Deutsch Table 6 14 Language selection P202 1201 0105 202 Type of Control Type of Control 0 1 0 VIF 60 Hz 50 Hz V F Adjustable Refer to P142 to P146 Sensorless Vector Vector with Encoder VVW Voltage Vector WEG Table 6 15 of control selection For details on the Type of Control selection Refer to item 5 3 P203 0 or 2 It defines the selection type of special functions opecial Function 0 P203 Functions Selection 0 Not Used 1 PID Regulator 2 Mechanical Brake Logic Table 6 16 Special function selection 203 1 For the special function of PID regulator refer to detailed description of related parameters P520 to P535 When P203 is changed to 1 P265 is changed automatically to 15 Manual Auto P203 2 When P203 is changed to 2 parameters P220 P222 P224 P225 P227 P228 P264 P265 P266 P279 and P313 are automatically changed
53. Figure 6 23 Parameter transference CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P204 Action 0 1 2 9 Not Used No action 3 Reset P043 Resets the Time Enabled hour meter to zero 4 Reset P044 Resets the kWh counter to zero 5 Load WEG 60 Hz Resets all parameters to the 60 Hz factory default values 6 Load WEG 50 Hz Resets all parameters to the 50 Hz factory default values 7 Load User 1 Resets all parameters to the values stored Parameter Memory 1 8 Load user 2 Resets all parameters to the value stored in Parameter Memory 2 10 Save User 1 Stores all current inverter parameter values to Parameter Memory 1 11 Save User 2 Stores all current inverter parameter values to Parameter Memory 2 Table 6 17 Action of loading saving parameters NOTE The action of loading saving parameters will take effect only after P204 has been set and the key is pressed P205 0107 Selects which of the parameters listed below will be shown on the display Display Default 2 as a default after the inverter has been powered up P205 Display Default 0 P005 Motor Frequency 003 Motor Current P002 Motor Speed 007 Motor Voltage 006 Inverter Status 009 Motor Torque P070 Motor Speed and Motor Current P040 PID Process Variable IO Table 6 18 Options displays default 149 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPT
54. The memory of user 2 is loaded when the DIx status changes from high level to low level transition from 24 V to 0 V and P265 to P269 20 provided the current parameter contents of the inverter have been transferred previously to the parameter memory 2 P204 11 Inverter Parameters P265 to P269 Dix 20 Dix 24 V User 1 P265 to P269 Dix 20 Figure 6 35 Details about the operation of the function load user via DIx Ug NOTE Ensure that when using this function the parameter sets User Memory 1 and 2 are totally compatible with the used installations motors ON OFF commands etc User memory cannot be loaded when motor is enabled When two different motor parameter sets are saved into the User Memory 1 and 2 respectively set for each user the correct values at the Parameters P156 P157 and P158 When the function Parameter Setting Disable is programmed and the DIx input 15 24 V the parameters cannot be changed independent of the values that have been set at POOO and P200 When the Dix input is set to 0 V the parameter changing will be conditioned to the values set at POOO and P200 175 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter 176 Factory Setting Description Notes Timer RL2 RL3 function enables and disables the Relays 2 and 3 RL2 and RL3 When the timing function of the relays 2 and 3 is programmed at any DIx and when th
55. Times required during the communication of a message Communication Rate dm 9600 kbits sec 4 010 ms 19200 kbits sec 2 005 ms 38400 kbits sec 1 003 ms Tass Time to transmit one word of the message lime between bytes can not be longer than T Minimum interval to indicate the begin and the end of the message 3 5xT entre bytes 3 5 11 CFW 09 frequency inverters operate as slaves of the Modbus RTU network The communication initiates with the master of the Modbus RTU network requesting a service for a network address When the inverter is configured to the corresponding address it processes the question and answers to the master as requested The CFW 09 frequency inverters use a serial interface for the communication with the Modbus RTU network There are two ways to perform the connection between the network master and the CFW 09 8 14 2 2 Inverter Configuration in the Modbus RT U Network 8 1423 Access to the Inverter Data CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES RS 232 The interface is used for the point to point connection between a single slave and the master Maximum distance 10 meters Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS 232C Three wires transmission TX reception RX and return 0 V The serial interface RS 232 must be used HANAN A RS 485 This interface is used for multipoint connection several slaves and the master Maximum distance 1000 meters
56. bit 11 1 control of the output RL2 bit 12 1 control of the output RL3 Low order bits define the status desired for each output bit 0 output status 001 0 output inactive 1 output active bit 1 output status 002 0 output inactive 1 output active bit 2 output status RL1 0 output inactive 1 output active bit 3 output status RL2 0 output inactive 1 output active bit 4 output status RL3 0 output inactive 1 output active 4 Parameter Number to be Read Through this position you can read any inverter parameter You must enter the number corresponding to the desired parameter and its content will be displayed in Position 4 of the Read Inverter Variables 5 Number of the Parameter to be changed Parameter Content Changing This position works jointly with Position 6 below If no Parameter change is desired you have to enter in this position the code 999 During the changing process you must 1 Maintain in Position 5 the code 999 2 Change the code 999 by the parameter number you want to change 3 If no fault code 24 to 27 is displayed in the E L replace the code number by the code 999 to end the change The change can be checked through the HMI or by reading the parameter content NOTES 1 The control change from Scalar Control to Vector Control will not be accepted if any of the parameters P409 to P413 is set to zero This must be effected through the HMI 2 Do not
57. 0 1 A 100 1 gt 99 9 1 to 100 Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs function Zero Speed and the 1 Zero Speed Disable Refer to P211 and P212 1 96 1 to 100 Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs function At Speed 1 to 200 Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions Torque gt Tx and 100 Torque Tx In this output mode the motor torque indicated in 1 96 parameter P009 is compared with the value programmed in P293 The setting is expressed in of the motor rated current P401 100 0 to 6553 Used in the functions of the digital outputs Hours Enabled higher than 4320 Hx 1h 193 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P295 0 to 82 Even if some models withstand a higher current for VT applications the Inverter Rated According to the setting of P295 shall be kept in accordance with the inverter rated current Current CFW 09 rated current forCT Do not modify the value of P295 for VT applications application 194 220 230 V Models 130 A IN 2 9 A 4 2 10 12A 14A 22 27 32 44 A 79 A 600 A 652 A 794A 897 A 978 A 1191 A 1345 A 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 25 72 73 76 78 79 81 500 600 V Models Size 4 above 500 hp IN 3 6A 4A 5 5 13A 16A 24 30A 38 45 60
58. 0 to 40 Is gt Ix 6 Relay Output RL1 13 No Fault Is lt Ix 7 Function Torque gt Tx 8 Torque lt Tx 9 Remote 10 P279 1 0 to 40 run 11 11 Relay Output RL2 2 N gt Nx ready 12 Function No Fault 13 No E00 14 No E01 E02 E03 15 280 0 to 40 No E04 16 Relay Output RL3 1 N gt Nx No E05 17 Function 4 to 20 mA 18 BE CNN 16 a Fieldbus 19 FWD Br Proc Var VPx lt 3 Ride Through E Pre charge OK 24 With error 25 Enabled Hours gt Hx 26 PLC Timer N gt NxandNt gt Nx 290 Brake Vel Real Speed 30 Brake Ref SE Total Reference Overweight Slack Cable 33 Torque Polarity 34 Torque Polarity 35 gt 1 398 71 F gt Fx_2 Set point Process Variable EE No E32 LS Ready 2 480r Table 6 42 Functions of the outputs outputs BLO gt N OOO INI Oo NID Oo AJOIN e n2 180 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes Additional Notes about the Digital Output Functions Remote Inverter is operating in Remote mode Run Inverter is enabled the IGBTs are switching the motor may be at any speed includ
59. 1 Ride Through for V F Control Mode or VVW The Ride Through function for the and VVW Control Modes works in a different manner than in the Vector Control Mode As soon as the line supply falls to a value lower than the undervoltage E02 Trip level refer to item 7 1 the IGBT inverter is disabled no voltage pulses at the motor There is no tripping due to undervoltage and the DC Link voltage will slowly fall until the line supply comes back If the line supply takes too long to come back more than 2 s the inverter may trip by 02 or E70 If it comes back before the inverter will start the motor with a voltage ramp like in the Flying Start function The voltage ramp time is defined also in P331 Refer to figures 6 44 a and b The parameter P332 used for the Ride Through function sets the minimum time which the inverter will wait to restart the motor after voltage re establishment This time is computed from the line loss and is required for the motor demagnetization Set this time at two times the motor rotor constant refer to table in P412 The Ride Through function allows recovering the inverter without 02 trip under voltage during a momentary power supply interruption CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Line Supply Returns DC Link Voltage aS SS SS sec SSS 202 level i P332 i gt Enabled Output Pulses Disabled P331 Output Voltage Figure
60. 30 ft The HMI can be connected to the inverter using a cable length up to 200 m 600 ft Itis necessary to use an external power supply of 15 Vdc according to figure 8 16 Inversor Screw Do not use nut and washer GND 15 V 300 mA Rr External power supply Figure 8 16 Cable for remote keypad connection 10 m 261 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 Ext power supply 9 9 Ext power supply CABLE CONNECTION Connector Pin Inverter Side HMI Side 2 Table 8 9 Pin connection 089 for Signal Rx TX GND 15 V Shield cable gt 10 m 32 80 ft and lt 200 m 656 ft 8 5 BLANK COVERS As shown in figure 8 17 two types of blank covers are available to be used in the inverter or in the frame when the keypad is not in place a CFW 09 Blank Cover b CFW 09 Blank Cover with Power to be mounted in the frame and Error LEDs to be mounted in the inverter Figure 8 17 a and b CFW 09 blank covers 86 RS 232 PC CFW 09 can be controlled programmed and monitored an RS 232 COMMUNICATION KIT Serial Interface The communication protocol is based on question response telegrams according to ISO 1745 and ISO 646 standards with ASCII characters exchanged between the inverter and a master network controller which can be a PLC PC etc The maximum transfer rate is 9600 bps The RS 232 serial interface is not galvanically isolated from the O V reference of th
61. 34 Torque Polarity 35 Torque Polarity 36 F gt Fx_ 1 37 gt _2 38 Set Point Process Variable 39 No E32 40 Ready 2 22 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE t Functi Adjustable R arameters justapie mange Setting Setting age 277 Relay Output RL1 Function 0 Not Used 13 No Fault 1 gt 2 N gt Nx 3 N lt Ny 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 6 15 gt Ix 7 15 lt 1 8 gt 9 lt 10 Remote 11 Run 12 Ready 13 No Fault 14 No E00 15 E01 E02 E03 16 204 17 E05 18 4 to 20 mA 19 Fieldbus 20 FWD 21 Proc Var gt VPx 22 lt 23 Ride Through 24 Pre charge OK 25 Fault 26 Enabled Hours gt Hx 27 28 Not Used 29 gt Nx and gt Nx 30 Brake Actual Speed 31 Brake Total Reference 32 Overweight 33 Slack Cable 34 Torque Polarity 35 Torque Polarity 36 F gt Fx_ 1 202 38 Set Point Process Variable 39 No E32 40 Ready 2 P279 0 Relay Output RL2 Function 0 Not used 2 N gt Nx 180 1 gt 2 gt 3 N lt Ny 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 23 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE EDEN aration Adjustable Ran ER arameters justapie nange Setting Setting age 6 gt Ix 7 15 lt 1 8 gt 9 lt
62. 380 480 V RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION d AUXILIARY CIRCUIT FUSES AUXILIARY gt CIRCUIT FUSES XE t Figure 3 8 b Rated voltage selection on boards 1 51 CIP2 LVS2 RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION 53 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c LVS2 size 7 500 600 V d CIPS size 8E 10E 500 690 V RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION m Hi S e 1 28 AUXILIARY ____ gt CIRCUIT FUSES a T Pe G e M LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR UL 500V 525V 550 575 600 oe ES os Pin RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION oH eo oS co cS Ej AS Co Co co Co Figure 3 8 and Rated voltage selection on boards LVS1 2 LVS2 CIP3 3 2 4 Power Grounding Wiring and Fuses ATTENTION Sensitive equipment PLCs temperature controllers thermocouples etc and its wiring must stay at a minimum distance of 10 in 0 25 m from the frequency inverters the reactors and from the input and motor power cables When flexible wires are used for power and grounding connections it is necessary to provide appropriate crimp terminals Use wire sizing and fuses as recommended table 3 5 54 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION CFW 09 Rating Powe
63. 60 Hz Cooling Self ventilated 93 CHAPTER 5 START UP ORIENTED START UP Initial Power up Programming via Keypad HMI Based on the example above ACTION After power up the display shows the following message Press the Gros key to enter the programming mode Use the Q and keys to select the language Press the PROG key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode Press the key to go the next parameter Press the PROG key to enter the programming mode 94 DESCRIPTION Language Selection 0 Portugu s 1 English 2 Espanol 3 Deutsch Enter the programming mode Selected Language 1 English Exit the programming mode Inverter Rated Voltage Selection 0 220 V 230 V 1 380 V 2 400 V 415 V 3 440 460 4 480 5 500 V 525 V 6 550 V 575 V 7 600 V 8 660 V 690 V Enter the programming mode ACTION N Use the and keys 10 select the inverter power supply voltage Press the to save the selected option and exit the programming mode N Press the key to to the next parameter Press the Gros key to enter the programming mode Use the and keys 10 the correct motor rated voltage value Press the Gros key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode N Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the mog key to enter the programming m
64. 7 972 1V 1063 to 1200 P296 8 1174 1V 0 0 to 500 0 0 0 1 0 lt 99 9 1Q gt 100 0 00 to 650 2 60 0 01 kW lt 9 99 0 1 kW gt 9 99 1 kW 99 9 Description Notes Inverter Vnom E01 220 230 V 375V gt 400 380 V 1 400416 V 440 460 V 480 V 500 525 V 55055V 6 ev gt 1000 600 V 660 690 8 1174V gt 1200 Table 6 9 Hecommended settings of the dynamic braking actuation DC Link Voltage Ud P004 E01 Overvoltage Level P153 a Dynamic Braking Level Time Time Figure 6 16 Curve of the dynamic braking actuation actuate the Dynamic Braking Connect the DB resistor Refer to chapter 8 Set P154 and P155 according to the size of the Dynamic braking resistor Set P151 to its maximum value 400 V P296 0 800 V P296 1 2 3 or 4 1000 V P296 5 6 or 7 1200 V P296 8 to avoid actuation of the DC Link Voltage Regulation before Dynamic Braking Resistance value of the Dynamic Braking resistor in ohms P154 0 disables the braking resistor overload protection Must be programmed to 0 when braking resistor is not used Adjusts the overload protection for Dynamic Braking resistor Set it according to the power rating of the DB resistor in kW If the average power in the braking resistor during 2 minutes is higher than the value set at P155 the inverter trips on an E12 fault
65. 8 10 3 Dynamic Braking module Inthe CFW 09 220 230 V or 380 480 V types with currents higher or equal to DBW 01 and DBW 02 180 A dynamic braking uses the DBW 01 external braking module For 500 690 V and 660 690 V with currents higher or equal 100 A dynamic braking uses the DBW 02 external braking module Power Wiring Braking RMS Minimum Inverter Brakin 9 BR UD UD Supply Voltage 9 Resistor mm AWG V Types Module A A 3 70 20 SOO ICT Fomwowowbzmwsr 4x 00 2 2x8 2x10 000210282 o 770 2 soe oswowsoozwwsz am am 2 2x 10 5840910300605 4x e 2 TOIT 100 A 107 A 250 210 120 250 MCM 20280 MOM moy AETA 20250 MOM 660 690 V 225 47 120 250 280 2x10 2x80 EXT 50 340 A 418 DBW020380D5069SZ 2 x 120 2 x 250 MCM 428 472 DBW020380D5069SZ 2 x 120 2 x 250 Table 8 13 Inverter corresponding DBW 380 480 N 1 maximum current be calculated by a set value at P153 V value of the resistor ohms ma 2 The rms braking current be calculated by min br where corresponds to the sum of the braking 5 actuation times during the most severe 5 minute cycle 3 The minimum resistor value of each s
66. 8 14 3 2 Function 03 Read It reads the content of a group of registers that must be compulsorily in a Holding Register numerical sequence This function has following structure for the read and response messages the values are always hexadecimal values and each field represents one byte 321 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Query Master Slave address Function Initial register address byte high Initial register address byte low Number of registers byte high Number of registers byte low CRC CRC Response Slave Slave address Function Byte Count Field Data 1 high Data 1 low Data 2 high Data 2 low etc to CRC CRC Example Read of the value proportional to the frequency value 002 and motor current P003 of the CFW 09 at address 1 Query Master Response Slave Field Value Initial register byte high 04h Initial register byte low 02h POO02 hgh O3h Number of registers byte high 00 P002 ow 84h Number of registers byte low 00h CRC CRC ee _ P003 om 35h 7Ah Each register is always formed by two bytes high e low For the example we have P002 0384h that in decimal number is equal to 900 As these parameters do not have a decimal place indication the real read value is 900 rpm In the same way we will have a current value P003 0035h that is equal to a 53 decimal As the current has a decimal resolution
67. 9 BRE 51 6 Frame Size Lx 10E 259 305 340 428 Model Current Voltage 660 690 660 690 660 690 660 690 vt 6 406 340 4 388 5 510 642 s 428 E 3E ME 400 300 400 300 Load Power kVA Rated Output Current A 9 Maximum Output Current A 388 5 Rated Input Current A ie O Rated Switching Frequency kHz 2 5 Maximum Motor hp kW 6 300 220 350 250 400 300 400 300 500 370 500 370 Watts Loss kW 68 82 82 1 11 Frame Size DRE AGEREM 10 107 147 211 Model Current Voltage 2 2 247 50 500 690 500 690 500 690 Load CT D e a Power 9 120 152 310 Rated Output Current 9 127 259 150 337 5 337 5 Maximum Output Current Rated Input Current A 100 127 259 Rated Switching Frequency kHz Maximum Motor hp kW 9 150 110 on a for 85 300 220 Watts Loss kW 9 3 jai 41 s 6 Frame Size ee Te 10E 315 343 418 472 200 690 500 690 500 690 500 690 Model Current Voltage Load er vr Gr vr enr Power kVA 5 365 406 406 512 512 Rated Output Current 9 NE EK CHE HE E 428 Maximum Output Current 388 5 642 Rated Input Current A Rated Switching Frequency kHz Maximum Motor hp
68. 90eq e00V 00 1 uW eeig 99 914 1955440 eC 1993 01 A3H OMJ 1399V c0Ld X ZIY dues 610d ES Oved 159 3 and 4 Figure 6 26 Block diagram of the speed reference Valid only for P202 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 2914 7 E Jopoou3 SW 21 peeds pejeuuns3 S a cu 4SNVH 4 101216 SN SA ua uny 921 19 Buizjeubey G Ld d5 081d EUIWON 821 5 910 49 cu 20 Liu ln s j SAHNI Jopooue IND 9914 b enbjJo 19 LA3H 0 14 b4 YOUMS 262d 7914 49 XEN 6914 279 0 1949H NO uBnouu Op 3 ae E 210 330 gt sn 3 peeds dd 9 enbJo XEN Lvzd ZE d ElV ZIV 00 0 19 001 4049 Figure 6 27 Block diagram of the Vector Control 160 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION P202 Type of Control
69. Default FWD 3 Keypad Default REV 4 012 5 Serial Default FWD 6 Serial Default REV 7 Fieldbus Default FWD 8 Fieldbus Default REV 9 Polarity Al4 10 PLC FWD 11 PLC REV P227 9 Remote Start Stop Selection 0 I and 0 Keys 1 DIx 157 1 Dix 2 Serial 3 Fieldbus 4 PLC P228 8 Remote JOG Selection 0 Disable 2 013 to 018 157 1 Keypad 2 013 to 018 3 Serial 4 Fieldbus 5 PLC Stop Model Definition P232 Stop Mode Selection 0 Ramp to Stop 0 Ramp to Stop 163 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Analog Inputs P233 Analog Inputs Dead Zone Off 0 Off BEEN 163 1 234 Analog Input Al1 Gain 0000 Input Al1 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 164 P235 Analog Input Al1 Signal 0 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 0 0 to 10 V 165 1 410 20 0 to 20 mA 2 10 to 0 20 to 0 mA 3 20 to 4 mA Analog Input 400 490 loo 168 P237 Analog Input Al2 Function 0 P221 P222 0 P221 P222 165 1 N without ramp 2 Maximum Torque Current 3 PID Process Variable 4 Maximum Torque Current 12 P238 Analog Input Al2 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 166 15 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Parameters Function Factory User s Adjustable Range Setting NM Setting 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 0 0 to 10 V 166 4 10 20 0 10 20 10 to 0 V 20 to 0 mA 20 t
70. Function Function Initial bit address byte high Byte Count Field number of data bytes Initial bit address byte low Byte 1 Number of bits byte high Byte 2 Number of bits byte low Byte 3 CRC etc to CRC CRC CRC Each response bit is placed at a position of the data bytes sent by the slave The first byte from the bits 010 7 receives the first 8 bits from the initial address indicated by the master The other bytes if the number of the read bits is higher than 8 remain in the same sequence If the number of the read bits is not a multiple of 8 the remaining bits of the last byte should be filled out with 0 zero Example reading of the status bits for general enable bit 1 and direction of rotation bit 2 of then CFW 09 at the address 1 Query Master Response Slave Field Value Slave address 01h 01h Function 01h 01h Initial bit address byte high 00h Oth Initial bit address byte low 01h 02h Number of bits byte high 00h Number of bits byte low 49h CRC EE E CRC OBh As the number of read bits in the example is smaller than 8 the slave required only 1 byte for the response The value of the byte was 02 that as binary value will have the form 0000 0010 As the number of read bits 15 equal to 2 only the two less significant bits that have the value 0 general disable and 1 direction of rotation are of interest The other bits as they did not be requested are filled out with 0 zero
71. In case of accessing any other parameter the inverter will trip with an error code E25 For additional information refer to item 5 3 3 Start up Type of Control VVW EL2 4 not used 309 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES EL2 5 not used EL2 6 not used EL2 7 not used V07 code 00807 Status of the Operation Mode read write variable CL2 0 1 It exit after reset from the setting mode to factory setting CL2 1 1 After changing it exit from Scalar or VVW Control to Vector Control CL2 2 1 Aborts self tuning CL2 3 1 Exits the setting mode after changing the Control Mode from V Hz or Vector to VVW CL2 4 1 Not used CL2 5 1 Not used CL2 6 1 Not used CL2 7 1 Not used V08 code 00808 Motor speed 13 bits read variable It permits the reading of the motor speed with a 13 bit resolution refer to item 8 13 3 2 8 13 5 2 Examples of Telegrams with Basic Variables Inverter enabling provided P224 2 to LOC or P227 2 to REM Master orl Teepe Te ops fm ee ae M C L Code general enabling 1 ramp enabling 1 add 7 2 Inverter Change of the direction of rotation to reverse provided P223 5 or 6 to LOC or P226 2 5or 6 to REM Master C L Code reverse add 7 310 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS A
72. Notes P232 Stop Mode 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Table 6 33 Stop mode selection Parameter P232 is valid only for the following commands 1 The key 0 of the keypad 2 Start Stop function with 2 wire control through 1 3 Start Stop function with 3 wire control refer to parameters from P265 to P270 for a complete description about the function 14 In the V F Mode the option 2 Fast Stop is not available AM NOTE When the Coast to Stop option is selected only start the motor if itis completely stopped This parameter is active only for the analog inputs Alx programmed as speed reference When setto 1 enables the Dead Zone for the Analog Inputs If P233 0 Off the zero signal at the Analog Inputs 0 V O mA 4 mA or 10 V 20 mA is directly related to the minimum speed programmed at P133 Refer to figure 6 28 a M If P233 1 On the Analog Inputs have a dead zone and the speed reference remains at its minimum value defined by P133 until the input signal reaches a level proportional to the minimum speed Refer to figure 6 28 b a Inactive Dead Zone P233 0 Reference 163 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes b Active Dead Zone P233 1 Reference Alx Signal Figure 6 28 a and b Actuation of the analog inputs When the Analog Input Al4 is programmed for 10 V to 10 V
73. P202 0 ou 1 V F V Total Reference Speed P202 2 Adjustable V F V V Is Output Current P137 Automatic 5 Torque BOOST e Q E Speed 8 Active Current P139 P169 Max Output Current ON Start Stop OFF P169 Is Figure 6 27 b Block diagram of the V F control Scalar 161 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION D eur 0 INMd n enbJo 4 6 10 66Ed S 4 lt 2 9 e n9 e 2 angeo w jueIxas INMd 10129A 7 MM uonesueduJoo e 04409 xn J jndino 8 14 LOVd 094 701 0014 dijs 62 9 19J9H 99191919 PA Od S 202d Figure 6 27 Block diagram of the VVW Control 162 Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit 232 0102 Stop Mode 0 Selection 5 233 Oor 1 Analog Inputs 0 Dead Zone 5 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description
74. Refer to item 8 10 Parameter P156 2 7 12 Motor Overload Current at 100 Speed P157 90 Motor Overload Current at 50 96 Speed P158 20 Motor Overload Current at 5 96 Speed CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 157 to 1 3 x P295 Motor Current 1 1 x P401 A Overload Current 0 1 A 100 a e 1 A gt 99 9 P156 to P158 0 9 x P401 0 1 lt 100 os 1A 99 9 0 2 x 295 to 157 0 55 x P401 woes 0 1 A 100 MEL UL e CNN KE E EE 1 A 99 9 IE 0 5 0 t 5 0 15 30 60 75 100 150 300 Figure 6 17 Ixt function Overload detection 55 ee 05 50 100 Speed Curve for motor with separate ventilation Curve for self ventilated motor Increased Protection Curve Figure 6 18 Overload protection levels Used to protect motor and inverter against timed overload Ixt E05 The Motor Overload Current P156 P157 and P158 is the current level above which the CFW 09 will consider the motor operating under overload The higher the overload the sooner the Overload Fault E05 will Occur Parameter P156 motor overload current at base speed must be set 10 higher than the used rated motor current P401 The overload current is given as a function of the motor speed The parameters P156 P157 and P158 are the three poi
75. The activation of the Ride Through function can be visualized at the P296 0 outputs DO1 DO2 RL1 RL2 and or RL3 P275 P276 P277 P279 252 V and or P280 provided they are also programmed to 23 Ride Through 1V 307 V to 487 V 8 NOTE When one of the functions Ride Through or Flying Start is activated js the parameter P214 Line Phase Loss Detection is automatically set to 0 Off Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit 324 V to 513 V P296 2 459 V 1V 356 V to 564 V P296 3 505 V 1V 388 V to 615 V P296 4 550 V 1V 425 V to 674 V P296 5 602 V 1V 466 V to 737 V P296 6 660 V 1V 486 V to 770 V P296 7 689 V 1V 559 V to 885 V P296 8 792 V 1V P322 9 178 V to 282 V Ud Ride Through P296 0 245 V 1V This parameter 307 V to 487 V is shown on the P296 1 display s only when 423 V P202 4 1V Vector Control CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Ug NOTE This parameter works together with P322 P323 P325 P326 for Ride Through in Vector Control and with P331 P332 for Control Ride Through and Flying Start UP NOTE Ud Vac x 1 35 Ride Through for Vector Control P202 z 3 or 4 The purpose of the Ride Through function in Vector Mode P202 3 or 4 is to ensure that the inverter maintains the motor running during the line loss not allowing interruption or fa
76. The user shall set this parameter manually for other motor types This parameter controls the self tuning routine which estimates the value of parameters related to the motor under use When P408 is set to options 1 2 or 3 the self tuning routine estimates the value of parameters P409 to P413 When this parameter is set to option 4 the self tuning routine only estimates the value of parameter P413 Note Best results for the self tuning routine are obtained with a hot motor Self tuning Type of Control Na No he gt No rotation Sensorless Vector Vector with Encoder or VVW Run for Imr Sensorless Vector or Vector al Table 6 62 Self tuning options No rotation The motor remains stationary during the self tuning routine The value of P410 is obtained from a table which is valid for WEG motors up to 12 poles Thus P410 must be set to zero before starting the self tuning routine If P410 0 the self tuning routine will keep the existing value Note When using a non WEG motor set P410 to the proper value no load current before running the self tuning routine Run for Imr The value of P410 is estimated with the motor rotating This option shall be executed without load coupled to the motor T ATTENTION If the self tuning routine is executed with a load coupled to the motor and with P408 set to option 2 Run for Imr a wrong value of P410 Imr may be obtained This will result in a wr
77. Type of disabling by E28 E29 E30 0 Disable via Start Stop 1 Disable via General Enable 2 Not Used 3 Changes to LOCAL 1 4 Changes to LOCAL 2 5 Causes Fatal Error 356 to 564 P296 3 388 to 615 P296 4 425 to 674 P296 5 466 to 737 P296 6 486 to 770 P296 7 559 to 885 P296 8 P322 Ud Ride Through 178 to 282 P296 307 to 487 P296 324 to 513 P296 356 to 564 P296 388 to 615 P296 425 to 674 P296 466 to 737 P296 486 to 770 P296 7 559 to 885 P296 8 P323 Ud Line Recover Level 178 to 282 P296 307 to 487 P296 324 to 513 P296 356 to 564 P296 388 to 615 P296 425 to 674 P296 5 466 to 737 P296 6 486 to 770 P296 7 gt S gt A A A 28 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE z aa Factory User s arameters unction Justabie nange Setting Setting 559 to 885 P296 8 DeviceNet Drive Profile P335 DeviceNet I O Instances 0 Instances 20 70 0 Instances 20 70 1 Instances 21 71 Instances 100 101 Instances 102 103 336 owe 337 338 206 P339 P341 207 P342 P343 207 P344 345 OutputWord 7 00079 fo _ oO P346 VO Words Quantity 207 PARAMETERS FOR CRANE APPLICATIONS AND FOR MASTER SLAVE FUNCTION P351 to P399 Logic for the Mechanical Braking Operation P351 4 Delay for
78. Units per inverter 541513219 1 __ 203 841513220 CIP2A 03Board oe 841513221 2 541513228 253 541513229 CIP2A 53 Board 14 841518230 14 08 5202 SKHESMECIO s41511540 RE CANO i pasas CFI 0 541510226 Interface Board with HMI Optional i i i a a EBAT 01 sestono Function expansion Boara T 341511761 Function Expansion Board Optional ___ 4 s 5 2 0 4 EIOS Optional e ora ae EBB 01 1510200 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 t t 1 EBB 02 541511788 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 EBB 03 641511796 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 EBB 04 541512671 Function Expansion Board Optiona 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EBB 05 541512741 Function Expansion Board Optional f 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 341513174 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 02 541513175 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 1 1 03 841513176 Function Expansion Board 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 8011 00 341510846 88 232 Module ior PC Optional
79. Vector Control with encoder encoder wiring or connection to motor is inverted V When the effective overspeed exceeds the value of P134 P132 longer than 20 ms Incompatible parameters were programmed Refer to table 4 2 Keypad cable misconnected V Electrical noise in the installation electromagnetic interference Motor is under an actual overload condition Duty cycle is too high too many starts stops per minute V Ambient temperature is too high Motor thermistor miswiring or short circuit resistance 100 Q at the terminals XC4 2 and XC4 3 of the optional board EBA or at the terminals XC5 2 and XC5 3 of the optional board EBB P270 programmed to 16 unintentionally with EBA EBB board not installed and or motor thermistor not connected V Motor in locked rotor condition Overweight V Brake Failure The load was too heavy and the CFW 09 operated at torque limitation for a period longer than allowed Failure on the brake opening caused the CFW 09 to operate at torque limitation for a period longer than allowed v Memory error or any internal inverter circuit defective Table 7 1 cont Faults and possible causes FAULT E70 Internal DC Supply Undervoltage E71 Watchdog error for the PLC board CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING RESET POSSIBLE CAUSES v Power on loss at the R or 5 input Manual Reset key Co Auxiliary circuit fuse blown
80. are shown End of the Self tuning routine Inverter is back to normal operation Press the Start key N Press the and hold until 1800 rpm is reached LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY P dU CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION Self tuning Mode Selection 0 1 No Rotation Enter the programming mode Only select option 1 No Rotation Self tuning routine in progress 2 Motor Speed rom Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm Minimum Speed in the Forward CW direction of rotation 3 for 4 pole motors Motor accelerates up to 1800 rpm for 4 pole motors 115 CHAPTER 5 START UP ACTION e LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Press the FWD REV key Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm IJ and then reverses the direction of Obs The LEDs on the keypad show whether the motor is running FWD or REV Press the 0 Stop key Press the 406 key and hold it Release the 206 key 116 rotation accelerating back 1800 rom Motor decelerates down to 0 rom Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to the speed set at P122 Ex P122 150 rom CCW direction of rotation Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm NOTE The inverter always stores the last speed reference value set through the keypad Therefore if you want to change this value before enabling the inverter use the parameter P121 Keypad Speed Reference NOTES 1 P401 maximum value is 1
81. gt 2 38 Set Point Process Variable 39 No E32 40 Ready 2 P283 Time for RL2 ON 0 0 to 300 fs 186 n 284 Time for RL2 OFF 0 0 to 300 s 186 P285 Time for RL3 ON 0 0 to 300 O_o s 186 il Nx Ny Ix Zero Speed Zone N z N and Tx P287 Hysteresis fr NwNy 00 50 Ho 193 P2886 NxSpeed Oto P134 120009 193 NySpeed 0024 1 150 193 P2900 Rome Hogssxpan _ 193 P292 N NBed S 193 P293 TxToqe 010200 t0 193 P294 Hours Hx 0069 420 h 193 Inverter Data P2950 Inverter Rated Current 220 230 V Models According to 194 3 6A 10 28A Inverter Model 4 7A 13 45 6 10 14 54 7 1 16 70 8 16 17 86 9 24 18 105 19 130A 25 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Parameters 26 Function Adjustable Range 380 480 V Models 0 3 6 1 4 2 5 5A 5 9 7 1 8 16 9 24 11 12 13 45 15 60 16 70 17 866 18 105 20 142 21 180 55 211 22 240 67 312 23 361 24 450 69 515 25 600 33 686 34 855 35 1140 36 1283 37 1710 82 1468 500 600 V Models 39 2 40 4 2 4 7 6 10A 4123124 42 14A 43 22A 44 27 45 32 46 44 47 258
82. j N gt Nx and Nt gt Nx Relay Transistor OFF OFF I 4 to 20 mA Relay Transistor Output ON OFF ON n Process Var gt VPx Process Var Relay Transistor OFF p Process Var lt VPy VPy P534 Process Var ON ON Relay Transistor OFF Figure 6 39 cont i to p Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions 188 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Logic the Brake Activation when DOx or Relay 30 or 31 m CFW 09 EE nd N t Nx PETS Is gt Ix V F Control Activate 7 Is gt Imr Release the brake Auxiliary the brake No Error Auxiliary Figure 6 39 cont q Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions NOTES 1 Torelease the brake transition from NO to NC it is performed the comparison in series Is gt Ix Is gt Imr the check of start command be in Run and Without Error 2 Toengage the brake transition NC to it is performed the comparison by N gt Nx ou N t Nx 3 When P202 4 Vector with Encoder the brake will not engage when the speed pass by zero in the reversal of the rotation direction 4 The hysteresis used in the comparison gt Nx or N t gt Nx be adjusted
83. the motor will lose flux and torque if too high the motor running starts to oscillate at rated speed or even this speed may not be reached In this case decrement P410 or P178 till speed oscillation stops or the rated speed is reached Value estimated by the Self tuning routine The setting of P412 determines the gains of the flux regulator P175 and P176 The value of P412 is estimated by the self tuning routine for motors up to 75 hp 55 kW For higher ratings this parameter is set according to the values for the WEG standard motors table 6 63 shows typical values for some motors The value of this parameter affects the speed accuracy for the Sensorless Vector Mode Control Usually the self tuning routine is run when the motor is cold Depending on the motor the value of P412 may vary more or less according to the motor temperature Therefore when running a hot motor adjust P412 so that the loaded motor speed measured at the motor shaft with a tachometer is the same as that indicated on the inverter keypad P001 This setting shall be performed at the half of the rated speed For P202 4 Vector with Encoder Control if the setting of P412 is incorrect the motor will lose torque In this case set P412 so that the motor current P003 reaches the lowest value at the half of the rated speed and with a steady load In the Sensorless Vector Control the value of the parameter P175 will be limited in the range 3 0 x P175
84. the factory setting for the parameters is loaded P204 5 or 6 In this mode only the parameters 023 P295 P201 P296 P400 P401 P403 P402 P404 and P406 can be accessed If any other parameter is accessed the inverter displays E25 For more details refer to item 5 2 Initial Start up EL2 1 1 in setting mode after changing the Scalar Control to Vector Control The inverter enters in this operation mode when the Control Mode is changed from Scalar Control P202 0 1 VVW P202 5 to Vector Control P202 3 or 4 In this mode only the parameters 023 P202 P295 P296 P400 P401 P403 P402 P404 P405 P406 P408 P409 P410 P411 P412 and P413 can be accessed If any other parameter is accessed the inverter displays E25 For more details refer to item 5 3 2 Start up Operation Type of Control Vector Sensorless or with Encoder EL2 2 1 Self Tuning execution The inverter enters in this operation mode when P202 3 or 4 and P408 gt 0 For more details about Self tuning refer to chapter 6 Detailed Parameter Description Parameter 408 EL2 3 1 in the setting mode after changing the Control Mode from V Hz or Vector Controls to VVW The inverter will enter in this operation mode when the control is changed from V Hz P202 0 1 or 2 or Vector P202 3 or 4 to VVW P202 5 In this mode only parameters P023 P202 P295 P296 P400 P401 P403 P402 P404 P406 P407 P399 P408 P409 are accessible
85. 0 3 EtherNet IP Figure 8 44 Example of an EtherNet IP network 287 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 288 Fieldbus Connector Connector RJ 45 connector with 8 pin Pinout two standards for straight through cables are available EtherNet T 568A 568 The function of each pin is shown in figure 8 45 a and b The cable to be used with the CFW 09 shall follow one of these two standards Furthermore only one standard shall be used for the cables i e the connectors of both cable ends shall be crimped according to standard T 568A or T 568B a RJ 45 Plug T 568A Standard 12345678 White Green Cable Color White Orange Brown 12345678 White Green 12345678 White Brown STRAIGHT Figure 8 45 a and b Straight Through EtherNet cables Line Termination With the EtherNet 10BASE T 10 Mbps or 100BASE TX 100 Mbps the line termination is already on the communication board and also on any other device that uses a point to point twisted pair cable Therefore no additional setting is needed for the CFW 09 Communication Bit rate The CFW 09 can operate in an EtherNet network at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and also in half duplex or full duplex modes When operating at 100 Mbps in full duplex mode the effective rate doubles to 200 Mbps These configurations are performed through the network configuration and programming software No boa
86. 01 P142 4A 00 S41513112 Power Board P142 4A 00 P142 4A 01 S41513113 Power Board P142 4A 01 HMI CFWO09 LED S417102023 HMILED Optional EE KMR CFWO09 S417102036 Kit KMR Optional 1 CFI1 01 S41510226 Interface Board with HMI Optional 1 EBA1 01 S41510110 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBA1 02 S41511761 Function Expansion Board Optional EBA1 03 S41511770 Function Expansion Board Optional 01 641510200 Function Expansion Board Optional EBB 02 S41511788 Function Expansion Board EBB 03 S41511796 EBB 04 S41512671 EBB 05 S41512741 Function Expansion Board Optional Function Expansion Board Optiona x x gt xe xe x x Function Expansion Board Optiona Optional 240 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Type 5 Name Specification 38 45 60 70 86 105 142 Units per inverter EBC1 01 EBC1 02 EBC1 03 CB7D 00 41513136 BoaracB7D 00 _ 7 00 541513134 1 1 _ CB4D 00 941513058 BoaracBaD oo f 15 CB4E 00 841513107 BoaracBaE o0 __ __ 111 SCI1 00 Current Trasformer 0307 2495 Current transformer 200 A 100 mA 1 the types specified with braking DB Models 380 480 V Type 5 Name Item Specification 515 600 Units per inverter IGBT Module 0303 7118
87. 0208 2079 35 0208 2080 35 0208 2081 28 0208 2082 28 0208 2083 0208 2084 60 6 1 Bus 99 0208 2085 0208 2086 1151 042 0208 2087 1151 043 0208 2088 1151 044 According to the manufacturer this filter be used up to 331 Table 3 14 Technical specifications of EMC filters for the CFW 09 inverter series 74 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION a EPCOS B84143A8R105 Filter 133 7 PE x 11 wa _ Marking b EPCOS B84143A16R105 Filter 5 x15 60 Marking 46 4 LINE LOAD L Figure 3 20 b EMC filters 09 inverter series dimensions 19 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c EPCOS B84143A25H105 Filter PE M6x 14 46 4 d EPCOS B84143A36R105 and B84143A50R105 Filter PE M6x 14 Figure 3 20 c and d EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions in mm 76 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION e EPCOS B84143A66R105 Filter 200 PE M6 x 14 Marking f EPCOS B84143A90R105 Filter 135 PE M10 x 34 Terminals 35 mm Figure 3 20 e and f EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions in mm 77 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION g EPCOS B84143A120R105 Filter 150 PE M10 x 34 Terminals 35 mm h EPCOS B84143G150
88. 1 SCI1 00 S41510846 RS 232 Module for PC Optional 237 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Models 220 230 V Types 5 54 70 86 105 130 Units per Inverter Name Item Specification Pre charge 035502345 ContCWMs20220V5060Hz 1 1 Contactors 095502894 ContCWMs0 00220 v 50 60 Hz a Pre charge Resistor 0301 1852 Vitrified wire Resistor20R75W a t 000 6267 Fano400 s682Length200mm 2 5000 5127 FanO400 3682Lengn285mm Fan Fan 0400 qu pop we 5000 5364 5000 5216 Fano4003683lengm3o0mm 1 15 _ EE aan 0305 5604 RetFuseOSAGQ0VFNORI 2 2 2 2 HMI CFW09 LCD 9 00 LVS1 01 541510927 Board 1 1 1 f 00 DPS1 00 541512431 Power Supplies and Firing Board af KML CFWOS DPS1 01 541512440 Driver and Power Supply Board 1 1 1 541510552 Power Board P54 2 00 Jo P54 2 01 541511443 Power Board P54 2 01 1 t70 200 541511354 Power Board P70200 J 1 P70 2 01 541511451 Power Board P70 2 01 1 86 200 541510501 Power Board P6200 1 86 2 01 541511460 Power Board P86 2 01 d 105 200 541511362 Power Board P105 2 00 1 P105 2 01 541511478 Power Board P105 2 01 11 Pia0 200 sasioage Pow
89. 1 Set the board configuration via 52 and 53 dip switches Refer to table 8 2 2 Carefully insert terminal block XC3 EBA into the female connector XC3 of the CC9 control board Check that all pins fit in the XC3 connector 249 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 250 Press on the board near XC3 and on the left top edge until com plete insertion of the connector and plastic spacer Secure the board to the metallic spacers with the screws provided Plug XC11 connector of the EBA board to the XC11 connector of the 9 control board EBA BOARD EBA BOARD CC9 Board x 8 Screw 1Nm Torque Figure 8 3 EBA board installation procedure 8 1 2 Expansion Board Differential input for incremental encoder with isolated Included Features internal 12 V power supply Buffered encoder output signals isolated input signal CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES OFF Switch Function Standard ON S2 1 Al4 Speed reference 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA S3 1 5 485 Without termination With termination 120 Q 63 2 RS 485 A LINE Obs Both 53 1 and 53 2 switches must be set for the same option ON or OFF Note For Size 1 models the 1 board interface between the CC9 control board and the HMI must be removed to clear access to these switches Table 8 2 a EBA board selector switches configurations
90. 10 83 45 27 2 70 0 59 0 39 The Through Surface Mounting kit kit KMF is set of supports for the CFW 09 as shown on figure 3 4 b Table 3 4 Cutout dimensions and kits for CFW 09 through surface mounting 3 1 4 Keypad HMI and Cover Removal a Sizes 1 and 2 b Sizes 3 to 8 and 8E Screw p gt Figure 3 5 a and b Keypad HMI and cover removal procedure 48 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c Sizes 9 and 10 10E Figure 3 5 c Keypad HMI and cover removal procedure 3 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION DANGER The information below will be a guide to achieve a proper installation Follow also all applicable local standards for electrical installations DANGER Be sure that the AC input power is disconnected before making any terminal connection DANGER The CFW 09 frequency inverter cannot be used as an emergency stop device Provide another devices for this function Pb 3 2 1 Power Grounding The power connection terminals can be of different sizes and configurations Terminals depending on the inverter model as shown in figure 3 6 Terminals R S supply line Models up to 10 at 220 230 V be operated with two phases single phase operation without current derating In this case the AC supply can be connected to any 2 of the 3 input terminals U V W Motor connection UD Negative pole of the DC Link circuit BR Dynamic Braking resisto
91. 3 5 chapter 3 Figure 8 57 Tetra polar armored cable The control and power wiring access to the inverter is through the cable glands All the cable glands come with a gasket inside To make the electrical installation it is necessary to remove the gasket from the cable gland and then pass the armored multi core cable in the cable gland After doing the electrical connection and arrange the cables properly tight the cable glands to assure that the cable is very strongly fastened The recommended torque is 2 N m 0 2 kgf m The control wiring has to be made by armored multi core cables too It is necessary to use this type of cables to guarantee total closing after cable glands tightening Check the maximum and minimum diameter of the cables supported by the Cable Glands in figures 8 55 and 8 56 To guarantee NEMA 4X degree of protection it is very important to close correctly the inverter after doing the electrical installation Please follow these instructions After the electrical installation is completed and the cable glands tightened close the frontal cover certify that the flat cable that interconnects the HMI to the control is correctly connected by tightening each screw a little time until total tightening The gaskets provide the protection of the electronic parts of the SHARK inverter Any problem with them can cause problems with the protection degree Opening and closing the inverter many times redu
92. 3 6 Ato 24 A 380 480 V and 2 9 Ato 14 500 600 V Install the 2 bottom mounting bolts first rest the inverter on the base and then mount the 2 top bolts 43 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION AN MN 3 1 3 1 Mounting Inside a Panel 44 ATTENTION When inverters are installed side by side maintain the minimum recommended distance B When inverters are installed top and bottom maintain the minimum recommended distance A C and deflect the hot air coming from inverter below ATTENTION Provide independent conduits for signal control and power conductors Refer to item 3 2 Electrical Installation imm 50 2in Model CFW 09 6Ato 28 A 220 230 V 3 6 A to 24 A 380 480 V 2 9 A to 14 A 500 600 V 45 A to 130 A 220 230 V 30 A to 142 A 380 480 V 22 A to 79 A 500 600 V 180 A to 361 A 380 480 V 450 A to 600 A 380 480 V 107 A to 472 A 500 690 V 100 A to 428 A 660 690 V Table 3 2 Hecommended free spaces When inverters are installed in panels or closed metallic boxes adequate cooling is required to ensure that the temperature around the inverter will not exceed the maximum allowed temperature Refer to Dissipated Power in item 9 1 For reference table 3 3 shows the cooling airflow for each inverter model CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Inverter Cooling Method Internal fan flow direction from the bottom to the top 09 Inverter Model m3
93. 40 1 02 EBB 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 51 00 EBB 04 05 EBCTO 02 03 5011 00 Models 660 690 Types 100 127 179 225 259 305 340 428 Units per Inverter Name Specification Item N Inverter Arm S417104462 Inverter Arm 305A EP mU n E 12 5417104463 Inverter Arm 340 A EP EN 5417104464 Inverter Arm 428 E 0303 9978 Thyristor Diode Module TD250N16 3 EE Thyristor Diode 0303 9986 Thyristor Diode Module TD425N16 NE mE Modul WSS 0303 9994 Thyristor Diode Module TD500N16 NK NE Rectifier Bridge 0298 0026 Rectifier Bridge 36 160 1 1 1 1 Pre charge Resistor 0301 9250 Vitrified Wire Resistor 35 R 75 W 6 8 C3 3 3 3 O 246 Electrolytic Capacitor Fuse HMI CFW09 LCD KML CFWO09 CC9 DPS3 CRG7 CRG6 FCB2 CIP3 RCS3 51 GDB1 00 HMI CFWO09 LED KMR CFWO09 CF11 01 1 01 1 02 1 03 01 02 EBB 03 EBB 04 EBB 05 EBC1 01 EBC1 02 EBC1 03 SCI1 00 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Types Amp res Specification 100 127 179 225 2591 305 340 428 Units per Inverter 0302 4801 0305 6166 2 __________ 641509651 Control Board 541512834 Driver Power Supply B
94. 6 44 a Ride Through actuation line returns before time set at P332 elapses in V F mode Line Supply Returns DC Link Voltage E02 level Enabled Output Pulses Disabled Time Ajusted P332 2 gt P332 Output Voltage Figure 6 44 b Ride Through actuation line returns after time set in P332 but before 2 sec for P332 lt 1 sec or before 2 x P332 for P332 gt 1 sec in V F mode 205 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P335 0 to 3 This parameter is applicable only if an optional DeviceNet Drive Profile DeviceNet 0 communication kit were used Instances It allows programming the I O instances used by the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface These instances define the contents and the number of I O words exchanged with the network master P335 DeviceNet I O Instances 0 Instances 20 70 1 Instances 21 71 2 Instances 100 101 3 Instances 102 103 Table 6 56 DeviceNet instances The modification of this parameter will become valid only after cycling the power of the inverter In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface refer to the CFW 09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual P336 0 to 749 These parameters are applicable only if an optional DeviceNet Drive Input Word 3 0 Profile communication kit were used P337
95. 60 70 86 105 Model Current Voltage 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 Load vr Power kVA 24 29 30 36 36 43 48 56 56 68 68 84 84 100 Rated Output Current A 30 36 38 45 45 54 60 70 70 86 86 105 105 130 Maximum Output Current A 45 s 9 105 129 158 Rated Input Current A EI Rated Switching Frequency kHz at a Tae 25 5 25 zu ies Hi 22 22 37 37 45 45 55 Waits Loss KW 060 070 020 oc oo 126 11 20 120 150 so 1 00 1 80 226 Frame Size ES AR sess o 142 180 211 240 312 361 450 515 600 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 Load CT err Model Current Voltage Power kVA 113 138 143 161 191 238 287 358 3925 478 Rated Output Current A 142 174 180 21 240 312 361 450 600 Maximum Output Current A 23 270 317 360 468 542 65 900 Rated Input Current A 170 209 191 223 24 331 383 477 636 Rated Switching Frequency kHz 22 9 i 2 5 Maximum Motor hp kW 9 00 125 150 175 200 250 300 350 450 500 75 90 110 130 5 150 186 5 335 7 375 Watts Loss kW 9 2 4 2 10 Ca es fa
96. 7 A 500 600 V 107 A 147 Aand 247 A 500 690 V 100A 127 A and 340 A 660 690 V Torque Current it is the component of the motor total current responsible for torque generation used in Vector Control Active Current it is the component of the motor total current proportional to active electric power absorbed by the motor used in V F control 117 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 6 1 ACCESS AND READ ONLY PARAMETERS to 99 Parameter 000 Parameter Access Password Value Setting Speed Reference 002 Motor Speed 003 Motor Current 118 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 to 999 0 0 0 to P134 1 0 0 to P134 1 rpm 0 0 to 2600 0 1 lt 100 1 gt 99 9 Description Notes This parameter opens the access to change other parameter values When P200 1 Password Active it is necessary to set POOO 5 to change parameter values By programming with the password that releases access to changing of parameter content plus 1 Password 1 you will obtain access only to the parameters with different content that the factory default setting To change the password to any other value password 1 proceed as follows 1 Set POOO 5 current password and P200 0 password inactive 2 Press the Key 3 Change P200 to 1 password active 4 Press again display shows 000 5 Press again d
97. 8 10 1 DB Resistor Sizing 268 Driving Panel Conduit or shielded cable install it as near as possible the Motor ERI inverter Earth Frame Figure 8 21 filter connection Instructions for the RFI filter installation Install the inverter and the filter on a metallic grounded plate as near to each other as possible and ensure a good electrical contact between the grounded plate and the inverter and filter frames M Ifthe cable between inverter and filter is longer than 30 cm 12 in use shielded cable and ground each shield end on the grounded mounting plate NOTE Installations that must meet the European standards refer to item 3 3 The amount of braking torque that can be generated when a motor is controlled by an inverter without dynamic braking or any other braking schemes varies from 10 96 to 35 of the motor rated torque During the deceleration process the kinetic energy of the load is regenerated into the inverter s DC Link This energy loads up the capacitors increasing the DC Link voltage When this energy is not fully dissipated it may generate a DC Link overvoltage trip EO1 To obtain higher braking torque the use of Dynamic Braking where the excess regenerated energy is dissipated in an external resistor is recommended The Dynamic Braking is used in cases where short braking times are required or where high inertia loads are driven For Vector Control Modes the Opt
98. 999 the detection logic for the error E34 is disabled This error is only active in Vector Modes P202 3 or 4 NOTE When a fault occurs the following steps take place 20010 208 E10 E11 E12 E13 E15 E17 E32 E33 E34 and E71 No Fault relay drops out PWM pulses are stopped LED display indicates the fault code LCD display indicates the fault code and description The ERROR LED flashes The following data is stored in the EEPROM Speed reference via Keypad or E P Electronic Potentiometer if the function Reference Backup is active P120 set to 1 On Fault code The status of the x tfunction motor overload The status of the powered time P042 and Enabled Time P043 209 Does not allow inverter operation E24 Indicates the code on the LED display plus and description on the LCD display It blocks the PWM pulses It doe nor permit motor driving It switches OFF the relay that has been programmed to Without Error It switches ON the relay that has been programmed to With Error M 1 The inverter continues to operate normally It does not accept the Keypad commands The fault code is indicated on the LED display The LCD display indicates the fault code and description E31 is not stored in the fault memories P014 to 017 and 060 to P065 E41 Does not allow inverter operation The fault code is indicate
99. A 500 600 V 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 428 660 690 V models have a DC Link inductor built in the standard version It is not necessary to have minimum supply impedance or add external line inductors for protecting these models The line reactor or the DC Link Inductor shall be applied when required impedance is insufficient for limiting the input current peaks thus preventing damages to the CFW 09 The minimum required impedances expressed as impedance drop in percent are following a Forthe model with rated current x 130 A 220 230 V x 142 A 380 480 V or lt 32 A 500 600 V drop of 1 96 for the line voltage b Forthe model with rated current gt 180 A 380 480 V drop of 2 for the line voltage c For models with rated current gt 44 A 500 600 V or gt 107 A 500 690 V or gt 100 A 660 690 V there is no requirement for the minimum required line impedance for the CFW 09 protection These impedances are ensured by the internal existing DC choke The same is applicable when DC Link inductor is incorporated into the product Special Hardware Code HC or HV in the models with currents gt 16 A 220 230 V gt 13 A 380 480 V and lt 240 A 380 480 V As an alternative criteria a line reactor should be added when the inverter supply transformer has a rated power higher than indicated below CFW 09 Rated Current Transformer volts Power kVA 6 Ato 28 A 220 230 V 3 6 A to 24 A 380 480 V 125 2 9 Ato 14 A 500
100. E33 0 0 to 99 9 s99 s 2 P352 0 Ese for E34 0 to 999 208 P3530 Delay for N lt Nx Brake Activation 0 0to 200 o0 s 208 P354 Delay for Resetting the Integrator 0 0 to 10 0 208 xem mt P355 Delay for Accepting New 0 0 to 10 0 S 208 ewe o o t po 209 P356 Delay for Ramp Enable 0 0 to 10 0 00 J s Indication of the Torque Current Polarity 0 P357 Torque Current Iq Filter 0 00 to 9 99 poo _____ 209 P358 Torque Current Iq Hysteresis 0 00 to 9 99 200 209 Parameters for Load Detection P361 Load Detection 0 Off 0 1 P362 Stabilization Speed 010 134 go mm 2 P363 Stabilization Time 0 1 to 10 0 o1 s 210 P3640 Slack Cable Time 0 0 to 60 0 s 20 P365 Slack Cable Level 0 0 to 1 3 x P295 0 1 x P295 a 210 P366 Lightweight Level 0 0 to 1 3 x P295 0 3 x P295 A 20 tt P367 Overweight Level 0 0 to 1 8 x P295 1 1 x P295 210 P368 Speed Reference Gain 1 000 to 2 000 1 000 210 L DC Braking P371 DC Braking Time at Start 0 0 to 15 0 ______ __ ___ 213 P372 DC Braking Current Level 0 0 to 90 0 400 218 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Parameter Adjustable R Factory xus es Setting Setting age VVW Control P398 Slip Compensation During 0 1 On 213 Regeneration 1 P399 1 2 Motor R
101. IP 6 I O DeviceNet Drive Profile 01 Table 6 49 Fieldbus options It s only applicable if an optional Fieldbus communication kit were used NOTE If the or PLC2 boards are used the parameter P309 must be programmed as inactive P310 001 WH This parameter allows programming the bit 6 of the Fieldbus control STOP Detection in a 0 word refer to item 8 12 7 2 Variable Written in the Inverter Profibus Network Bit 6 CFW 09 Action Executes a General Disable command If bit6 0 regardless of the value of the remaining bits of the On control word Executes the commands If bitG 1 that were programmed at the remaining bits of the control word Table 6 50 STOP detection in a Profibus network 198 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes If this parameter is set to ON the bit 6 of the control word shall be kept in 1 to the inverter operation It will allow the inverter to be disabled in case of STOP in the master of the Fieldbus network where the control word is reset all bits are set to zero P312 0 to 9 P312 Type of Serial Protocol Type of Serial 0 0 WBUS Protocol Protocol 1 Modbus RTU 9600 bps 2 Modbus RTU 9600 bps odd 3 Modbus RTU 9600 bps even parity 4 Modbus RTU 19200 bps no parity 5 Modbus RTU 19200 bps odd parity 6 Modbus
102. In addition to these 30 addresses there are two other addresses to perform special tasks Address 0 any network inverter is inquired independently of its address Only one inverter can be connected to the network point to point in order to prevent short circuits in the line interface Address 31 a control can be transmitted to all inverters in the network simultaneously without acceptance recognition List of addresses and corresponding ASCII characters ADDRESS ASCII P308 HEX 0 40 UT 2 86 4 3 43 4 D 88 44 5 6 45 6 46 7 47 8 48 9 1 73 49 10 4B 12 4 13 40 14 4 i5 o 79 4 16 50 19 53 20 54 21 55 22 86 56 23 54 24 58 25 _ _ 89 59 26 Table 8 20 ASCII characters 301 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 13 2 2 RS 232 8 13 3 Protocol Definitions 8 13 3 1 Used Terms 302 Other ASCII characters used in protocol ASCII CODE HEX 0 30 1 31 2 32 3 33 4 34 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 38 9 39 3D STX 02 ETX 03 EOT 04 ENQ 05 06 06 NAK 21 15 Table 8 21 ASCII characters used in protocol The connection between the network participants is performed through a pair of wires The signal levels are according to STANDARD EIA RS 485 with differential receivers and transmitters Expansion boards of the types EBA 01 EBA 02 or EBB 01 refer to items 8 1 1 and 8 1 2 When the master is fitted with only a s
103. Inactive 4 DeviceNet 2 I O 8 EtherNet IP 4 I O 1 Profibus DP 2 I O 5 DeviceNet 4 I O 9 6 I O 2 Profibus DP 4 6 DeviceNet6 for EtherNet IP Profibus DP 6 for DeviceNet 10 DeviceNet Drive for Profibus DP 7 EtherNet IP 2 I O Profile P313 defines the inverter behavior when the physical connection with the master is interrupted and or the Fieldbus board is inactive E29 E30 The parameter P313 has the following options 0 Disables the inverter by using the Start Stop controls via deceleration ramp 1 Disables the inverter by using the General Enabling stop by inertia 2 The inverter status is not changed 3 The inverter goes to Local mode 4 The inverter changes to Local mode keeping the commands and the reference 1 Logical Status of the inverter 2 Motor speed For the option P309 1or 4 2 0 read 1 and 2 Status of the Digital Inputs P012 4 Parameter Status For the option P309 2 or 5 4 0 it reads 1 2 3 and 4 5 Torque current P009 6 Motor current P003 For the option P309 or 6 6 0 it reads 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 1 Logical Status E L The word that defines the E L is formed by 16 bits being 8 bits of high order and 8 bits of low order It has the following construction CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES High Order Bits they indicate the status of the associated function EL 15
104. P226 the value for the torque current limitation is set at parameter P169 When the speed regulator is negatively saturated i e in the reverse direction set in P223 P226 the value for the torque current limitation is set at parameter P170 The torque limitation with the saturated speed regulator has also protection function limitation For instance in a winder if the winding material is disrupted then the regulator leaves the saturated condition and starts controlling the motor speed which will be limited by the speed reference value 140 Parameter Range Factory Setting Unit CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Torque limitation settings The torque can be limited as follows 1 Through parameters P169 P170 by using the keypad the Serial Wegbus protocol or the Fieldbus protocols 2 Through Al2 P237 2 Maximum torque current 3 Through 241 2 Maximum torque current Notes The motor current shall be equivalent to the CFW 09 inverter current so that the torque control can achieve its best precision The Sensorless Control P202 3 does not work with torque limitation at frequencies lower than 3 Hz Use the Vector with Encoder Control P202 4 for applications that require torque limitation at frequencies lower than 3 Hz M The torque limitation P169 P170 shall be greater than 30 in order to guarantee the motor start in the Sensorless
105. P264 and P266 equal to 8 Reverse Run P221 7 and P222 7 and 265 5 or P267 5 or P266 5 or P268 5 without reference E P and with DIx increase E P or with DIx decrease E P 9 P265 or P267 or P269 equal to 14 and P266 and P268 and P270 different than 14 with Start Stop 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Co CO PO PMP BL CO oOo 35 P266 or P268 P270 equal to 14 and P265 and P267 and P269 different than 14 with Start and DIx Stop P220 gt 1 and P224 P227 1 without Dlx set for Start Stop DIx Fast Stop or General Enable P220 0 and P224 1 and without DIx Start Stop or Fast Stop and without DIx General Enable P220 1 and P227 1 and without Dlx Start Stop or Fast Stop and without DIx General Enable START and DIx STOP but P224 z 1 and P227 1 Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 15 MAN AUT Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 17 Disables Flying Start Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 18 DC Voltage Regulator Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 19 Parameter Setting Disable Two or more parameters between P265 P266 P267
106. P268 and P269 equal to 20 Load user DIx P296 8 and P295 4 6 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 or 49 P295 incompatible with inverter model To avoid damages of the internal inverter components P296 5 6 7 8 and P297 3 P297 incompatible with inverter model Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 21 Timer RL2 Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 22 Timer RL3 P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 21 and P279 28 P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 22 and P280 28 P279 28 and P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 z 21 P280 28 and P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 z 22 P202 lt 2 and P237 1 or P241 1 or P265 to P270 JOG or P265 to P270 JOG P203 1 and P211 1 and P224 0 or P227 0 P220 0 and P224 1 and P227 0 or P227 1 and P263 0 P220 1 and P224 0 or P224 1 and P227 1 and 263 0 P220 2 and P224 0 or P224 1and P227 0 or P227 1 and P263 0 P225 or P228 0 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 30 or 31 JOG with the Mechanical Brake Logic P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 10 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 30 or 31 JOG with the Mechanical Brake Logic P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 11 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 30 or 31 JOG with the Mechanical Bra
107. P340 P341 P342 P343 P344 and P346 New options for fault Reset General revision Update of software version to 4 4 New incompatibilities for E24 Fieldbus operation with mechanical brake logic Special function for mechanical brake logic in parameter P203 Section Refer to item 8 12 and 8 13 Refer to item 7 5 Refer to item 3 1 2 and 9 4 Refer to item 6 Refer to item 6 Refer to item 8 Refer to item 3 Refer to item 6 Refer to item 8 Refer to items 2 4 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 4 2 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 2 7 4 7 5 8 7 1 8 10 1 9 1 and 9 1 3 Refer to item 6 Refer to item 8 Refer to item 8 Refer to items 1 to 9 Refer to item 8 Refer to items 1 6 7 and 8 Quick Parameter Reference Fault and Status Messages Parameters 09 Il Fat a aac durius ae 33 riae dados 34 CHAPTER 17 Safety Notices 1 1 Safety Notices in the 35 1 2 Safety Notices on the 35 1 3 Preliminary Recommendations 35 CHAPTER 2 General Information 2 Marlies cuevas 37 22 odisse dU o RM 37 2 3
108. PLC DeviceNet AO1 AO2 DCS EtherNet IP 3 Relay Outputs 5 Human Machine Interface Figure 2 1 CFW 09 block diagram CHAPTER 2 GENERAL INFORMATION 2 4 CFW 09 IDENTIFICATION LABEL AND CODE NUMBER WEG Part Software Serial Number Number Revision MADE IN BRAZIL CFW 09 Model PATENT 6 326 752 7 n MOD CFW090024T3848PSZ MAT 2345678 V1 234 12345678 SERIAL 1234567890 5 gt Nominal Input Data Das REDE LINE 380 480VAC 1 28 84 3 28 80 3 Phase cedo SAIDA OUTPUT 0 REDE LINE 170 204Hz 24A OKHZ VT 24A n 4 Nominal Output Current and m4 Switching Frequency for VT and pd EQ CT Loads Location of the CFW 09 Nameplate FRONT VIEW VIEW A LC OAMARU HH MADE IN BRAZIL ULSA 6 326 762 nn OL MOD CFW090024T3848PSZ MAT 12345678 1 234 12345678 123420780 03H REDE LINE 380 480 50 60Hz SADNQUIPUT 0 R DEALINE Xo 170204Hz 24A 24A SkHz Du cc 6 a Figure 2 2 CFW 09 identification 39 o yga eui pue jenuew A 022 022 1 1ndui
109. RTU 19200 bps even parity 7 Modbus RTU 38400 bps no parity 8 Modbus RTU 38400 bps odd parity 9 Modbus RTU 38400 bps even parity Table 6 51 Type of serial protocol It defines the protocol type used for the serial communication P313 0 to 5 P313 Disabling with E28 E29 E30 Disabling with 0 0 Disable Start Stop E28 E29 E30 Disable General Enable No Action Changes to LOCAL 1 Changes to LOCAL 2 Keeping the Commands and the Reference Causes Fatal Error oy lt N Table 6 52 Disabling with E28 E29 E30 Defines the inverter behavior when the serial communication 15 inactive causing error E28 when physical connection with the master of the Fieldbus is interrupted causing error E29 or when the Fieldbus board is inactive causing error E30 Refer to item 8 12 7 For P313 4 when the inverter detects Fieldbus communication fault and changes from Remote to Local mode then the Start Stop and the speed reference commands the inverter was receiving in Remote mode will be kept in Local mode if these commands were 3 wire Start Stop and Electronic Potentiometer or Start Stop and reference via HMI For P313 2 5 when the inverter detects Fieldbus communication fault a fatal error will be generated in the equipment disabling the motor and making it necessary an error reset so that the operation be possible again 199 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P314 Time for
110. Rating specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency AC power drive systems EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods EN55011 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of industrial scientific and medical ISM radio frequency equipment CISPR11 Industrial scientific and medical ISM radio frequency equipment Electromagnetic disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement EN61000 4 2 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 2 Electrostatic discharge immunity test EN61000 4 3 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 3 Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field immunity test EN61000 4 4 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 4 Electrical fast transient burst immunity test EN61000 4 5 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 5 Surge immunity test EN61000 4 6 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC Part 4 Testing and measurement techniques Section 6 Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields EN60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code UL50 Enclosures for electrical equipment 9 3 OPTIONAL DEVICES 9 3 1 I O Expansion Board EBA
111. Register address byte low Value for the register byte high Value for the register byte high Value for the register byte low Value for the register byte low CRC CRC CRC CRC Example write of the speed reference basic variable 4 equal to 900 rom of a CFW 09 at address 1 Please remember that the value for the basic variable 4 depends on the used motor type and that the value 8191 is equal to the rated motor speed In this case we suppose that the used motor has a rated speed of 1800 rpm thus the value to be written into the basic variable 4 for a speed of 900 rpm is the halve of 8191 i e 4096 1000h Query Master Response Slave Register high Value low 00h CRC 41h CRC 65h For this function the slave response will be again a copy identical to the request made by the master As already informed above the basic variables are addressed from 5000 thus the basic variable 4 will be addressed at 5004 138Ch 323 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 14 3 5 Function 15 Write This function allows writing values for a bit group that must be in numerical Multiple Coils sequence This function can be also used to write a single bit the values are always hexadecimal and each field represents one byte Query Master Response Slave Slave address Slave address Function Function Initial bit address byte high Initial bit address byte high Initial bit address byte low Initial b
112. To Time in rpm Is Output Current P003 Th Ramp Hold Time Im Average Current N Speed Reference Iq Torque Current N Real Speed Figure 6 46 b Details of the operation of digital functions Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit P370 0 0 to 15 0 Hysteresis for Fx 2 0 0 1 Hz P371 0 0 to 15 0 DC Braking Time 0 0 at Start 0 15 This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 Sensorless or 5 VVW P372 0 0 to 90 0 DC Braking 40 0 Current Level 0 1 96 Jg This para meter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 Sensorless P398 0 or 1 Slip Compensation 1 During Regeneration JJ This para meter is shown on the display s only when P202 5 VVW P399 12 50 0 to 99 9 Rated Motor According to the Efficiency motor rated power 404 This para 0 1 95 meter is shown on the display s only when 202 5 VVW CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs F gt Fx The DC braking at start consists of applying a DC current to the motor between the Start command and the motor acceleration This parameter adjusts the DC braking time at start for the VVW and Sensorless Vector Control Modes If the inverter is disabled during the DC braking operation the braking process will continue until the braking time set at P371 finishes After that the inverter
113. analog output P251 and or P253 13 will remain at 0 V or 0 mA 4 mA When the speed value is above the value set at P259 then the analog output will vary between its minimum and maximum value 171 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P263 Digital Input 011 Function P264 Digital Input DI2 Function P265 1 9 Digital Input DI3 Function P266 Digital Input DI4 Function P267 Digital Input DI5 Function 172 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 to 3 1 Start Stop 0 to 8 0 FWD REV 0 to 22 0 Not Used 0 to 22 0 Not Used 0 to 22 3 JOG Description Notes A01 A02 20 mA 10 V 4 mA OV P259 P134 n Figure 6 32 Dead zone for speed indication M NOTES For current analog output 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA it is necessary to use the EBB expansion board Avoltage analog output 0 to 10 V is available at the CC9 control board The analog outputs AO3 and 4 do not have this function i e set P255 and or P257 13 will program no function Check possible options on table 6 41 and details about each function s operation on figure 6 37 The status of the digital inputs can be monitored at Parameter 012 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes pital fes m row ros o om Digital Input 016 6 Ramp 2 Function
114. and P241 0 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs Al1 and 12 When parameters P237 2 and P241 2 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the signal at the Analog Input 2 When parameters P237 4 and P241 2 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs Al1 and 12 When parameters 237 4 and P241 4 the torque current P169 and P170 is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs Al1 and Al2 Note The range of the sum between Al1 and Al2 may vary from 0 to 180 96 If the sum result is negative then the value will be set to zero P238 0 000 to 9 999 AI2 P019 Analog Input Al2 1 000 N2 Pors Gain 0 001 238 239 Filter P248 OFFSET P240 Figure 6 30 Block diagram of the analog input Al2 The internal value of AI2 is the result of the following equation Al2 2 FFSET y 10 V x Gain For example Al2 OFFSET 70 and Gain 1 00 70 70 V Al2 5 100 x10V x12 2 12 2 V means that the motor runs in reverse direction reference equal to 2 V P239 4 0 to 3 P239 Input AI2 Signal Switch S1 1 Analog Input Al2 0 0 Signal 1 ON 2 Teo m to 0 mA OFF ON 3 ON Table 6 36 Al2 signal selection 166 Parameter P240 Analog Input Al2 Offset 241 Analog Input AI3 Fun
115. and resonance problems that may occur in certain application conditions Reduces the leakage currents to ground which may avoid nuisance E11 Output Ground Fault 195 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes M The option 1 25 kHz is not valid for the Vector Control P202 3 or 4 The option 10 kHz is not valid for the Sensorless Vector Control P202 3 and for the models with supply voltage between 500 V and 690 V 2 9 Ato 79 A 500 600 V 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 Ato 428 A 660 690 V P300 0 0 to 15 0 The DC braking feature provides a motor fast stop through the injection of DC Braking Time 0 0 DC current 0 1 This parameter sets the DC Braking Time when the inverter is operating This parameter in the V F VVW or Sensorless Vector Control modes is shown on the display s only when Control Mode DC Braking at Stop P202 0 1 2 3 5 V Hz __ P300 P301 and P302 VVW P300 P301 and P302 Vector Sensorless P371 and P372 P300 P301 and P372 Table 6 48 Parameters related to the DC braking Figure 6 40 shows the operation of the DC Braking with a ramp to stop stop command Refer to P301 a V F Control Motor 24 V Start Stop b VVW and Sensorless Control Motor Time 24 V Start Stop Figure 6 40 a and b DC braking operation with a ramp to stop 196 CHAPTER 6 DETAIL
116. are longer than 100 m 300 ft the cable capacitance to ground may cause nuisance overcurrent E00 or ground fault E11 trips In this case it is also recommended to use a load reactor Load reactor near the inverter Figure 8 20 Load reactor connection The installation of frequency inverters requires certain care in order to prevent electromagnetic interference EMI This interference may disturb the operation of the inverter itself or other devices such as electronic sensors PLCs transducers radio equipment etc To avoid these problems follow the installation instructions contained in this Manual Never install electromagnetic noise generating circuits such as input power and motor cables near analog signal or control cables Care should also be taken with the radiated interference by shielding the cables and circuits that tend to emit electromagnetic waves and cause interference The electromagnetic interference can also be transmitted through the power supply line This type of interference is minimized in the most cases by capacitive Radio Frequency Filters common and differential mode which are already installed inside the CFW 09 However when inverters are installed in residential areas the installation of an external additional filter may be required In this case contact WEG to select the most suitable filter type 267 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES A 8 10 DYNAMIC BRAKING A
117. as of the CFW 09 inverter refer to item 3 1 1 For panel installation provide an additional airflow of 120 CFM 57 L s for cooling of the braking module When installing module provide free spaces around the module as shown in figure 8 24 where A 100 mm 4 in B 40 mm 1 57 in and C 130 mm 5 12 in gt Figure 8 24 Free spaces for cooling 2 2 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Check the other recommendations for the CFW 09 inverter installation since from the mechanical viewpoint the module is compatible with CFW 09 frame size 3 External dimensions and mounting holes are according to figure 8 25 150 223 E 5 905 18 78 m EN 15 388 375 365 1437 Dimension A DBW 01 DBW 02 mm in 252 9 92 271 10 91 Figure 8 25 Dimensional drawing of DBW 01 and DBW 02 mm inch Figure 8 26 Installation procedures for the DBW 01 and DBW 02 on surface 273 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Air Flow Figure 8 27 DBW 01 DBW 02 positioning The DBW 01 and DBW 02 can also be installed with a through surface mounting kit as described in item 8 11 In this case use the available installation kit which contains the respective installation supports Figure 8 28 shows the mounting cutouts 370 14 566 15 748 400 X 26 5 1 437 7 2 Figure 8 28 Cutout dimensions in air duct Dimensions mm inch
118. circuit type level 12 V Electronic circuit isolated from encoder frame Recommended number of pulses per revolution 1024 ppr For mounting the encoder on the motor follow the recommendations bellow Couple the encoder directly to the motor shaft use a flexible coupling without torsional flexibility Both the shaft and the metallic frame of the encoder must be electrically isolated from the motor min Spacing 3 mm 0 119 in Use high quality flexible couplings to prevent mechanical oscillation or backlash The electrical connections must be made with shielded cable maintaining a minimum distance of about 25 cm 10 in from other wires power control cables etc If possible install the encoder cable in a metallic conduit 254 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES At start up program Parameter P202 Type of Control 4 Vector with Encoder to operate the motor with incremental encoder speed feedback For more details about Vector Control operation refer to chapter 5 The Expanded Boards and EBB are provided with externally powered isolated encoder output signals Encoder Signals 12V differential 88C20 Power Supply L s com 9 V Relerence LS 99 1 i Te E NEN 1 E gt 0000 8 1 1 1 t Max Recommended lenght 100 m 300 ft Power supply voltage 12 Vdc
119. completely before installing or operating the CFW 09 2 GENERAL INFORMATION This chapter defines the contents and purpose of this manual and describes the main characteristics of the CFW 09 frequency inverter Identification of the 09 receiving and storage requirements are also provided 21 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This Manual is divided into 9 Chapters providing information to the user on how to receive install start up and operate the CFW 09 Chapter 1 Safety Notices Chapter 2 General Information and Receiving the CFW 09 Chapter 3 Information about the CFW 09 physical installation electrical connection power and control circuit and installation of optional devices Chapter 4 Keypad HMI Operation Human Machine Interface keyboard display Chapter 5 Start up Step by step Chapter 6 Detailed Programming Parameters Description Chapter 7 Diagnostics troubleshooting cleaning instructions and preventive maintenance Chapter8 Technical description of CFW 09 optional devices and accessories Chapter 9 Technical specifications electrical and mechanical This Manual provides information for the correct use of the CFW 09 The 09 is very flexible and allows for the operation in many different modes as described in this manual As the CFW 09 can be applied in several ways it is impossible to describe here all of the application possibilities WEG does not accept any responsibility whe
120. consequently the motor magnetization flux This feature may be useful with special applications that require rated voltage values or rated frequency values different from the standard ones Function activated by setting P202 2 V F Adjustable The factory default value of P144 8 0 96 is defined for standard 60 Hz motors If the rated motor frequency set at P403 is different from 60 Hz the factory default value of P144 can become unsuitable and may cause troubles during motor start A good approach for the setting of P144 is given by 3 P144 P403 x P142 If an increase of the starting torque is required increase the value of P144 gradually Procedures for the parameter setting of the function Adjustable V F 1 Disable Inverter 2 Check inverter data P295 to P297 3 Set motor data P400 to P406 4 Set display data in P001 and P002 P208 P210 P207 P216 andP21 7 5 Set speed limits P133 and P134 6 Set parameters of the function Adjustable V F P142 to P146 7 Enable function Adjustable V F P202 2 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes Output Voltage 142 202 2 P143 Speed 0 1 Hz Hz P146 P145 P134 Frequency Figure 6 11 Adjustable V F curve V F P150 0 to 2 P150 Action DC Link Voltage 1 0 With losses Optimal braking is active as described in P151
121. default of the key to remote P220 3 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Start Stop onnector XC1 6 D6 E EUR 14 FWD REV JOG i4 _ 1 l2 EF Figure 3 15 XC1 CC9 wiring for connection 2 Connection 3 3 Wire Control Start Stop Selection of function Start Stop with 3 wire control Parameters to be programmed Set DI3 to START P265 14 Set DIA to STOP P266 14 Program P224 1 DIx if you want the 3 wire control in local mode Program P227 1 DIx if you want the wire control in remote mode To program the rotation selection via DI2 Set P223 4 if in Local Mode or Set P226 4 if in Remote Mode 51 and 52 are momentary push buttons NO contact for Start and NC contact for Stop The speed reference can be via Analog Input Al as in Connection 2 via keypad HMI as in Connection 1 or via any other source The function Start Stop is described in chapter 6 in this manual Connector XC1 FWD REV Start Stop Figure 3 16 XC1 wiring for connection 3 65 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 66 Connection 4 FWD REV Run Selection function FWD REV Parameters to be programmed Set to FORWARD Run 265 8 Set 014 to REVERSE Run P266 8 When the FWD Run REV Run Function is programmed the function is always active in both local and remote operation modes At the same time the keys 9 and Cl
122. dimensions in mm inch 350 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Air Flow outlet f Air Flow outlet fT Air Flow inlet Figure 9 7 Size 6 dimensions in mm inch 351 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 7 Conduit for power as CDD CP A 9 2 0 36 0 36 1 DCE AK 2659 es e S 4 cable 3x 63 0 osoo rf 85 3 35 _ 5 0 79 251 9 88 7 4 E 67 5 2 66 e 810 31 89 810 31 89 84 5 3 33 fi Air Flow inlet Air Flow outlet 337 13 27 200 7 87 Air Flow inlet 14 0 55 68 5 2 70 Figure 9 8 Size 7 dimensions in mm inch 352 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 8 AND 8E DETAIL OF CUTOUT WITHOUT FLANGE 366 14 41 322 12 68 Conduit for 5 5 5 m ge A 29 6 1 17 2 TEC 15 0 59 amp 10 0 39 14 6 0 57 n d Air Flow outlet 275 10 83 CM TL 11 Air Flow inlet ae Figure 9 9 Size 8 8E dimensions in mm inch 353 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS mm in mm in
123. distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution 1 The RFI filter suggested above for model 600 A 380 480 V considers a power supply with 2 voltage drop For a power supply with 4 voltage drop it s possible to use 84143 600520 RFI filter In this case consider the same motor cable lengths and radiated emission data as shown in table above 2 Minimum output frequency 3 Minimum output frequency Table 3 9 Epcos filters list for CFW 09 inverter series with 380 480 V power supply 69 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Inverter Model 107 A 500 690 V 147 A 500 690 V 211 A 500 690 V 247 A 500 690 V 315 A 500 690 V 343 A 500 690 V 418 A 500 690 V 472 A 500 690 V 50
124. for the correct installation and operation of the CFW 09 Variable Frequency Inverter CFW 09 Instruction Manual has been written for qualified personnel with suitable training or technical qualifications to operate this type of equipment The following Safety Notices will be used in this Manual DANGER If the recommended Safety Instructions are not strictly observed it can lead to serious or fatal injuries of personnel and or equipment damage ATTENTION Failure to observe the recommended Safety Procedures can lead to materi al damage NOTE The content of this Manual supplies important information for the correct understanding of operation and proper performance of the equipment The following symbols may be attached to the product serving as Safety Notice High Voltages Components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge Do not touch them without following proper grounding procedures Mandatory connection to ground protection PE Shield connection to ground DANGER Only qualified personnel should plan or implement the installation startup operation and maintenance of this equipment Personnel must review this entire Manual before attempting to install operate or troubleshoot the 09 These personnel must follow all safety instructions included this Manual and or defined by local regulations Failure to comply with these instructions may result in personnel injury and or equipment da
125. for the same option ON or OFF for both Ex S6 1 and 6 2 ON Factory default When the outputs are set to 0 to 20 mA it may be necessary to readjust the full scale Note For Size 1 models the CF11 board interface between the CC9 control board and the HMI must be removed to clear access to these switches Table 8 4 a EBB board selector switches configurations Trimpot Factory default function RA5 1 Full scale adjustment Motor Speed 6 AO2 Full scale adjustment Motor Current Table 8 4 b Trimpots configurations EBB board JE NOTE The external signal and control wiring must be connected to XC EBB following the same recommendations as for the wiring of the control board CC9 refer to item 3 2 6 8 1 3 EBE Please download from www weg net the EBE Board Quick Guide 8 2 INCREMENTAL For applications that require high speed accuracy the actual motor speed ENCODER must be fed back via motor mounted incremental encoder The encoder is connected electrically to the inverter through the XC9 DB9 connector of the Function Expansion Board EBA or EBB and XC9 or XC10 to EBC 8 2 1 EBA EBB Boards When the board EBA or EBB is used the selected encoder should have the following characteristics Power supply voltage 12 less than 200 mA current draw 2quadrature channels 90 zero pulse with complementary outputs differential signals A A B B Z and Z Linedriver or Push Pull output
126. in figure 8 58 by the second de IGBTs bridge Figure 8 59 a shows wave shapes of the CFW 09 RB input voltage and current when the motor at the drive output is operating normally Time Figure 8 59 a Functioning during operation as motor Figure 8 59 b shows the wave shapes of the CFW 09 RB input voltage and current when the motor at the drive output is submitted to a braking process BARZ b wn gt wre Figure 8 59 b Functioning during the braking process For more details refer to the CFW 09 RB Regenerative Converter Manual Refer to www weg net 8 19 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES PLC BOARD The PLC1 and PLC2 boards allow the CFW 09 inverter to have PLC function speed reference and positioning modules This board is optional and is incorporated internally into the CFW 09 Both boards cannot be used simultaneously with the EBA EBB EBC EBE boards The PLC1 cannot be used with Fieldbus boards The PLC2 can have Fieldbus board mounted Technical Characteristics Positioning with trapezoidal and 5 profile absolute and relative Homing machine zero search Programming in Ladder language through the WLP Software Timers Contactors Coils and Contacts RS 232 with Modbus RTU protocol Availability of 100 parameters that may be set by the user through the S
127. internal bit or coil Function code 05 Broadcast supported Response time 5 to 10 ms Write Single Register Description writing in a single register of holding type Function code 06 Broadcast supported Response time 5 to 10 ms Write Multiple Coils Description writing in internal bit blocks or coils Function code 15 Broadcast supported Response time 5 to 10 ms Write Multiple Registers Description writing in register blocks of holding type Function code 16 Broadcast supported Response time 10 to 20 ms for each written register Read Device Identification Description Identification of the inverter model Function code 43 Broadcast not supported Response time 5 a 10 ms Note The Modbus RTU network slaves are addressed from 1 to 247 Master uses address 0 to send messages that are common to all slaves broadcast Data Addressing and Offset The CFW 09 data addressing is realized with an offset equal to zero that means that the address number is equal to the register number The parameters are available from address 0 zero on whilst the basic variables are available from address 5000 on In same way the status bits are made available from CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES address 0 zero on and the control bits are made available from address 100 on Table below shows the addressing of bits parameters and basic variables Parameters M A Parameter Number odbus Address
128. inverter Press the Proc key Press the keys until POOO is reached Press the 96 to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to set the password value Press the Pros key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the keys until P202 is reached CHAPTER 5 START UP The V F or Scalar Control is recommended the following cases Several motors driven by the same inverter Motor rated current lower than 1 3 of the inverter rated current For test purposes without a motor connected to the inverter The V F Control can also be used in applications that do not require fast dynamic responses accurate speed regulation or high starting torque Speed error will be a function of the motor slip When parameter P138 Rated Slip is programmed speed accuracy of 1 can be obtained The sequence below is valid for the Connection 1 refer to item 3 2 7 The inverter must be already installed and powered up according to chapter 3 and item 5 2 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Inverter is ready to be operated Enables the access to change parameters content With the factory default programming P200 1 Password Active must be set to 5 to allow parameters changes Enter the programming mode Password value factory default 5 Exit the programming mode Type of Control Selection 0 60 Hz 1
129. is entered into the CFW 09 via any reference set by P221 LOCAL mode or P222 REMOTE mode Particularly most of general PID applications uses the setpoint via the P221 1 LOC or P222 1 REM or via the and Cw keys P221 0 LOC or P222 0 REM Refer to figure 6 47 Block Diagram of the PID Regulator It sets the time constant of the Process Variable Filter Generally 0 1 will be a suitable value excepting the process variable signal has a too high noise level In this case increase this value gradually by checking the result It defines the control action type P527 Action Type 0 Direct 1 Reverse Table 6 67 PID action type Parameter P528 Process Variable Scale Factor P529 Decimal Point of Process Variable Range Factory Setting Unit 010 9999 1000 1 0 to 3 1 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Select according to the process Motor Speed Select Direct Increase Reverse Table 6 68 PID action selection Process requirement PID action type the PID action should be selected as Direct when it is required to increase the motor speed in order to increase the process variable Otherwise select the Reverse Example 1 Direct pump driven by frequency inverter and filling a tank where PID regulates the level To increase the level process variable it is required to increase the flow and consequently the motor
130. is suitable for use in circuits capable of supplying not more than 30 000 A rms symmetrical 230 V 480 V 600 V 690 The CFW 09 can be installed on power supplies with a higher fault level provided that adequate protection is provided by the fuses or circuit breaker DC Link Inductor Line Reactor Refer to item 8 7 relating to the requirement for using the Line Reactor DC Link Inductor NOTE Capacitors for power factor correction are not required at the input R S T and they MUST not be connected at the output U V W 57 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 3 2 5 2 3 2 5 3 58 Output Connections AN Grounding Connections The inverter is provided with electronic protection against motor overload This protection must be set according the specific motor When the same inverter drives several motors use individual overload relays for each motor Maintain the electrical continuity of the motor cable shield ATTENTION If a disconnect switch or a contactor is inserted in the motor supply line DO NOT operate the disconnect switch with the motor running or when inverter is enabled Maintain the electrical continuity of the motor cable shield Dynamic Braking DB With the Dynamic Braking DB option the DB resistor shall be mounted externally Figure 8 22 shows how to connect the DB resistor Size it according to the application not exceeding the maximum current of the braking circuit Use twisted ca
131. limit will be also maximum P169 P170 180 96 The option 3 Process Variable defines the input AI3 as feedback signal of the PID Regulator for instance pressure temperature sensor etc if P524 1 When 3 is set to its maximum value P020 100 95 the PID process variable will be on its maximum value 100 95 Option 4 Maximum Torque Current AI3 Al2 When parameters P237 0 and P241 2 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI3 When parameters P237 0 and P241 4 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI2 and 167 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P242 Analog Input AI3 Gain P243 Analog Input AI3 Signal P244 Analog Input AI3 Offset P245 Analog Input Al4 Gain 14 bit Analog Input of the optional board EBA Refer to chapter 8 P246 Analog Input Al4 Signal 168 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 0 001 0 to 3 0 100 0 to 100 0 0 0 0 1 96 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 0 001 0to4 0 Description Notes When parameters P237 2 and P241 2 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the signal at the Analog Input Al2 When parameters P237 2 and P241 4 the torque current limit P169 and P170 is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs 2 and When
132. min 6 A to 13 A 220 230 V 3 6 A to 9 A 380 480 V 1 19 0 5 29 Ato 14 A 500 600 V 16 A to 28 A 220 230 V 2 32 15 0 9 13 A to 24 A 380 480 V 45 A 220 230 V 30 A 380 480 V 54 A 220 230 V 38 A and 45 A 380 480 V 4 42 2 5 22 A to 32 A 500 600 V 70 A and 86 A 220 230 V 3 3 60 A and 70 A 380 480 V 105 A and 130 A 220 230 V ES 86 A and 105 A 380 480 V 138 65 3 9 44 A to 79 A 500 600 V EX 142 A 380 480 V i 8 1 180 A to 240 A 380 480 V 8 107 A to 211 A 500 690 V 265 125 7 5 100 A to 179 A 660 690 V 312 361 A 380 480V 9 852 402 24 1 450 to 600 380 480 10 247 A to 472 500 690 10E 375 22 5 225 Ato 428 660 690 10E Table 3 3 Cooling air flow requirements 3 1 3 2 Mounting on Surface Figure 3 3 shows the installation of the CFW 09 on a mounting plate a Sizes 1 and 2 b Sizes 3 to 8 Figure 3 3 a and b Mounting procedure for the CFW 09 on a surface 45 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c Sizes 9 and 10 d Positioning for all Sizes Figure 3 3 c and d Mounting procedure for the CFW 09 on a surface 3 1 53 Mounting with the The CFW 09 can also be installed with the heatsink through the mounting Surface In this case refer to installation drawings shown in figure 3 4 c and maintain the distances indicated in table 3 4 When installing the heatsink through the mounting surface according to figure 3 4 the degree of protection behind thi
133. of the torque limitation at maximum speed This function is disabled while the value of P171 P172 is equal to or greater than the value of P169 1 70 P171 and P172 operate also during the optimal braking by limiting the maximum output current Oor 1 It defines the operation curve of the torque limitation at the field weakening 0 region Refer to figure 6 22 P173 Curve Type 0 Ramp 1 Step Table 6 11 Curve type of the maximum torque 145 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P175 Proportional Gain of the Flux Regulator P176 9 Integral Gain of the Flux Regulator P177 Minimum Flux P178 Rated Flux P179 Maximum Flux P177 and P179 are active only when P202 z 3 Sensorless Vector P180 Starting Point of the Field Weakening Region These para meters P175 P176 P178 and P180 are shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control P181 Magnetization Mode JUI This parameter is shown on the display only when P202 4 Vector Control with Encoder 146 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 0 to 31 9 2 0 0 1 0 000 to 9 999 0 020 0 001 010120 0 1 010120 100 1 010120 120 1 Oto 120 95 1 0 or 1 0 Description Notes P175 and P176 are automatically set as a function of parameter P412 In general the automatic setting is adequate and there is no need for a reconfiguration These gains s
134. oo acm AD Status CD 2 1888 rem Peay 460 PRES run AGS 2888 if P203 1 Press Current 24 35 4 Potor 68 8 Hz 1506 rpm The read only variable to be shown after power is applied to the inverter is defined in Parameter P205 P205 Initial Monitoring Parameter 0 005 Motor Frequency P003 P002 P007 006 009 P070 motor speed and motor current 7 040 PID process variable Table 4 1 Choosing the initial monitoring parameter Motor Current Motor Speed Output Voltage Inverter Status Motor Torque hm 89 CHAPTER 4 KEYPAD HMI OPERATION 4 2 3 Parameter Viewing and 90 Programming b Inverter Status Inverter is READY to be started No Fault condition Inverter has been started Run condition Line voltage in too low for inverter operation Undervoltage condition c LED display flashing The display flashes in the following conditions During the DC Injection braking Trying to change a parameter value when it is not allowed Inverter in a current overload condition Refer to chapter 7 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Inverter in Fault condition Refer to chapter 7 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting All CFW 09 settings are made through the parameters The parameters are shown on the display with the letter P followed by a number Example P101
135. remain inactive even when P224 0 or P227 0 The direction of rotation is defined automatically by the FWD Run REV Run commands Clockwise rotation for Forward and Counter Clockwise rotation for Reverse The speed reference can be from any source as in Connection 3 Connector XC1 D FWD Run 51 REV Run 52 Figure 3 17 XC1 wiring for connection 4 3 3 European Directive Requirements for Conforming Installations 3 3 1 Installation CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION CFW 09 inverter series was designed taking in consideration safety and EMC aspects The CFW 09 units do not have an intrinsic function until connected with other components e g a motor Therefore the basic product is not CE marked for compliance with the EMC Directive The end user takes personal responsibility for the EMC compliance of the whole installation However when installed according to the recommendations described in the product manual and including the recommended filters EMC measures the CFW 09 fulfill all requirements of the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC as defined by the Product Standard EN61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drives systems specific for variable speed drives systems Compliance of the whole series of the CFW 09 is based on testing some representative models A Technical Construction File was checked and approved by a Competent Body The CFW 09 inverter series are intended for pr
136. set P204 5 since P309 Inactive in the factory setting The desired content must be maintained by the master during 15 0 ms Only after this time you can send a new value or write another parameter w 6 Content of the Parameter to be changed selected at Position 5 Number of the Parameter to be changed The format of the values set atthis position must be as described in the Manual but the value must be written without the decimal point when the case When Parameters P409 to P413 are changed small content differences can occur when the value sent via Fieldbus is compared with the value read at Position 4 Parameter Content or with the value read via HMI This is due the truncation rounding off during the reading process During the read write process via Fieldbus the following variable indications in the Logical Status can occur Indications in the Logical Status variable E24 Parameter changing only permitted with disabled inverter Parameter setting fault refer to item 4 2 3 E25 Caused by Read Parameter inexistent or Write Parameter inexistent or Write in P408 and P204 8 12 7 4 Addressing of the CFW 09 Variables in the Fieldbus Devices CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES E26 The desired content value is out of permitted range E27 Caused by a The function selected in the Logical Control is not enabled for the Fieldbus or b The control of the Digital Outpu
137. set the DIP switches to zero 00000000 7 Click on the button STORE CONFIGURATION to save the new settings Restart the CFW 09 Access to the communication board The communication board supports FTP and Telnet services In such a way it is possible to upload download files to from the board and also access the file system in an interactive way In order to use these services follow the instructions below Open a MS DOS command window Type the desired service FTP or Telnet followed by the IP address or hostname of the CFW 09 on the network Enter with Login user Password user Examples Telnet session for the CFW 09 with IP address 192 168 0 4 x Telnet 192 168 0 4 BEE Login user Password Login OK gt A CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES FTP session for the CFW 09 whit IP address 192 168 0 4 C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe ftp 192 168 0 4 Bixl TN 192 168 0 4 Conectado 192 168 0 4 220 Service ready Usu rio 192 168 0 4 none user 331 User name ok need password Senha 230 User logged in Security and access passwords The file system of the communication board has two security levels for the user admin and normal It is only permitted to connect in the normal mode In this case the users are restricted to the directory user where it is possible to create or delete files and or folders The accounts for normal users
138. the key to go to the next parameter PROG Press the Key to enter the programming mode N Use ihe C2 an keys to select the motor rated power PROG Press the to save the selected option and exit the programming mode Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the to enter the programming mode LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION Programmed Motor Rated rpm 1730 rom Exit the programming mode Motor Rated hp Range 1 to 1600 0 hp 1 to 1190 0 kW Enter the programming mode Selected Motor Rated Power 5 0 hp 3 7 kW Exit the programming mode Motor Ventilation Type Selection 0 Self Ventilated 1 Separate Ventilation 3 Increased Protection Enter the programming mode 97 CHAPTER 5 START UP ACTION Use the 4 keys to select the motor ventilation type Press the PROG key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode Refer to item 5 3 5 3 START UP 98 A A LED DISPLAY DESCRIPTION LCD DISPLAY Selected Motor Ventilation Type 0 Self Ventilated Exit the programming mode 7 The first power up routine is finished Inverter is ready to operate NOTE 1 P401 maximum value is 1 8 x P295 for model 4 2 A 500 600 V and 1 6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A 220 230 V 2 9 A and 7 500 600 V 107 A 147A and 247 A 500 690 V 100
139. to functions compatible with the brake logic To obtain details on the Brake Logic function refer to the detailed description of parameter P275 to P280 and figure 6 39q Note Parameters that are automatically changed when 203 2 is programmed serve only to help with parametrization of the brake logic function 147 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P204 7 19 Load Save Parameters 148 Range Factory Setting Unit 01011 0 Description Notes The parameters P295 Inverter Rated Current P296 Inverter Rated Voltage P297 Switching Frequency P308 Serial Address and P201 Language are not changed when the factory default parameters are loaded through P204 5 and 6 In order to load the User Parameters 1 P204 7 and or the User Parameters 2 P204 8 into the operation area of the CFW 08 it is necessary that the User Memory 1 and or the User Memory 2 have been previously saved P204 10 and or P204 11 Once entered the user parameters are automatically saved to the VSD EEPROM In addition it is possible to save two further sets of parameters or to use these as a backup The operation of Load User 1 and or 2 can also be done by DIx refer to parameters P265 to P269 The options P204 5 6 7 8 10 and 11 are disables when P309 0 Active Fieldbus User Default 1 Current Factory Inverter Parameter Default User Default 2
140. to items 8 1 1 and 8 1 2 GROUNDING OF THE CABLE SHIELD connect the shielding to the equipment frame Suitable grounding RECOMMENDED CABLE for balanced shielding Ex AFS series from KMP The RS 485 wiring must be laid separately from the power and control cables in 110 220 V The reference signal for the RS 485 interface SREF shall be used when the network master is not connected to the system installation ground For instance if the master is powered from an isolated power supply it is necessary to ground the power supply reference or carry this reference signal to the whole system In general it is possible to connect only signals A and B without connecting the signal SREF RS 232 Serial Interface Module The RS 232 interface is available for the CFW 09 through the module presented in item 8 6 Figure 8 50 Description of the XC7 RJ12 connector 313 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Note The RS 232 wiring must be laid separately from the power and control cables in 110 220 V JU NOTE You cannot use simultaneously RS 232 and the RS 485 interface 8 14 MODBUS RTU 8 14 1 Introduction in the The Modbus protocol has been already developed 1979 firstly Currently it is a Modbus RTU Protocol wide diffused open protocol used by several manufacturers in different equipment The Modbus RTU communication of the do CFW 09 has been developed by considering two documents 1 MODBUS Proto
141. use of shielded cables Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS 485 You must use the EBA or EBB expansion board that has interface for the RS 485 communication Note for connection refer to item 8 13 7 404 To ensure a correct communication in the network you must configure the inverter address in the network as well as the transfer rate and the existing parity type besides the correct physical connection Inverter Address in the Network The inverter address is defined through the parameter P308 If the serial communication type P312 has been configured to Modbus RTU you may select the addresses from 1 to 247 Each slave shall have a different address The master does not have address The slave address must be known even when connection is made point to point HAN AA Transmission Rate and Parity Both configurations are defined by parameter P312 Baud rates 9600 19200 or 38400 kbits sec Parity None odd or even All slaves and even the network master must use the same baud rate and parity All parameters and available basic variables for the CFW 09 can be accessed through the network Parameters are those set in the inverter and that can be displayed and changed through the HMI Human Machine Interface refer to item Parameters Basic Variables are the internal inverter variables that be accessed only through serial interface For instance through these basic
142. with all needed components already installed in the product For later installation you must order and install the desired Fieldbus kit KFB 8 12 1 Installation of the The communication board that forms the Fieldbus Kit is installed directly onto Fieldbus kit the CC control board connected to the XC140 connector and fixed by spacers JE NOTE Follow the Safety Notices in chapter 1 If a Function Expansion Board EBA EBB is already installed it must be removed provisionally For the frame size 1 you must remove the lateral plastic cover of the product 1 Remove the bolt from the metallic spacer near to the XC140 CC9 connector 2 Connect carefully the pin connector of the Fieldbus board to the female connector XC140 of the CC9 control board Check the exact coincidence of all pins of the XC140 connector refer to figure 8 35 m Board Devicenet Board Profibus DP DX dJOJOOOODODOOUUOCOOOCOO UU A ur tu CCP RP ee Board CC9 M3x8 Bolt Torque 1Nm Figure 8 35 Installation of the electronic board of the 2 8 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 3 Press the board near to XC140 and on the lower right edge until the connector and the plastic spacer is inserted completely 4 Fix the board to the metallic spacer through the bolt except ModBus 5 Fieldbus Connector Sizes 1 and 2 Models up to 28 A F
143. zz gt 7 Ca 42424246 01512224774 Geese M Ran Figure 8 32 Example of thermal protection Connect the UD grounding of the braking module to the UD terminal of the inverter Connect the UD grounding of the braking module to the UD terminal of the inverter The control connection between the CFW 09 and the braking module is made through a cable 0307 7560 One end of this cable is connected to the XC3 connector that can be found at the CRGA board refer to figure 8 33 in the braking module The other end of this cable is connected to a DB9 connector that is fastened to a metallic support at the side of the control board in the k m CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Figure 8 34 shows the connection of the braking module to the inverter as well as the connections of the resistor to the braking module It shows also the inclusion of a thermal relay and a thermostat in contact with the resistor body thus ensuring its thermal protection The connection cables between the inverter and the module and between the module and the braking resistor must be dimensioned according to the thermal braking cycle CFW 09 DBW 01 02 Thermal Protection XC1 9 3 P265 4 Contactor R Supply L rs Network ha
144. 0 22 900 0 670 0 23 125 0 90 0 1100 0 820 0 24 150 0 110 0 1600 0 1190 0 25 175 0 130 0 Table 6 59 Motor rated power selection 214 Parameter 405 Encoder PPR This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 4 Vector Control with Encoder Range Factory Setting Unit 100 to 9999 1024 1 ppr CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Sets the number of pulses per revolution PPR of the incremental encoder when P202 4 Vector with Encoder P406 Motor Ventilation Type 0 to 3 0 P406 Function 0 Self ventilated 1 Forced Ventilation 2 Optimal Flux 3 Increased Protection Table 6 60 Type of motor ventilation At the first inverter power up refer to items 5 2 5 3 and 5 3 1 or when P202 is modified from 0 1 or 2 V Hz to 5 VVW 3 or 4 Vector refer to item 5 3 2 from 5 to 3 or 4 and vice versa the value set at P406 automatically changes the overload protection as follows P406 P156 P157 P158 0 1 1 x P401 0 9 x P401 0 55 x P401 1 1 1 x P401 1 0 x P401 1 0 x P401 2 1 1 x P401 1 0 x P401 1 0 x P401 3 0 98 x P401 0 9 x P401 0 55 x P401 Table 6 61 Motor overload protection action option P406 2 be used refer to Use Conditions below when motor should be operated at low frequencies with rated torque without requiring forced ventilation for the operation range 12
145. 0 86 380 480 21600 100 660 690 320000 105 220 230 130 220 230 120 250 2 70 1 0 25 4 35 2 250 250 21600 107 500 690 320000 127 660 690 250 320000 130 220 230 150 220 230 147 500 690 196 500 690 70 2 0 95 3 0 250 320000 180 380 480 S95 3 0 500 50 150 300 250 320000 211 380 480 ____ _150 300 150 300 320000 211 500 690 ___ 150 300 185 300 70 1 70 1 0 _ 150 300 250 320000 225 660 690 320000 240 380 480 ____ _____ 150 300 ___ roto 150 300 315 320000 247 500 690 320000 259 660 690 2x70 2 2 0 414000 305 660 690 2x70 2 2 0 2 120 2 4 0 414000 312 380 8 1 2x70 270 __ 70 20 240 50 500 414000 315 500 690 414000 340 660 690 1051000 343 500 690 414000 361 380 480 ___ 2x120 2x4 0 120 40 240 50 50 414000 418 500 690 1051000 428 660 690 1445000 472 500 690 555 500 690 2 150 2x250 3x120 3 4 0 1x150 1x250 2x95 2 3 0 2 240 2x500 900 1445000 450 380 480 2 150 2 250 150 250 2x240 2x500 700 1051000 515 380 480 ___ 3 20 4 0 2x70 2x2 0 2x240 2x500 5900 1445000 600 380 480 3 150 3 25 2x95 2 3 0 2x240 2x500 900 1445000 CT Constant Torque Variable Torque 1 Three phase connection 2 Single phase connection Table 3 5 Recommended wiring fuses Use 75 C copper wires only 55
146. 0 600 V power supply Maximum motor cable length according to conducted Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level Inside metallic Load Type 84143 150521 SEU 84143 250521 NN 84143 4005125 100m 25m N A YES Ter or Hs 88414386005 125 Epcos Input Filter emission class EN61800 3 anel Product Standard Class Class n P EN61800 3 1996 A11 A2 1 2000 First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution N A Not Applicable The inverters were not tested with these limits Note Minimum output frequency 2 4 Hz Table 3 10 Epcos filters list for CFW 09 inverter series with 500 600 V power supply 660 690 V power supply Inverter Model 100 A 660 690 V and 107 A 500 690 V 127 A 660 690 V and 147 A 500 690 V 179 A 660 690 V and 211 A 500 690 V 225 A 660 690 V and 247 A 500 690 V 259 A 660 690 V and 315 A 500 690 V 305 A 660 690 V and 343 A 500 690 V 340 A 660 690 V and 418 A 500 690 V 428 A 660 690 V and 472 A 500 690 V Maximum motor cable length according to Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level Product Standard EN618
147. 0 V models Human Machine Interface HMI CFWO09 LCD with LED and LCD displays Braking DB Transistor for DB Resistor braking incorporated in the following models 6 Ato 45 A 220 230 V 3 6 A to 30 A 380 480 V 2 9 A to 14 A 500 600 V DCLink The DC Link choke is included in the standard product for 44 A 53A 63A and 79 A 500 600 V all models 500 690 V and 660 690 V models DB Transistor can be incorporated as an option in the following models 54 A to 130 A 220 230 V 38 A to 142 A 380 480 V 22 A to 79 A 500 600 V Models 180 A to 600 A 380 480 V 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 Ato 428 A 660 690 V do not have the capability to use an internal DB Transistor In this case use the external DB Transistor option refer to item 8 10 3 Dynamic Braking Module DBW 01 and DBW 02 NOTE It is necessary to connect an external braking resistor regardless if the DB Transistor is built in optional built in or an external module DBW The CFW 09 is supplied in cardboard boxes up to size 3 refer to item 9 and for models above the packing will be with wood pallet and wood box The outside of the packing container has a nameplate that is identical to that on the CFW 09 Please check if the nameplate data matches the ordered ones The boxes up to size 7 must be placed and opened on a table sizes above 3 with the help of two persons Open the box remove the cardboard or expanded polystyrene protection The boxes of sizes above 7 mu
148. 0 mA Isolated digital input Not Used Min high level 18 Vdc Max low level 3 Vdc Max Voltage 30 Vdc Input Current 11 mA 24 SREF Reference for RS 485 Isolated RS 485 serial port A LINE RS 485 A LINE B LINE RS 485 Analog Input 3 Frequency Reference Program P221 3 or P222 3 DI7 of O Isolated analog input programmable P243 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA lin 10 bits 0 1 of full scale range Impedance 400 kQ 0 to 10 V 500 Q 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 13 Al3 14 GND 0 V Reference for Analog Speed Isolated analog Outputs signals 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA AO1 Analog Output 1 Speed Scales refer to P251 and P253 AGND 0 V Reference for analog Output lin 11 bits 0 5 96 of full scale range Allowed load RL gt 600 Q Analog Output 2 Motor Current 18 2 Avaliable to be connected to an external power supply to energise the encoder External power supply 5 V to 15 V consumption 100 mA 2 5 Outputs not included co repeater output XC8 OM 1 0 V reference of the external power supply Figure 8 4 XC5 terminal block description complete EBB board 20 o c gt lt ATTENTION The isolation of the analog input AI3 and the analog outputs 1 and 2 is designed only to interrupt the ground loops Do not connect these inputs to high
149. 0 to 16 00 Adjusts the time constant of the active current filter It is used in the Automatic Torque Boost and Slip Compensation D functions Refer to figures 6 7 and 6 8 Adjusts the response time of the slip compensation and automatic torque boost Refer to figures 6 6 and 6 8 0 0 to 10 0 Assist during high torque starts by allowing the motor to establish the 0 0 flux before starting to accelerate the load 0 15 to 300 90 1 131 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P142 Maximum Output Voltage P143 Intermediate Output Voltage P144 Output Voltage at 3 Hz P145 Field Weakening opeed P146 Intermediate Speed M These para meters are shown on the display s only when P202 z 2 Adjustable V F Control 132 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 0 to 100 0 100 0 0 1 96 0 0 to 100 0 50 0 0 1 96 0 0 to 100 0 8 0 0 1 P133 90 to P134 1800 1 rpm 90 to P145 900 1 rpm Description Notes Speed Time P140 Figure 6 10 Curve for high torque starts These parameters allow changing the standard V F curves defined at P202 Special V F profiles may be necessary when motors with non standard voltages frequencies are used This function allows changing the predefined standard curves which represents the relationship between the output voltage and the output frequency of the inverters and
150. 00 0 kW 41 600 0 hp 450 0 kW 42 620 0 hp 460 0 kW 43 670 0 hp 500 0 kW 44 700 0 hp 525 0 kW 45 760 0 hp 570 0 kW 46 800 0 hp 600 0 kW 47 850 0 hp 630 0 kW 48 900 0 hp 670 0 kW 49 1100 0 hp 820 0 kW 50 1600 0 hp 1190 0 kW P405 Encoder PPR 100 to 9999 1024 pp 215 406 Motor Ventilation 0 Self Ventilated 0 Self Ventilated 215 1 Separate Ventilation 2 Optimal Flux 3 Increased Protection P407 0 2 Motor Rated Power Factor 0 50 to 0 99 According to the 216 motor rated power Measured Parameters 408 Self Tuning 0 216 1 No Rotation 2 Runforl 3 Run for Tm 4 Estimate Tm P409 1 Motor Stator Resistance Rs 0 000 to 77 95 0 000 217 Pao Moio Magnetno Curent __ __ a 98 P411 0 00 to 99 99 000 mH 218 P412 LR RR Constant Rotor Time 0 000 to 9 999 0 000 S 218 Constant Tr P413 Tm Constant Mechanical Time 0 00 to 99 99 S 219 SPECIAL FUNCTION PARAMETERS P520 to P538 PID Regulator P520 000010 7999 po T T23 P523 0 0 10 999 Booo o Fe Ta P524 0 Selection of PID Feedback 0 2 P237 to P240 223 1 P241 to P244 P525 PID Setpoint 00101000 224 P526 Process Variable Filter 0 1 5 224 31 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE i Factory Parameters Function Adjustable Range Setting P527 PID Acti
151. 00 3 1996 A1 1 2000 conducted emission class Inside metallic EN61800 3 Load Type A2 1 84143 150521 CT VT 841438180521 m m B84143B4008125 CT VT B84143B6008125 Epcos Input Filter panel First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution N A Not Applicable The inverters were not tested with these limits Note Minimum output frequency 2 4 Hz Table 3 11 Epcos filters list for CFW 09 inverter series with 660 690 V power supply 70 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 3 3 3 Schaffner Filters The following tables 3 12 and 3 13 show the Schaffner filters list for CF W 09 inverter series with 380 480 V and 220 230 V power supply respectively Controling and Signal Wiring Input CM Choke Choke Transformer Ground Rod Grid Building Steel Structure Figure 3 19 Schaffner EMC filters connection in CFW 09 frequency inverters 380 480 V power supply moa AT Electromagnetic radiation Inout ple Inside disturbance level nq Model Optional Device fae CM Metallic Product Standard ae Choke P
152. 1 616 to 800 P296 2 678 to 800 P296 3 739 to 800 P296 4 809 to 1000 P296 5 885 to 1000 P296 6 924 to 1000 P296 7 1063 to 1200 P296 8 P154 Dynamic Braking Resistor 0 0 to 500 ooo ___ 138 P155 DB Resistor Power Rating 0 00 to 650 260 138 Overload Currents P156 2002 Overload Current 100 Speed P157 to 1 3x P295 1 1 x P401 pc 139 P157 20 Overload Current 50 96 Speed P156 to P158 0 9 x P401 139 P158 20 Overload Current 5 Speed 0 2 x P295 to P157 0 55 x P401 139 Speed Regulator P160 Optimization of the 0 Normal 0 Normal 140 P161 PropotionalGain 0 0010639 _______ 63 9 a i o 142 P1629 7 0000099 10003 7142 P163 Local Speed Reference Offset 999 to 999 O 1143 P164 Remote Speed Reference Offset 999 to 99 O l 143 P151 has different function for V F or Vector Control P151 90 DC Link Voltage Regulation Level V F Control Vector Control with optimal braking 11 Function Adjustable Range Parameters P165 P166 Speed Filter Speed Regulator Differential Gain 0 012 to 1 000 0 00 to 7 99 Current Regulator P167 Proportional Gain 0 00 to 1 99 P168 Integral Gain 0 000 to 1 999 P169 07 Maximum Output Current V F Control 0 2 x P295 to 1 8 x P295 P169 00 Maximum Forward Torque Current 010 180 Vector Control P170 Maximum R
153. 1 i e 5 at 60 Hz 4 2 at 50 Hz according the rated motor frequency CONDITIONS FOR USING OPTION P406 2 l Sensorless Vector Mode P202 3 WEG motors series Nema Premium Efficiency High Efficiency IEC Premium Efficiency IEC TOP Premium Efficiency and Alto Rendimento Plus When P406 the switching frequency is limited to 5 KHz 215 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P407 2 Rated Motor Power Factor JU This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 5 VVW P408 Run Self Tuning JR This parame ter is shown on the display s only when 202 4 Vector Control LA The Self tuning Routine can be cancelled by pressing the key only when P409 to P413 are different from zero Self tuning can be realized only with P309 Inactive 0 216 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 50 to 0 99 According to the motor rated power P404 0 to 2 P202 3 0 010 4 P202 4 0 Oor 1 P202 5 0 Description Notes This parameter sets the motor power factor This parameter is important to the correct operation of the VVW Control The incorrect setting of this parameter results in the incorrect calculation of the slip compensation The default value of this parameter is automatically set when parameter P404 is modified The suggested value is valid only for IV pole standard three phase WEG motors
154. 101 z Parameter Number Each parameter is associated to a numerical value parameter content that corresponds to an option selected among those options that are available for this parameters The values of the parameters define the inverter programming or the value of a variable e g current frequency voltage For inverter programming you should change the parameter content s To allow the reprogramming of any parameter value it is required to change parameter to the password value The factory default password value is 5 Otherwise you can only read the parameter values and not reprogram them For more detail refer to POOO description in chapter 6 Press the Gros key Use the and keys to reach P100 Press the PROG key Use the keys to set the new value Press the PROG key CHAPTER 4 KEYPAD HMI OPERATION LED DISPLAY Comments LCD DISPLAY Ln Select the desired parameter Numeric value associated to the parameter Sets the new desired value 1 4 1 2 3 NOTES 1 For parameters that can be changed with the motor running the inverter will use the new value immediately after it has been set For the parameters that can be changed only with motor stopped the inverter will use this new set value only after the key is pressed 2 By pressing the key after the reprogramming the new programmed value will be stored automatically and wil
155. 19 1920 V 216 2120 V Ove OvcO V 0 V 081 0810 V ev E eviO V 301 SOLO V 98 9800 V 04 0400 V 09 0900 V 9700 V 8 8200 V 0 0500 V vc00 V 9I 9100 Vel 2100 V 6 6000 V 9000 V Y 7000 V 9 000 A 087 086 V 641 6410 V 42 1210 V 001 0010 069 099 V 20 V 27 2710 V 201 2010 A 069 009 a10U g Jojonpul OG AH OH 101 8 00 20 ld ed V 64 6200 021 0210 V 59 2900 9301 SOLO 8 oi 19191 Ajddns yu Od 10901044 ZN S Se N 4S PU A 069 006 LA dd SNQUYOd LA A 069 099 Nd uois4eA 10 hayaang 2094 US 0 1 NOU AA prepueis 1 pepuejs xuelg LOL Old Id e1jo duioo pog 983 19 peog 993 19 pog 883 pJeog IV 8 191deuo 0 19J9H 1u044 9419Y au 15 yue q INOUUM S A uo Aejdsip
156. 2 Valid for and Al2 No Function 16 12 Impedance 400 0 to 10 Vdc ta AO1 Analog Output 1 Speed 0 to 10 Vdc Ry gt 10 load nimi resolution 11 bits 500 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 18 GND AO0 AO1 GND O 0 V 0 V Reference for Analog Outputs for Analog 0 V Reference for Analog Outputs Grounded Groundedbya 5 1 resistor a 5 1 O resistor n AO 0 to 10 10 Max Load te Analog Output Motor Current 20 GND A02 2 0 V Reference for Analog 0 V Reference for Analog Outputs Grounded Groundedbya 5 1 resist a 5 1 resistor a Terminal XC1A Factory Default Function Specification Relay Output No Fault RL2 CT eA Output Speed P288 N Nx Cone capacity RL1 Relay Relay Output No Fault No Fault 1A RL2 Relay Output Speed gt P288 gt Nx 240 Vac RL2 NC RL3NO Relay Output Speed Reference gt P288 RL3 C N gt Nx Note normally closed contact normally open contact common Figure 3 12 b control terminals description 9 board active low digital inputs Mm For using the digital inputs as active low it is necessary to remove the jumper between XC1 8 and XC1 10 and place it between XC1 7 and 1 9 62 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Can be used for grounding _ CC9 Board of the signal and control c
157. 2 for AI3 The Process Variable can also be displayed at the outputs AO1 to AO4 provided they were programmed at P251 P253 P255 or P257 The same is valid for the PID setpoint The outputs 001 DO2 and RL1 to RL3 can be programmed P275 to P277 P279 or P280 to the functions of the Process Variable VPx P533 and Process Variable VPy P534 When the setpoint is defined by P525 P221 or P222 0 and if itis changed from manual to automatic following setting P525 P040 is performed automatically provided the parameter P536 is active In this case the commutation from manual to automatic is smooth there is no abrupt speed oscillation In case of function Stop Logic is active P211 1 and P224 0 P224 is automatically changed to the option Digital Input DIx P224 1 In case of function Stop Logic is active P211 1 and P227 0 P227 is automatically changed to the option Digital Input DIx P227 1 221 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION GL 92d eia peso o aid 02 9 pue 6279 i i gt oeqpee4 92 9 0 52 4 REL Z2Sd 0
158. 220 mA for encoder Referenced to ground 1 uF in parallel with 1 Valid pin position with encoder HS35B models from Dynapar For other encoder modules check the correct connection to meet the required sequence Figure 8 7 Encoder cable max permitted encoder frequency is 100 kHz Sequence of the encoder signals A o 8 Descrition Motor running clockwise 3 Encoder Signals 90000 Connector XC8 089 Female E S ifferentia BLU go For on external power supply 5 V to 15 V Average high level Consumption 100 mA 9 5 V outputs not included 8 current 50 mA 7 7 Note Optionally the external power supply can also be connected XC4 19 and XC4 20 EBA or 4 V Power Supply XC5 19 5 20 EBB 5 NOTE 6 1 0 V Refrence There is internal power 5 d Grund CFW 09 EBA or EBB Board supply for XC8 at EBA or EBB board Figure 8 8 Encoder signals repeater output 255 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 2 2 EBC1 Board 256 When the board EBC1 is used the selected encoder should have the following characteristics Power Supply Voltage 5 V to 15 V 2 quadrature channels 90 with complementary outputs differential Signals A A B and B Linedriver or Push Pull output circuit type with identical level as the power supply voltag
159. 24 V Reverse Run Dix Time m ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER E P Increase E P Q Speed Reference Decrease E P O Reset to Zero Start Stop Minimum Speed Motor Speed Time 013 DI5 Increase E P Reset lt 24 V 014 016 Decrease 24 V Ane Start Stop DIx Open Time Figure 6 37 cont k to m Details about the function of the digital inputs 179 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes 275 0 to 40 Check possible options on table 6 42 and details about each function s Digital Output DO1 0 Not Used operation on the charts in the figure 6 36 Function located on f The status of the Digital Outputs can be monitored at Parameter P013 the Optional Expansion Board The Digital Output will be activated when the condition stated by its EBA or EBB function becomes true In case of a Transistor Output 24 Vdc will be applied to the load connected to it For a Relay Output the relay will pick up when the output is activated P276 0 to 40 Parameter P275 P276 P277 P279 P280 Digital Output DO2 0 Not Used Function pow poe RL2 Function located on Not Used 0 27 and 28 0 27 28 0 28 0 0 the Optional N gt Nx 1 Expansion Board N gt Nx ere ee dm EBA or EBB 4 4 Zero Speed 5 P277 1
160. 3 A and equal or lower than 142 A 500 600 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 12 A and equal or smaller than 79 A E04 Fault can also be caused by internal airflow overtemperature In this case check the electronics blower 4 When E32 is displayed due to motor overtemperature please allow the motor to cool down before restarting the inverter 5 When an incompatible parameter is programmed Fault Message E24 will be displayed and the LCD display will show a Help Message by indicating the Cause and how to correct the fault status 6 Only for models 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 Ato 428 A 660 690 V 7 Long motor cables longer than 100 m 330 ft can cause excessive capacitance to ground This can cause nuisance E11 ground fault trips immediately after the inverter has been enabled 231 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 232 SOLUTION Reduce the switching frequency P297 Connect a load reactor in series with the motor supply line Refer to item 8 8 8 This error occurs when the comparison 5 is greater than the maximum admissible error set at P292 for a period longer than that set at P351 When P351 99 9 the detection logic for the error E33 is disabled This error is only active in Vector Modes P202 3 or 4 9 If the CFW 09 remains at torque limitation for a period longer than the value set at P352 the inverter will trip with an error code E34 When P352
161. 385 V 400 415 V power supply Ud 405 V 440 460 V power supply Ud 446 V 480 V power supply Ud 487 V 500 525 V power supply Ud 532 V 550 575 V power supply Ud 582 V 600 V power supply Ud 608 V 660 690 V power supply Ud 699 V Phase loss at the input Auxiliary circuit fuse blown only valid for 105 and 130 220 230 V 86 Ato 600 A 380 480 V and 44 A to 79 A 500 600 V refer to item 3 2 3 Pre charge contactor defective P296 set to a voltage higher than the power supply voltage Table 7 1 Faults and possible causes CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT RESET POSSIBLE CAUSES 2030 Power on Power Supply voltage is too low check Power Supply voltage Input Undervoltage Manual reset Key 0 220 230 V Models Power Supply 154 V Phase Loss V Auto reset 380 480 V Models Power Supply 266 V V Dix Digital Input 500 600 V and 500 690 V Models Power Supply 361 V v Serial 660 690 V Models Power Supply 462 V Fieldbus V Phase loss at the inverter input v Activation Time 2 0 s E0409 Power on Ambient temperature too high gt 40 C and or output current too high Inverter Manual reset Key 0 or ambient temperature lt 10 C Overtemperature Auto reset Blowers locked or defective or Pre charge Digital Input Auxiliary circuit fuse blown only valid for 105 and 130 A 220 230 V Circuit Serial 86 A 600 A 3
162. 4 0104 START STOP 0 224 LOCAL START STOP Selection Selection 0 0 of the Keypad 1 Digital Input DIx 2 Serial 3 Fieldbus 4 PLC Table 6 28 LOCAL START STOP selection Note If the Digital Inouts are programmed for Forward Run Reverse Run the 0 keys will remain disabled independently of the value programmed at P224 P225 0105 225 LOCAL JOG Selection LOCAL JOG 1 0 Disable Selection Key 0 of the Keypad Digital inputs DI3 to DI8 P265 to P270 Serial Fieldbus PLC Table 6 29 LOCAL JOG selection ory gt lt N The JOG speed reference is given by parameter P122 156 Parameter Range Factory Setting Unit CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes P226 9 REMOTE FWD REV Selection 227 REMOTE START STOP Selection P228 9 REMOTE JOG Selection 010 11 4 0to4 1 0105 2 P226 0 COO IN O REMOTE FWD REV Selection Always Forward Always Reverse gt ofthe Keypad Default Forward gt of the Keypad Default Reverse Digital Inout 012 P264 0 Serial FWD Default Serial REV Default Fieldbus FWD Default Fieldbus REV Default Polarity Al4 PLC FWD PLC REV Ke Key Table 6 30 REMOTE FWD REV selection P227 REMOTE START STOP Selection 0 of the Keypad Digital Input DIx Serial Fieldbus PLC Table 6 31 REMOTE STAR
163. 6 380 480 V gt 44 A 500 600 V and 500 690 V models also adjust the voltage selection jumper Refer to item 3 2 3 P297 1 0 0103 297 Switching Frequency Switching Frequency 2 5 0 KHz 0 1 25 kHz 1 1 2 5 KHz 2 5 0 KHz 3 10 0 kHz Table 6 47 Switching frequency selection The rated switching frequency for each model is shown in item 9 1 When a higher switching frequency 15 used it is necessary to derate the output current as specified in item 9 1 note 3 Note that the switching frequency must be reduced from 5 kHz to 2 5 kHz when the VT rated current is used in the following models from 54 A to 130 A 220 230 V from 30 Ato 142 A 380 480 V and 63 A 500 600 V Note that the following models have a rated switching frequency of 2 5 kHz from 180 Ato 600 A 380 480 V 44 A and 79 A 500 600 V from 107 A to 472 A 500 690 V and all 660 690 V models The switching frequency is a compromise between the motor acoustic noise level and the inverter IGBTs losses Higher switching frequencies cause lower motor acoustic noise level but increase the IGBTs losses increasing inverter components temperature thus reducing their useful life The predominant frequency on the motor is twice the switching frequency programmed at P297 P297 5 0 kHz results in an audible motor noise corresponding to 10 0 kHz This is due to the PWM technique used A reduction of the switching frequency also Helps reducing instability
164. 600 V 45 A to 130 A 220 230 V 30 A to 142 A 380 480 V 5 X Inverter Rated Power 22 to 32 A 500 600 V 180 A to 600 A 380 480 V 2 X Inverter Rated Power Table 8 10 Line reactor usage criteria To determine the line reactor needed to obtain the desired voltage drop use equation below _ Voltage Drop x Line Voltage V x Line Freq Hz x Rated Cur A CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES The electrical installation of an input line reactor is shown on figure 8 19 a For CFW 09 sizes above 16 A 220 230 V 13 A 380 480 V the connection of a DC Bus Choke is possible The DC bus choke connection is also possible in all 2 9 Ato 32 A 500 600 V models Figure 8 19 b shows this connection RO 7 m FH AC Input pisconnect Fuses Reactor Switch Figure 8 19 a Line reactor connection mee AC Input E Figure 8 19 b DC bus choke connection 265 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 7 2 DC Link Inductor Built in 266 The following CFW 09 inverter models can be fitted with an inductor at the DC Link already incorporated into the product Models gt 16 A 220 230 V Models gt 13 A 380 480 V and Models lt 240 A 380 480 V To request the inverter with an inductor already assembled please add the code HC for inverter operating at constant torque or HV for inverter operating with variable torque i
165. 682 Length 200 80x80 le 5000 5364 0400 3679 Length 230 40x40 50005305 Fan 2x04003680 60 x60 hihihi Fuse 53 CC 00 cH 075100 541512481 Driver and Power Supply Bond _____ _ CRP1 00 2 08 200 541512296 Board 0620 1 _ por 200 841612800 Power Board porzo _ 510 200 941812318 Power Boara 21020 mo 20 sas12326 16 2 00 341512334 Power Board 16200 h P24 2 00 341512342 Power 20 P28 2 00 541512360 Power Board P28 2 00 P45 2 00 841510987 Power Board 45200 HMI CFWO9 LED KMRCFWO 5417102086 01 0 EBA1 02 841511761 Function Expansion Board Optional 4 1 1 fa 1 1 EBA1 03 541511770 Function Expansion Board Optional EBB 01 541510200 Function Expansion Board Optiona ESES EBB 02 941511788 Function Expansion Board EBB 03 541511796 Function Expansion Board EBB 04 S41512671 EBB 05 S41512741 EBC1 01 S41513174 02 641513175 gt Optional Optional Function Expansion Board Optiona Function Expansion Board Optiona Optiona Function Expansion Board Optiona Function Expansion Board V EBC1 03 541513176 Function Expansion Board Optional
166. 69 Digital Input DI7 Function 0 Not Used 0 Not used 173 Requires optional I O 1 Local Remote expansion board EBA or EBB 2 General Enable 3 JOG 4 No External Fault 5 Not Used 6 Ramp 2 7 Not Used 8 Fast Stop 9 Speed Torque 10 JOG 11 JOG 12 Reset 13 Fieldbus 14 Start 3 wire 15 Man Auto 16 Not Used 17 Disables Flying Start 18 DC Voltage Regulator 19 Parameter Setting Disable 20 Load User 21 Timer RL2 22 Timer RL3 P270 Digital Input 018 Function 0 Not used 0 Not used 173 Requires optional I O 1 Local Remote expansion board EBA or EBB 2 General Enable 3 JOG 4 No External Fault 5 Not Used 6 Ramp 2 7 Not Used 8 Fast Stop 9 Speed Torque 10 JOG 11 JOG 12 Reset 20 Parameters P275 Function Digital Outputs Digital Ouput DO1 Function requires optional expansion board EBA or EBB Adjustable Range 13 Fieldbus 14 Stop 3 wire 15 Man Auto 16 Motor Thermistor 17 Disables Flying Start 18 DC Voltage Regulator 19 Parameter Setting Disable 20 Not Used 21 Timer RL2 22 Timer RL3 0 Not used 1 N gt Nx 2 gt 3 N lt Ny 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 6 15 gt Ix 7 15 lx 8 gt 9 lt 10 Remote 11 Run 12 Ready 13 No Fault 14 00 15 E01 E02 E03 16 204
167. 70 aaa 540 2 9 19J9H 0 9 dS 1 0 590 5 4 Jenas peedsijnyy sindu 01 590 e qeueA sseooJd aui JO 1urodies Quiodies 0 2224 1824 71540 Figure 6 47 Block diagram of PID regulator function 222 Parameter P520 PID Proportional Gain P521 PID Integral Gain P522 PID Differential Gain P523 PID Ramp Time P5240 Selection of the PID Feedback CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 0 000 to 7 999 Some examples of initial settings of the PID Regulator Gains and PID 1 000 Ramp Times for some applications mentioned in item 6 5 1 are shown 0 001 in table 6 65 Gains PID Ramp 0 000 to 7 999 Magnitude Time Action Type 0 043 P521 P522 523 0 001 Pressure pneumatic 0 043 0 000 0 0 Direct Flow pneumatic 0 037 0 000 0 Direct 0 000 to 3 499 ee Pressure hydraulic 0 043 0 000 0 Direct system Flow hydraulic 0 037 0 000 0 Direct 0 0 to 999 system 3 0 Temperature 0 004 0 000 3 0 Refer to note 0 1 5 lt 99 9 5 Level 1 Referto 9 0 000 3 0 Refer t
168. 750 mm 19 Serial Communication P308 Inverter Address P309 Fieldbus P310 STOP Detection in a Profibus Network P312 Type of Serial Protocol 1 to 30 1 198 0 Disable 1 Profibus DP DP V1 2 I O 2 Profibus DP DP V1 4 I O 3 Profibus DP DP V1 6 I O 4 DeviceNet 2 I O 5 DeviceNet 4 6 DeviceNet 6 I O 7 EtherNet IP 2 I O 8 EtherNet IP 4 I O 9 EtherNet IP 6 I O 10 DeviceNet Drive Profile 0 Off 1 0 WBUS Protocol 1 Modbus RTU 9600 bps 2 Modbus RTU 9600 bps odd parity 3 Modbus RTU 9600 bps even parity 4 Modbus RTU 19200 bps no parity 5 Modbus RTU 19200 bps odd parity 198 27 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Factory User s Unit Setting Setting 0 Disable via Start Stop 199 200 14 0 Time for Serial Watchdog 0 0 Disable 0 0 Disabled 5 18 Watchdog detection for the 0 Off 0 Off Flying Start Ride Through P320 Flying Start Ride Through 0 Inactive Inactive 1 Flying Start 2 Flying Start Ride Through 3 Ride Through P321 Ud Line Loss Level 178 to 282 P296 0 Fiii 307 to 487 P296 1 324 to 513 P296 2 Function Adjustable Range Parameters 6 Modbus RTU 19200 bps even parity 7 Modbus RTU 38400 bps no parity 8 Modbus RTU 38400 bps odd parity 9 Modbus RTU 38400 bps even parity P3130
169. 8 N gt Nx Contact capacity RL1C Relay Output No Fault 1A RL2C Relay Output Speed gt P288 N gt Nx 240 Vac RL2 NC RL3 NO Relay Output Speed Reference gt RL3C P288 N Nx 27 PM Note normally closed contact normally open contact common Factory default jumper Figure 3 12 a XC1 XC1A control terminals description CC9 board Active high digital inputs 61 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION The following diagram shows the control wiring with the digital inputs as active low without a jumper between XC1 8 and 1 10 6 Isolated Digital Inputs Minimum High Level 18 Vdc a ome Maximum Low Level 3 Vdc Remote Mode Input Current Ramp 2 Selection 11 mA 24 Vdc 1 CE Digital Inputs Common psss 18 Digital Inputs Common 24 Digital inputs 24 source Isolated 24 8 90 mA e 0 V Reference of 24 Source Grounded by 249 resistor _ Positive Reference for Potentiometer 5 4 5 Capacity 2 mA 12 AM Valid for Al1 and Al2 zone Analog Input 1 differential resolution 0 to 10 HH Alt Speed Reference Remote Mode 0 to 20 4 to 20 mA Negative Reference for Potentiometer 4 7 5 Capacity 2 mA xi 15 12 Analog Input
170. 8 x P295 for model 4 2 A 500 600 V and 1 6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A 220 230 V 2 9 A and 7 A 500 600 V 107A 147 A and 247 500 690 V 100A 127 and 340 A 660 690 V 2 The last speed reference value set via the 15 If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter change parameter P121 Keypad Reference 3 If the direction of rotation of the motor is inverted power the inverter down waits 10 minutes for the complete discharge of capacitors and interchange any two motor output cables 4 In case of having E01 during deceleration increase the deceleration time through P101 P103 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION This chapter describes in detail all CFW 09 parameters In order to simplify the explanation the parameters have been grouped by characteristics and functions Read Only Parameters Variables that can only be viewed on the display but not changed Examples would be motor speed or motor current Regulation Parameters Programmable values used by the CFW 09 functions Examples would be Acceleration and Deceleration times Configuration Parameters Set up parameters that are programmed during inverter start up and define its basic operation Examples would be Control Type Scale Factors and the Input Output functions Motor Parameters Motor data that is indicated on the motor nameplate Other motor parameters are automatically measured or c
171. 80 480 V and 44 A to 79 A 500 600 V refer to item 3 2 3 Defective Fieldbus v Problem with the supply voltage voltage sag or interruption phase loss last for more than 2 seconds and with the phase loss detection disabled P214 0 v Signal with inverted Polarity at Analog inputs Al1 Al2 E05 V P156 P157 and P158 set too low for the motor being used Inverter Motor v Motor is under an actual overload condition Overload x t Function E06 Dix DI3 to 017 programmed for external fault detection P265 to External Fault P270 set to 4 No Ext Flt is open not connected to 24 V Terminal block XC12 on the control board CC9 is not properly connected E07 Miswiring between encoder and terminal block XC9 optional board Encoder Fault Refer to item 8 2 Valid only if v Encoder is defective P202 4 Vector with Encoder E08 Electrical noise CPU Error watchdog E09 Contact WEG v Memory with corrupted values Program Memory Error Checksum E10 v Power on V A bid to copy the HMI parameters to the inverter with different Software Error in the v Manual Reset Key 0 version Copy Function Auto reset Dix E11 Serial Short circuit between one or more output phases and ground Ground Fault Fieldbus Motor cable capacitance to ground is too high Table 7 1 cont Faults and possible causes 229 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBL
172. 96 525 15 to 15 550 V 15 to 20 575 15 to 15 600 15 to 10 500 690 V models 500 V 15 to 15 525 V 15 to 15 550 V 15 96 to 20 575 15 to 15 600 V 15 to 10 660 V 15 96 to 10 9 690 V 15 to 10 1 When line voltage higher than 600 V rated value supplies the 500 690 V models it is necessary to derate the output current as stated in item 9 1 5 NOTE For models that have rated voltage selection jumper as described in item 3 2 3 the rated input voltage is defined by its position In all models P296 parameter shall be set to the rated input voltage When input voltage is lower than motor rated voltage the motor power will be reduced Other AC input specifications Frequency 50 60 Hz 2 Hz Phase Unbalance x 3 96 of rated phase to phase input voltage Overvoltage Category EN 61010 UL 5080 Transient voltages according to Category Minimum line impedance 1 voltage drop for models with rated current up to 130 A 220 230 V up to 142 A 380 480 V and up to 32 A 500 600 V 2 voltage drop for 380 480 V models with rated current 180 A and above 500 600 V models with current higher or equal to 44 500 600 V all 500 690 V and 660 690 V models do not require minimum line impedance because they have an internal DC Link inductance Referto item 8 7 1 guidel
173. 99 9 1 s gt 99 9 P103 0 0 to 999 Deceleration Time 2 20 0 1 s 99 9 1 s 99 9 P104 0102 P104 S Ramp S Ramp 0 0 Inactive 1 50 2 100 Table 6 1 Choosing 5 or linear ramp Speed Linear 50 S ramp 100 S ramp 4 6 100 102 101 103 Figure 6 1 S or linear ramp The ramp S reduces the mechanical stress during the acceleration and deceleration of the load opeed Reference 1 enabled 1 Backup If P120 Off the inverter does not save the current reference value when the inverter is enabled again it will restart from the minimum frequency setting P133 This back up function is applicable to the keypad HMI Serial Fieldbus and PID Setpoint P525 references 124 Parameter P121 Keypad Speed Reference P122 01 JOG or JOG Speed Reference P123 910 JOG Speed Heference Range Factory Setting Unit P133 to P134 90 1 rpm 0 to P134 150 125 1 rpm 0 to P134 150 125 1 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes P120 Backup 0 Off 1 Table 6 2 Speed reference backup To activate the and active P221 0 or P222 0 With P120 1 On the content of P121 is maintained backup even when the inverter is disabled or turned off The JOG command source is defined at P225 Local Mode P228 Rem
174. 99 95 Check the Keypad connections to the inverter The power supply voltage must be within the following ranges 220 230 V power supply Min 187 V Max 258 V 380 480 V power supply Min 323 V Max 528 V 500 600 V power supply Min 425 V Max 660 V 660 690 V power supply Min 561 V Max 759 V Replace the fuse s Set P180 between 90 and 99 95 Check the signals A A B B according to figure 8 7 If this connections are correct invert two output phases for instance U and V Refer to figure 3 9 Table 7 2 cont Troubleshooting 7 3 CONTACTING WEG 7 4 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE COMPONENT Terminal Blocks Connectors Blowers Cooling System Printed Circuit Boards Power Module Power Connections DC Bus Capacitors Power Resistor MN CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING JE NOTE When contacting WEG for service or technical assistance please have the following data on hand M Inverter Model Serial number manufacturing date and hardware revision as indicated on the inverter nameplate Refer to item 2 4 Software Version Refer to item 2 2 Information about the application and inverter programming DANGER Always disconnect the power supply voltage before touching any component of the inverter Even after switching OFF the inverter high voltages may be present Wait 10 minutes to allow complete discharge of the power capacitors Always
175. A 127 and 340 A 660 690 V ATTENTION Open the input circuit breaker or disconnect switch to shut down the CFW 09 NOTES To repeat the initial power up procedure Set the parameter P204 5 or 6 this loads the factory default parameters and follow the initial power up sub routine again The initial power up sub routine described above automatically sets some parameters according to the entered data For more details refer to chapter 6 Modification of motor characteristics after the first power up a Insert the motor data at parameters P400 to P407 b For operation in the vector mode run the self tuning routine P408 gt 0 c Set P156 P157 P158 P169 P170 P171 and P172 d Power the inverter down and up for the new settings to take place and for the proper motor operation Modification of motor characteristics after the first power up for operation in VT mode Follow the previous procedures and also set parameter P297 to 2 5 kHz This item describes the start up procedure when operating via the Keypad HMI Four types of control will be considered V F 60 Hz Sensorless Vector Vector with Encoder Feedback and VVW Voltage Vector WEG DANGER Even after the AC input is disconnected high voltages may still be present Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down to allow a full discharge of the capacitors 5 3 1 Type of Control V F 60 Hz Operation Via Keypad HMI ACTION Power up the
176. A 48 263A 49 79 A 25 600 72 652 73 794 A 76 897 78 978 79 1191A 81 1345 500 690 V Models 51 107 53 147 55 211 57 247 60 315 62 343 63 418 65 472 660 690 V Models 50 107 52 127 54 179 56 225 58 259 59 305A 61 340 64 428 68 492 70 580 71 646 74 813A 75 869A 77 969 80 1220 Special Models 38 2 66 33 A 26 200 27 230 28 320 29 400 30 570 31 700 32 900 Factory Setting User s Setting Pag Function Parameters Adjustable Range CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Factory Setting User s wnt Setting P296 000 Inverter Rated Voltage 0 220 230 V 0 for models 195 Rated Input Voltage 1 380 V 220 230 V 2 400 415 V 3 for models 3 440 460 V 380 480 V em 4 480 V 6 for models seio 5 500 525 V 500 600 V and uode 6 550 575 V 500 690 V vonage 7 600 V 8 for models RSS 8 660 690 V 660 690 V P297 000 Switching Frequency 2 kHz 195 DC Braking P300 DCBrakingTime 00010 00 196 P301 DCBrakingStartSpeed 0040 mm w P302 DCBrakngVolage 0 0 100 20 w SI Speed P303 600 mm 197 P304 Skip Speed 2 P133 to P134 so mm w P305 Skip Speed 3 P133 to P134 1200 mm 197 P306 Skip Band 0 to
177. BUS DP slave node 1 PROFIBUS DP slave node 2 PROFIBUS DP slave node n Figure 8 39 Profibus DP network Fieldbus Type PROFIBUS DP EN 50170 DIN 19245 Physical Interface Transmission means Profibus bus bar line type A or B as specified in EN501 70 Topology Master Slave communication Insulation the bus is supplied by DC DC inverter and isolated galvanically from remaining electronics and the signals A and B are isolated by means of optocouplers It allows the connection disconnection of only one node without affecting the network Fieldbus connector of the inverter user Connector D sub 9 pins female Pins Pin uit 2 3 RxD TxD positive according to specification RS 485 4 5 0 V isolated against RS 485 circuit 6 5 isolated against RS 485 circuit 7 8 RxD TxD negative according to specification RS 485 9 Connected to the ground protection Table 8 15 Pin connection 089 to the Profibus DP 281 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 282 Line Termination The initial and the en points of the network must be terminated with the characteristic impedance in order to prevent reflections The DB 9 cable male connector has the suitable termination When the inverter is the first or the last of the network the termination switch must be set to Pos ON Otherwise set the switch to Pos OFF The terminating switch of the PROFIBUS DP board m
178. CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION AU NOTE The wire sizing indicated in table 3 5 are reference values only The exact wire sizing depends on the installation conditions and the maximum acceptable line voltage drop The tightening torque is as indicated in table 3 6 Use 75 C copper wire only Grounding CFW 09 Rating Wiring Power Cables A Volts Ibf in N m Ibf in 6Ato 13 A 220 230 V 3 6 Ato 13 A 380 480 V 16 28 220 230 16 A to 24 A 380 480 V 2 00 17 70 2 9 Ato 14 A 500 600 V 30 A 380 480 V 1 40 12 30 45 A 220 230 V 38 A to 45 A 380 480 V 1 40 12 30 22 A to 32 A 500 600 V 54 A to 86 A 220 230 V 60 A to 86 A 380 480 V 105 130 220 230 105 A to 142 380 480 so ey 15 50 132 75 44 A to 79 A 500 600 V 180 A to 240 A 380 480 V 15 50 132 75 30 00 265 50 312 A to 600 A 380 480 V 107 A to 472 A 500 690 V 30 00 265 50 60 00 531 00 100 A to 428 A 660 690 V Table 3 6 Recommended tightening torque for power and grounding connections Line Fuses For protecting the input rectifier diodes and the wiring use UR Type Ultra Rapid fuses with 144 equal or lower than indicated in table 3 5 Standard fuses may be used optionally at the input with currents as indicated in table 3 5 or circuit breakers dimensioned for 1 2 x rated inverter input current for the CT or the VT operation refer to items 9 1 2 to 9 1 5 However in this case only the installation will
179. CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 16 CFW 09 SHARK NEMA 4X 8 16 1 Enclosure Specifications 8 16 2 Mechanical Installation 330 In applications that need a inverter with a higher protection enclosure the CFW 09 SHARK NEMA 4X is indicated The NEMA 4X provides protection against dust dirt and splashing or hose directed water Figure 8 54 CFW 09 Shark Nema 4X The SHARK NEMA 4X is the CFW 09 standard with a stainless steel enclosure The models are CFW 09 0006 T 2223 CFW 09 0007 T 2223 Size 10 CFW 09 0010 T 2223 CFW 09 0016 T 2223 Size 2 0 CFW 09 0003 T 3848 CFW 09 0004 T 3848 Size 10 CFW 09 0005 T 3848 CFW 09 0009 T 3848 CFW 09 0013 T 3848 Size 2 0 CFW 09 0016 T 3848 The Shark inverter dimensions are distinct from the standard CFW 09 inverter so the Sizes 1 and 2 from the Shark inverter are different from the Sizes 1 and 2 of the standard 09 NEMA Type 4X indoors NEMA Type 12 indoors IP 56 Other specifications are same to the standard CFW 09 and are explained along this manual The inverter comes covered by a plastic film Remove this sheet before starting the installation Install the inverter in an environment that does not exceed Type 4 4X 12 limitations Install the inverter on a flat surface in the vertical position External dimensions and mounting holes are according to figures 8 55 and 8 56 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Cable glands for con
180. CRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes Inactive 0 Active 1 and the status is the most significant bit MSB Example Active 24 V 012 Inactive 0 V Inactive 0 V 014 Active 24 015 Inactive 0 V 016 Inactive 0 V DI7 Inactive 0 V DI8 Inactive 0 V This is equivalent to the binary sequence 10010000 Which corresponds to the decimal number 144 The Keypad displays will be as follows 013 LCD Oor1 Indicates on the Keypad LCD Display the status of the 2 Digital Outputs Digital and Relay LED 010 255 of the I O Expansion Board 001 002 and the Relay Outputs of the Outputs DO1 DO2 control board Number 1 stands for Active and number 0 stands for Inactive HL1 RL2 and RL3 in the following order DO1 DO2 RL1 RL2 RL3 eas The LED display shows a decimal value related to the status of the 5 Digital and Relay Outputs where the status of each output is considered one bit of a binary number where Inactive 0 Active 1 and the status of DO1 is the most significant bit MSB The 3 least significant bits are always 0 Example Inactive 002 Inactive Active RL2 Inactive Active This is equivalent to the binary sequence 00101000 Which corresponds to the decimal number 40 The Keypad displays will be 120 Parameter 014 Last Fault 015 Second Previous Fault
181. Current A mm AWG ohms 16 L A 8 108 19 eo 380 3 6 and 4 Ls o p 3 9 9 aL t5 2 1 0 10 8 38 and 45 ee 3 ONG a ERE 25 4 60 70 um ws e ws ss 50 1 120 40 ax 32 42 20 25 Of Bf t00 25 14 iu 25 14 ids 14 71 E om 25 14 575 600 22 27 and 32 66 67 337 5 33 33 16 67 95 3 0 25 25 1 95 30 63and79 12195 1845 _ 61 3049 95 3 0 Table 8 12 Hecommended braking resistor 269 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 10 2 Installation 2 0 1 The maximum current can be determined by Value set at P153 V Resistor Ohms m 2 The RMS braking current can be calculated by min x Where t corresponds to the sum of the braking times during the most severe 5 minute cycle 3 and P eare the maximum peak and rated powers that the braking chopper can deliver The resistor power must be sized according to the application braking duty cycle Connect the braking resistor between the UD and BR power terminals refer to item 3 2 1 Make this connection with a twisted pair Run this cable separately from any signal or control wire oize the cable cross section according to the application considering the maximum and RMS current If the braking resistor is installed inside t
182. Device Identification of the product firmware It has following structure Query Master Response Slave Slave address Slave Address Function Function Type MEI Type Read Code Conformity Level Object Number More Follows CRC Next Object CRC Number of Objects Object Code Object Length Object Value CRC CRC The fields are repeated according to the number of objects This function permits reading of three information categories Basic Regular and Extended and each category are formed by a group of objects Each object is formed by a sequence of ASCII characters For the 09 are only available basic information formed by three objects Object 00 VendorName always Object 01 ProductCode formed by the product code CF W 09 plus the rated inverter current Object 02 MajorMinorRevision it indicates the inverter firmware version VX XX format The read code indicates which information categories are being read and if the objects are accessed individually of by sequence In the example the inverter supports 01 basic information in sequence and 04 individual access to the objects The other fields for the CFW 09 have fixed values Example read basic information in sequence starting from object 00 CFW 09 at address 1 Query Master Response Slave Field Value Object Number Sth CRC 00h CRC 00h Objects 03h P ow d Object Code 00h 4 1 Objec
183. ED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P301 DC Braking Starting Speed A This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 0 1 2 3075 P302 DC Braking Voltage JA This parameter is shown on the display s only when 202 0 1 2 075 Skip Speed 1 P304 Skip Speed 2 P305 Skip Speed 3 P306 Skip Band Range Range Factory Setting Unit 010450 30 1 rpm 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 1 96 P133 to P134 600 1 rpm P133 to P134 900 1 rpm P133 to P134 1200 1 rpm 0 to 750 0 1 rpm Description Notes For the Control there is a Dead Time motor runs freely before the DC braking starts This time is required in order to demagnetize the motor and it is a function of the motor speed During the DC Braking the LED displays flashes Id br The DC braking does not work with P202 4 Vector with Encoder Control If the inverter is enabled during the DC braking operation the braking process is interrupted and the inverter will return to its normal operation ATTENTION The DC braking may continue working even after the motor has already stopped Pay special attention to the motor thermal sizing for cyclic braking of short time This parameter establishes the starting point from where the DC Braking takes place Refer to figure 6 40 This parameter adjusts the DC voltage DC braking torque applied to the motor during the braking proce
184. ESHOOTING FAULT E12 Braking Resistor Overload E13 Incorrect encoder sense of rotation for P202 4 Encoder with P408 runs to Imr E15 Motor Phase Loss E17 Overspeed Fault E24 Programming Error E31 Keypad HMI Connection Fault E32 Motor Overtemperature E33 Speed without Control 9 E34 Long Period at Torque Limitation 9 E41 Self Diagnosis Fault 230 RESET V Power on Manual Reset Key 0 Auto reset Do not reset this fault and restart without first correcting the direction of either the encoder or of the motor Power on Manual Reset Key 0 Auto reset Dix Serial Fieldbus It is automatically reset when the incompatible parameters are correctly programmed It is automatically reset when HMI communication with inverter is reestablished V Power on Manual Reset Key 0 Auto reset Dix Fieldbus Contact WEG POSSIBLE CAUSES Load inertia too high or deceleration ramp too short Load on the motor shaft too high P154 and P155 programmed incorrectly V Cables U V W to motor are inverted V Encoder channels A and B are inverted Encoder mounted in wrong position Note This fault can only occur during Self tuning Bad contact or broken wiring between motor and inverter v Incorrect value programmed in P401 Vector Control without orientation V
185. Factory Setting Unit 0 2 to 60 0 2 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 0 1 0 0 1 Description Notes The Flying Start function allows the inverter to start a motor that is running freely This function takes the motor from its actual speed to the speed reference set at the inverter In order to enable the Flying Start function set P320 1 or 2 If the Flying Start function is not needed at some moments a digital input may be set to disable the Flying Start set only one of the parameters between P265 and P270 to 17 Flying Start for V F VVW Control Mode To do that it has a voltage ramp adjusted in P331 and the motor frequency is fixed and defined by the speed setpoint The Flying Start will always work when a start or run command is given after the time adjusted in P332 to allow for the motor demagnetization Parameter P331 sets the time required for the output voltage reaching the rated voltage Flying Start FS function for the Sensorless Vector Control P202 z 3 The Flying Start function takes place after the START command At this moment the inverter senses the motor speed and once the motor speed is found which may be in the forward or reverse direction the motor is accelerated to the speed reference indicated in P001 Parameters P135 P331 and P332 are not used by the Flying Start function when P202 3 Settings It is recommended to adjust P151 to the value in table 6 8 and P150 to
186. I 192 168 0 5 Remotel I O 192 168 0 4 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES EtherNet IP Industrial EtherNet Protocol is a communication system proper for the industrial environment This system allows application data exchange time restricted or critical between industrial systems The EtherNet IP is available for simple devices such as sensors actuators as well as for complex devices such as robots PLCs keypads and inverters The EtherNet IP application layer protocol is based on the Control and Information Protocol layer that is used in both DeviceNet and ControlNet The organizes the devices as collection of objects and defines the methods and procedures for data access Furthermore the EtherNet IP uses the standard IEEE 802 3 for the low level layers and the TCP IP and UDP IP protocols for the intermediary layers to transport the CIP packets Therefore the infrastructure used by the EtherNet IP is the same used by the corporate computer networks EtherNet This fact extends considerably the means of controlling and monitoring the devices connected to the network Availability of application protocols HTTP etc Integration between the assembly line and the corporate Itis based on a widely used and accepted standard Greater data flow than the standard protocols used for the industrial automation Hub or Switch PC 192 168 0 2 Inverter 192 168
187. ION Parameter P206 Auto Reset Time P207 Reference Engineering Unit 1 P208 201 Reference Scale Factor 150 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 to 255 8 1s 32 to 127 114 1 18000 1800 1500 1 Description Notes Inthe event of a fault trio except for E09 E24 E31 and E41 the CFW 09 initiate an automatic reset after the time given by P206 15 elapsed If P206 x 2 Auto Reset does not occur If after Auto Reset the same fault is repeated three times consecutively the Auto Reset function will be disabled A fault is considered consecutive if it happens again within 30 seconds after Auto Reset Hence if an error occurs four consecutive times it will be permanently indicated and the inverter will be disabled This parameter is useful only for inverters provided with a keypad with LCD display 207 is used to apply customized display to 001 Speed reference and 002 motor speed The letters rom can be changed to user selected characters E g CFM L s etc The Reference Engineering Unit is formed by three characters which will be applied to the Speed Reference P001 and the Motor Speed P002 LCD display indications P207 defines the left character P216 defines the center character and P217 the right character All characters correspondent to the ASCII code from 32 to 127 can be chosen Examples A B Zi a b 2 0 1 9
188. Input Al1 P234 P235 P236 Analog Input AI2 P237 P238 P239 P240 Analog Input AI3 P241 P242 P243 P244 Analog Input Al4 P245 P246 P247 Sum of the Analog Inputs Al1 Al2 gt 0 Negative values are zeroed Sum of the Analog Inputs AI2 Electronic Potentiometer E P Multispeed P124 to P131 Serial Fieldbus PLC Table 6 26 LOCAL REMOTE speed reference selection CO CO N lt The reference value set by the Q and C keys is contained in parameter P121 Details of the Electronic Potentiometer E P operation in figure 6 37m When option 7 E P is selected program P265 or P267 5 and P266 or P268 5 When option 8 is selected program P266 and or P267 and or P2668 to 7 When P203 1 PID do not use the reference via E P P221 P222 7 When P203 1 PID the value programmed in P221 P222 becomes the PID setpoint 155 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P223 Oto 11 P223 LOCAL FWD REV Selection LOCAL FW D REV 2 0 Always Forward Selection 1 Always Reverse 2 Key of the Keypad Default Forward 3 Key gt ofthe Keypad Reverse Default 4 Digital Input 012 P264 0 5 Serial FWD Default 6 Reserved Serial REV Default 7 Fieldbus FWD Default 8 Fieldbus REV Default 9 Polarity Al4 10 PLC FWD 11 PLC REV Table 6 27 LOCAL FWD REV selection 224
189. Mode P202 3 After the motor has started and it is running above 3 Hz the torque limitation value P169 P170 may be reduced below 30 95 if required The motor torque Tmotor be calculated from the value at P169 P170 by using the following equation pags 159 Tmotor 10 100 P401 pato zu 100 where Tmotor Percentage value of the rated motor torque 1 for N lt Nrated Nrated x F10 for N gt Nrated N 100 Nrated Motor synchronous speed N Motor actual speed The above equation is valid for forward torque To reverse torque replace P169 by P170 141 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter 161 Proportional Gain of the Speed Regulator P162 Integral Gain of the Speed Regulator 142 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 0 to 63 9 7 4 0 1 0 000 to 9 999 0 023 0 001 Description Notes The gains for the speed regulator are automatically set based on the value of parameter P413 Tm Constant However these gains can be manually adjusted in order to optimize the dynamic response of the speed Increase this value to have a faster response Although reduce this value in case of speed oscillations In general P161 smoothes abrupt changes of speed or reference while P162 reduces the error between the set point and the real speed value as well as improves the torque response at low speeds Optimization of the Speed Reg
190. Motors Automation Energy Transmission amp Distribution Coatings Frequency Inverter Convertidor de Frecuencia Inversor de Frequ ncia Frequenzumrichter Variateur de Vitesse Frequentie regelaar Frekvensomvandlare CFW 09 User s Manual Manual del Usuario Manual do Usu rio Bedienungsanleitung Manuel d utilisation Gebruikers handleiding Anvandarinstruktioner EEE FREQUENCY INVERTER MANUAL Series CFW 09 Software version 4 4 Language English Document 0899 5306 13 01 2011 ATTENTION It is very important to check if the inverter software version is the same as indicated above Summary of Revisions 0 0 0 A AJ PO N CO 11 12 13 table below describes all revisions made to this manual Revision Inclusion of the models from 2 9 to 32 A 500 600 V Inclusion of new functions Control Type of the Speed Regulator Speed Regulator Differential Gain Stop Mode Selection Access to the parameters with different content than default Hysteresis for Nx Ny kWh Counter Load User 1 and 2 the factory Hours Hx Parameter Setting Disable via Dlx Help Message for E24 P406 2 in Vector Control Automatic SensorLess Set of P525 Last 10 errors indication Motor Torque indication via AOx New optional boar
191. ND ACCESSORIES 2 Inverter JOG enabling provided P225 3 to LOC or P228 3 to REM 1 Master sTsx s e 3 Ie Te Te Te e Toe C L Code JOG active 1 add 7 2 Inverter Fault Reset 1 Master C L Code RESET 1 add 7 2 Inverter 8 13 5 3 Parameters Related Parameter number Parameter description to the Serial P220 Local Remote selection Communication P221 Local reference selection P222 Remote reference selection P223 Local forward reverse selection P224 Local Start Stop selection P225 Local JOG selection P226 Remote forward reverse selection P227 Remote Start Stop selection P228 Remote JOG selection Inverter address on the Serial communication network P308 range values from 1 to 30 Table 8 22 Parameters related to the serial communication For further information about the parameters above refer to chapter 6 Detailed Parameter Description 311 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 13 5 4 Errors Related to the They act as follows Serial Communication M They do not disable the inverter They do not disable defective relays They are informed in the word the logical status Fault Types E22 longitudinal parity fault E24 parameterization fault when some situation occurs as indicated in table 4 2 parameter incompatibility c
192. OFF the board is not On line On Line Green Indicates that the board is Off line at the Fieldbus ON the board is off line and the data exchange is not possible OFF the board is not Off line Valid only for the Profibus DP V1 interface It indicates that the board is processing a DP V1 request ON The board is executing a DP V1 request OFF There is no DP V1 request being processed Off Line Acyclic Traffic Green Table 8 17 Signaling LEDs indicating the status of the Profibus DP network JE NOTE When power is applied to the inverter and both on line and off line LEDs on the Profibus DP board keep flashing then a network address configuration or installation problem may be present Check the installation and the network node address JE NOTE Use of the Profibus DP related CFW 09 Parameters Refer to item 8 12 7 8 12 3 Profibus DP V1 By using the DP V1 communication kit besides the exchange of cyclic data which is performed in a similar form to that of Profibus DP VO it is also possible to perform services of reading writing parameters through DP V1 acyclic functions by the network master as well as by a commissioning tool The parameter mapping is done based in the slot and index addressing according to the equationing below Slot parameter number 1 255 Index parameter number 1 MOD 255 JE NOTE MOD represents the remainder of the integer division For instance the paramete
193. P246 4 the curves shown in figure 6 27 are still valid with the difference that with Al4 negative the direction of rotation is reversed P234 0 000 to 9 999 Al1 P018 Analog Input Gain 1 000 0 001 OFFSET 236 244 247 Figure 6 29 Block diagram of the analog AIS Al4 The internal values Al1 Al3 and are the results of the following equation Alx Alx OFFSET x 10 V x Gain 100 For example 5 V Offset 70 and Gain 1 00 5 70 x 10 V x 1 2 V 100 Al1 2 2 V means that the motor will run in reverse with a reference equal to 2 V 164 Parameter P235 Analog Input Signal P236 Analog Input AT Offset P237 09 Analog Input AI2 Function Range Factory Setting Unit 0 to 3 0 100 0 to 100 0 0 0 0 1 96 0 to 3 0 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes P235 Inout Signal Switch 51 2 0 OFF ON ON 2 OFF ON 3 ON Table 6 34 signal selection When a current signal is used at the Analog Input set the 51 2 switch on the control board to ON Options 2 and 3 provide inverse reference with which is possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference Refer to P234 P237 Inout Al2 Function 0 221 222 1 After Ramp Reference 2 Maximum Torque Current 3 PID Process Variable 4 Maximum Torque Current 12 1 Table 6 35 Al2 function
194. P357 Filter for the Torque Current Iq P358 Hysteresis for the Torque Current Iq P361 4 Load Detector P362 Stabilization Speed Available only if P361 1 On CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 0 0 to 10 0 This is the time that the CFW 09 waits before enabling the ramp after 0 0 receiving the Start command 0 1 Function valid for commands digital input only 0 00 to 9 99 Time constant of the filter applied to the torque current The sampling 0 00 time is 5 ms 0 01 It works along with P358 and activates a digital or relay output that was set to the option Torque Polarity Thefiltered torque current may be available at analog outputs AO3 and 4 when they are set to the option Iq with P357 P255 and or P257 38 0 00 to 9 99 Establishes the percentage of hysteresis that is applied to the 2 00 commutation of a digital DOx or relay output when they are set to the 0 01 options 34 or 35 Torque Polarity Positive Torque Iq with P357 Negative Torque H1 P358 x rated torque H2 P358 x rated torque Figure 6 45 Hysteresis for the torque current Iq MU P361 Functi Descripti r n 0 escripti _ 0 Functions that set at parameters from P362 to P368 are disabled 1 The following functions are enabled Slack Cable De tection Lightweight Level and Overweight Detect
195. PID Setpoint P526 Process Variable Filter P527 PID Action Type 224 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 to 16 0 0 1 0 15 0 or 1 0 Description Notes After the feedback input has been chosen you must set the input function selected at P237 to Al2 or P241 to 3 Feedback Type The PID action Type described above considers that the variable feedback signal increases when the process variable also increases direct feedback This is the most common used feedback type When the process variable feedback decreases when the process variable increases inverse feedback it is required to program the selected analog input for the PID 2 or AI3 as inverse reference P239 2 10 to 0 V 20 to 0 mA or P239 3 20 to 4 mA When the feedback is through AI2 and P243 2 10 to 0 V 20 to 0 mA or P243 3 20 to 4 when the feedback is through AI3 When this setting is not present PID does not operate correctly It provides the setpoint via the C and keys for the PID Regulator P203 1 provided that P221 0 LOC or P222 0 REM and the inverter is in the Automatic mode it has been set to Manual Mode the speed reference is given by P121 The value of P525 is maintained at the last set value backup even when inverter is disabled or enabled with P120 1 Active Once PID is in Automatic mode the Setpoint value for regulator
196. R110 Filter 90 350 500 10 Terminal blocks 50 mm 200 10 35 Wire end ferrule 380 Litz wire markings a Ham L3 al o Figure 3 20 g and h EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions in mm 78 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION i EPCOS B84143G220R110 Filter Emm Litz wire Wire end ferrule 11 0 400 550011 0 220 430 j EPCOS 84143 320520 84143 400520 Filters 4 x M6 mm deep 120 PE M10 x 30 Figure 3 20 i and EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions in mm 19 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION EPCOS 84143 600520 Filter Marking 260 LINE LOAD 15 410 2 5 15 O11 PEM10x30 Marking 27531 300 LINE LOAD O12 20 420 2 5 20 214 12 30 Figure 3 20 I EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions mm 80 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION m EPCOS 84143 150521 and 84143 180521 Filters PE M10 30 91 2 x M6 6 mm deep PE M10 x 30 Figure 3 20 m and n EMC filters CFW 09 inverter series dimensions mm 81 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION EPCOS B84143B4005125 Filter Figure 3 20 o EMC filters for CFW 09 inverter series dimensions in mm 82 BNOLZTHISN I 339
197. RE debe EO vn t 287 8 12 7 Use to the Fieldbus Related Parameters of the CFW 09 294 8 12 7 1 Variables Read from the Inverter 294 8 12 7 2 Variables Written in the Inverter 296 T di6alloriS eue dee ade iato a eee coe oed 298 8 12 7 4 Addressing of the CFW 09 Variables in the Fieldbus DEVICES mE wae 299 8 13 Serial Communication 0 6 300 8 13 CON 300 8 13 2 Interfaces Description 301 301 EET 302 o 19 9 Protocol 302 8 13 3 1 Used UN ES PUR EA 302 8 13 3 2 Parameters Variables Resolution 303 8 13 3 3 Characters rn 303 PEFOIOCOD tivi vine een ude C eco eo Y t p ud 303 8 13 3 5 Execution and Telegram Test 305 8 13 3 6 Telegram Sequence 306 8 13 3 7 Variable Code ont 306 9 13 4
198. RY CIRCUIT FUSES POWER GROUNDING d Size 8 models RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION GROUNDING g Size 10E CONTROL AUXILIARY CIRCUIT FUSES POWER gt e Size 9 and 10 models SELECTION GROUNDING RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION GROUNDING Figure 3 7 c to g Location of the power grounding control connections and rated voltage 52 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 3 2 3 Rated Voltage The following models of CFW 09 inverter series have a jumper for rated voltage Selection selection gt 86 A 380 480 V gt 44 A 500 600 V 500 690 V models ATTENTION Itis necessary to adjust the jumper in models 380 480 V when the power supply voltage is different from 440 V and 460 V Also in models 500 600 V and 500 690 V when the power supply voltage is different from 550 V 575 V and 600 V PROCEDURE 380 480 V models Remove jumper on the LVS1 board or from the CIP2 for models gt 180 A from position XC60 440 460 V and insert it on the proper position according to the application line voltage 500 600 V models Remove jumper on the LVS2 board from position XC62 550 V 575 V 600 V and insert it on the proper position according to the line voltage 500 690 V models Remove jumper on the CIP3 board from position XC62 550 V 575 V 600 V and insert it on the proper position according to the line voltage LVS1 size 6 and 7 380 480 V b CIP2 size 8 9 and 10
199. Reference 0 to P1343 9009 m 127 I F Control P135 2 Speed transition to Control 0 to 90 128 0 1 P136 Current Reference I P TL EA 128 for I F Control 121 11xl 2 122xl 3 1 33xl 4 1 44 521 55xl 6 1 66 xl 7 17 xl 8 1 88xl 9 2 00xl P136 has different functions for V F and Vector Control 10 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Factory User s justable Range Setting Setting age V F Control P1360 Manual Boost Torque 129 P137 Autommatic Torque Boost 0 00 to 1 00 130 P139 Output Current Filter 0 00 to 16 00 131 PH Dwol Speed at Sat 9 m 15 Adjustable V F p42 MaximumOutputvottage 00101000 woo fie P143 Intermediate Output Voltage 0 001000 __ 5 132 pias FieldWeakening Speed P133 90 0PIs4 1800 m 132 P146 Intermediate Speed 9010 P145 wmm 182 DC Link Voltage Regulation 0 With Losses 1 Without Losses 133 1 Without Losses 2 Enable Disable via 013 018 P150 0 DC Link Voltage Regulation Mode 339 to 400 P296 0 V 133 and 585 to 800 P296 1 136 616 to 800 P296 2 678 to 800 P296 3 739 to 800 P296 4 809 to 1000 P296 5 885 to 1000 P296 6 924 to 1000 P296 7 1063 to 1200 P296 8 P152 Proportional Gain 0 00 to 9 99 000 137 P153 9 Dynamic Braking Level 339 to 400 P296 0 V 137 585 to 800 P296
200. Serial Watchdog Action P318 Watchdog detection for the PLC board P320 Flying Start Ride Through P321 9 Ud Line Loss Level This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control 200 Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 0 0 to 999 0 E Time for serial 0 0 watchdog action 0 1 0 0 Disable 0 1 to 999 0 Enable Table 6 53 Serial Watchdog action If the inverter does not receive any valid serial telegram after the time programmed at P314 has elapsed the Fault Message E28 on the HMI and the inverter will return to the action programmed at P313 Type of Disabling by E28 E29 E30 To enable the inverter to execute this action the inverter commands must be programmed to the Serial option at the parameters P220 to P228 pun P318 Description 0 0 Disables the activation of the Watchdog Error for the PLC board E71 1 Enables the activation of the Watchdog Error for the PLC board E71 Table 6 54 Watchdog detection for the PLC board 0103 The Parameter P320 selects the use of the following functions 0 Inactive 20 Function 0 Inactive 1 Only Flying Start is active valid for P202 0 1 2 Control sensorless or 5 VVW 2 Flying Start and Ride Through are active valid for P202 0 1 2 Control sensorless or 5 VVW 3 Only Ride Through is active Table 6 55 Flying Start Ride Through 178 V to 282V
201. Set this parameter value according to the motor nameplate and the Motor Rated Voltage P296 connection diagram in the terminal box 1V This value cannot be greater than the rated voltage value set at P296 In order to make a new setting of P400 effective while not in the guided start up routine it is necessary to power the inverter down up P401 1 2 0 010 1 30 x P295 Setthis parameter according to the motor nameplate considering the Motor Rated Current 1 0 x P295 0 1 A 100 1 A 99 9 motor operating voltage P402 0 2 11 O to 18000 Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate Motor Rated Speed gm 010 18000 rpm for V F and VVW Control 0107200 rpm for Vector Control 0 to 7200 1750 1458 1 rom P403 1 7 to 300 Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate ee LEOD 0 to 300 Hz for V F and VVW Control Frequency 1 Hz 30 to 120 Hz for Vector Control 30 to 120 60 50 1 Hz 404 01050 Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate Motor Rated Power 4 Motor Rated Motor Rated P404 Dower hp KW 94 Power hp kW 0 180 0 132 0 1 200 0 150 0 2 220 0 160 0 3 250 0 185 0 4 270 0 200 0 5 300 0 220 0 6 350 0 260 0 7 380 0 280 0 8 400 0 300 0 9 430 0 315 0 10 440 0 330 0 11 450 0 335 0 12 475 0 355 0 13 500 0 375 0 14 540 0 400 0 15 600 0 450 0 16 620 0 460 0 17 670 0 500 0 18 700 0 525 0 19 760 0 570 0 20 800 0 600 0 21 850 0 630
202. T STOP selection Note If the Digital Inouts are programmed for Forward Run Reverse Run the 0 keys will remain disabled independently of the value programmed at P227 P228 gt REMOTE JOG Selection Disable Key of the Keypad Digital inputs DI3 to DI8 P265 to P270 Serial Fieldbus PLC Table 6 32 REMOTE JOG selection The JOG speed reference is given by parameter 122 157 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION LOCAL REFERENCE 221 9 is LOCAL REMOTE P223 i Selection P220 START STOP P224 LOCAL ise REFERENCE P225 REFERENCE REFERENCE REMOTE REFERENCE LOCAL COMMANDS mm SOUS COMMANDS REMOTE REFERENCE P222 COMMANDS FWD REV P226 START STOP P227 JOG P228 For P221 11 PLC or P222 11 PLC the speed reference will be the total reference according to the figure 6 26 Figure 6 25 Block diagram of the local remote mode 158 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION pue 10 E907 PUE ndu jeubiq 50f OO S sor 2214 T303G L0Ld 1309v 00ld itt tN 2 9 0 19J8H pue A N 99U9J9J8H 6101 EmA x Jeoeq eo y c dwey
203. TER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES b Dimensions of the HMI CFW09 LED LCD remote HMI frame kit with NEMA5 IP51 degree of protection Keypad Dimensions Cutout Dimensions for Panel Door Installation Front View 24 5x Screw Dimensions of the CFW09 LED LCD N4 with NEMA 4 IP56 degree of protection Keypad Dimensions 12 Cutout Dimensions for Panel Door Installation Front View Back View 4 5x Figure 8 14 b and c Keypad dimensions in mm inch and mounting procedures 260 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Remote HMI connection for distances lower than 10 m 30 ft Inverter key pad HMI Insert spacer to connect the cable to the inverter T gt 1 recommended cable length 10 m 308 1 0000 6 9 Connector 089 Connector 089 Female Figure 8 15 Cable for remote keypad connection lt 10 m CABLE CONNECTION 5 m lt 15 ft i Connector Pin Sena 5v 3 Tx 4 GND 8 8 HBV 9 9 SHIELD Note The frame can be used or not Table 8 7 Connections for remote keypad cable up to 5 m 15 ft CABLE CONNECTION gt 5 m gt 15 ft Sand Inverter Side HMI Side 2 4 GND 8 8 Note The frame must be used Table 8 8 Connections for remote keypad cable from 7 5 m 22 ft to 10 m 30 ft Remote HMI connection for distances higher than 10 m
204. This para meter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control P167 Proportional Gain of the Current Regulator P168 Integral Gain of the Current Regulator Parameters P166 and P167 and P168 are shown on the display s only when P202 3 or4 Vector Control Range Factory Setting Unit 999 to 999 0 1 999 to 999 0 1 0 012 to 1 000 0 012 0 001 5 0 00 10 7 99 0 00 0 00 to 1 99 0 5 0 01 0 000 to 1 999 0 010 0 001 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Parameters P163 or P164 may be used to compensate a bias offset at the analog input signals when the speed reference is given by the analog inputs to Refer to figure 6 26 Adjusts the time constant for the Speed Filter Refer to figure 6 27 NOTE In general this parameter shall not be changed Increasing the speed filter value renders the system response slower The differential action may reduce the effects on the motor speed caused by the load variation Refer to figure 6 27 a P166 Differential Gain Action 0 0 Off 0 01 to 7 99 On Table 6 10 Speed regulator differential gain action The parameters P167 and P168 are set by the self tuning routine as a function of parameters P411 and P409 respectively NOTE These parameters must not be changed 143 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Facto
205. V DIx Open Time Time Note digital inputs set to start stop must be on in order that the inverter operates as shown above d FWD REV Motor Speed Time 24 V DIx Open Time f FAST STOP Motor Speed Motor Decelerates with Zero Ramp Time 24 V Fast Stop DIx Time g LOAD USER VIA Dix Dix 0V 24 V 24 Load User 1 Time Load User 2 OV Time Figure 6 37 a to g Details about the function of the digital inputs 177 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION h JOG JOG Speed TEN P122 Speed Accel Ramp Decel Ramp 24 V Time Start Stop Dix Time 24 V JOG DIx Open 24 General Enable DIx Open Time i JOG and JOG JOG Speed P122 eer Speed P123 Motor Speed 24 V DIx JOG General Enable Start Stop 24 V Time Start Stop Open General Enable Open Time j RESET Fault EXY Inverter Status Time 24 V Reset DIx Open 3 Time 24 V Reset Fault condition persists Time Figure 6 37 cont h to Details about the function of the digital inputs 178 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION k 3 WIRE START STOP Start DIx 24 V 24 Time Stop Time Motor Speed Time FORWARD RUN REVERSE RUN 24 V Forward Run 3 3
206. V F 50 Hz 2 V F Adjustable 3 Sensorless Vector 4 Vector with Encoder 5 VVW 99 CHAPTER 5 START UP ACTION Press the noc key to enter the programming mode Use the Q and C keys to select the type of control ROG Press the key to save the selected option and exit the programming mode Press the keys or until P002 is reached PROG Press the 27 key Press the Start key Press the key and hold until 1800 rpm is reached A Press lt gt FWD REV key Obs The LEDs on the keypad show whether the motor is running FWD or REV 100 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Enter the programming mode If the option V F 60 Hz value 0 is already programmed ignore this action Exit the programming mode Motor Speed rpm This is a read only parameter Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm Minimum Speed in the Forward CW direction of rotation for 4 pole motors Motor accelerates up to 1800 rpm for 4 pole motors Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm and then reverses the direction of rotation accelerating back up to 1800 rpm CHAPTER 5 START UP LED DISPLAY ACTION LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Press the 0 Stop key Motor decelerates down to 0 rom Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to the JOG speed set at P122 122 150 rom Press the 96 and hold it CCW direction of rotation Release the 206 key Motor de
207. Zone for Speed Indication Range Factory Setting Unit 134 1000 1 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Speed Reference Total Reference Real Speed Torque Reference Torque Current Output Current P252 P254 P256 P258 PID Process Variable Active Current Power PID Setpoint Positive Torque Current Motor Torque Dead Zone for Speed Indication PLC Motor Voltage Figure 6 31 Block diagram of the analog outputs Scale of the Analog Outputs indications Full Scale 10 V for outputs 1 and AO2 located on the control board and and AO4 located on the optional board EBA Full Scale 20 mA for the outputs AO11 and located on the optional board EBB Speed Reference P001 full scale P134 Total Reference full scale P134 Motor Speed 002 full scale P134 Torque Reference full scale 2 0 x P295 M Torque Current full scale 2 0 x P295 Output Current full scale 1 5 x 295 PID Process Variable full scale 1 0 x P528 M Active Current full scale 1 5 x P295 Power full scale 1 5 x 3 x P295 x P296 PID Setpoint full scale 1 0 x P528 Motor Torque full scale 2 0 x P295 Dead Zone for Speed Indication full scale P134 Motor Voltage full scale 2 0 x P400 While the speed indication in 002 is below of the value set at P259 002 lt P259 the value of the
208. a better understanding refer to figures 6 46 and b If P361 0 Load Detection Off the output always remains activated Torque Polarity The output programmed to this function will be activated when the torque is positive Torque Polarity The output programmed to this function will be activated when the torque is negative UI NOTE The outputs that are set to the function Torque Polarity have a hysteresis in its operation that can be configured at parameter P358 Hysteresis for the Torque Current Iq This resource works in the transition of these outputs at the moment they are activated or deactivated DOx or RLx 34 Torque Polarity XCA ES Status of the contacts at XC1 Torque E DO1 NO RL2 RL3 NO y E 21 24 22 24 23 25 25 26 27 28 Positive Open Closed Closed Open Closed Table 6 43 Status of the DOx and RLx contacts with the torque polarity function DOx or RLx 35 Torque Polarity XC4 Voltage Gh of Ne contacts at XC1 SENS DO1 6 9 RL1 RL2 RL3 NO DO2 21 24 2 gt 2 25 26 2 28 Table 6 43 b Status of DOx RLx contacts with the torque polarity function 183 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes E NOTE lt is used only with the Master Slave function to indicate the torque pola
209. able is shown by using 13 bit resolution Hence the reference value for the motor synchronous speed will be equal to 8191 1FFFh This value shall be used just as a base speed to calculate the desired speed reference speed For example 1 4 poles motor 60 Hz synchronous speed 1800 rpm and reference speed 650 rom 1800 rom 8191 650 rpm X X 2958 OB8Eh This value OB8Eh shall be written in the second word which represents motor speed reference 2 6 poles motor 60 Hz synchronous speed 1200 rpm and reference speed 1000 rpm 1200 rpm 8191 1000 rpm X X 4096 1AAAh This value shall be written in the second word which represents motor speed reference NOTE lt is possible to use values higher than 8191 1FFFh when it is desired to have values higher than the motor synchronous speed since the maximum speed reference set for the inverter is respected 3 Status of the Digital Outputs It allows changing the status of the Digital Outputs that are programmed for the Fieldbus in the Parameters P275 to P280 The word that defines the status of the digital outputs is formed by 16 bits having the following construction High order bits define the output that shall be controlled when set to 1 bit 08 1 control of the output 001 bit 09 1 control of the output 002 297 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 12 7 3 298 Fault Indications bit 10 1 control of the output RL1
210. able shields Figure 3 13 Dip switch position for 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA selection As a default the analogue inputs are selected as 0 to 10 V This can be changed using the dip switch 51 on the control board Analog Factory Default Dip Reference S1 2 OFF 0 to 10 V Factory Default ON 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA OFF 0 to 10 V Factory Default No F Table 3 7 Dip switch configuration Related Parameters P221 P222 P234 to 240 During the signal and control wire installation you must follow these guidelines 1 Cable Cross Section 0 5 mm 20 AWG to 1 5 mm 14 AWG 2 Max Torque 0 50 N m 4 50 Ibf in 3 XC1 wiring must be connected with shielded cables and installed separately from other wiring power control at 110 V 220 Vac etc according to table 3 8 Inverter Model Wiring Min Se EIEN Length Distance Output current lt 100 m 330 ft gt 10 4 in lt 24A gt 100 m 330 ft gt 25 cm 10 in Output current lt 30 m 100 ft gt 10 4 in gt 28 gt 30 m 100 ft 25 cm 10 in Table 3 8 Wiring separation distances If the crossing of these cables is unavoidable install them perpendicular maintaining a minimum separation distance of 5 cm 2 in at the crossing point 63 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 3 2 Typical Terminal 64 Connections Connect the shield as shown in figure 3 14 Insulate
211. abling of the optimal braking can increase the motor noise level and the vibration level If this is not desired disable the optimal braking P152 0 00 to 9 99 Refer to P151 for V F Control figure 6 14 2 If P152 0 00 and P151 is different from the maximum value the Regulator 9 Ramp Holding function Is active Refer to P151 for the Scalar Control Only for P202 0 1 2 Control P152 multiplies the DC Link voltage error i e DC Link actual DC or 5 VVW Link setting P151 P152 is typically used to prevent overvoltage in applications with eccentric loads P1539 77 339 400 P296 0 Dynamic braking can only be used if the inverter is fitted with a dynamic Dynamic Braking 375 braking resistor The voltage level for actuation of the brake chopper Voltage Level 1V must be set according to the supply voltage If P153 is set too close to 585 to 800 P296 1 the overvoltage trip level E01 an overvoltage trip may occur before the 618 brake chopper and resistor can dissipate the braking energy The following 1V are the recommended settings 616 to 800 P296 2 675 1V 137 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P154 Dynamic Braking Resistor P155 DB Resistor Power Rating 138 Range Factory Setting Unit 678 to 800 P296 3 748 1V 739 to 800 P296 4 780 1V 809 to 1000 P296 5 893 1V 885 to 1000 P296 6 972 1V 924 to 1000 P296
212. actory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes Master Slave XC1 2 012 FWD REV 1 12 13 Speed Reference 1 15 16 Al2 Max Torque Figure 6 38 Diagram for the torque master slave function gt 1 This function activates the relay and or transistorized outputs set to this option when the output frequency calculated value F is greater than the value set at P369 Fx plus the hysteresis value set at P370 When F lt Fx P370 the outputs set to this option are deactivated refer to figure 6 39 t F gt Fx _ 2 With this option the hysteresis for the acceleration is disabled therefore this function activates the relay and or transistorized outputs set to this option when the output frequency calculated value F is greater than the value set at P369 Fx When F Fx P370 the outputs set to this option are deactivated refer to figure 6 39 v Set point Process Variable This function activates the digital or relay output when the Set point value equals the Process Variable value refer to figure 6 39 v No E32 It indicates that the inverter is disabled due to an E32 error Ready 2 Indicates that the motor is disabled motor stopped without error and without undervoltage Symbols used in the Digital Output functions N P002 Motor speed N Speed Reference P001 Any value originated from parameter or digital or analog input See figure 6 26 and description of
213. after these settings the motor cannot decelerate within the required deceleration time use the dynamic braking For more details about the dynamic braking refer to item 8 10 Type of DC Link Voltage Regulation when P152 gt 0 00 and P151 are set different that than the maximum value When the DC Link Voltage reaches the regulation level during the deceleration the deceleration ramp time 15 increased and the motor is also accelerated until the DC Link voltage leaves the defined over voltage level There after deceleration is continued Refer to figure 6 13 660 Inverter 220 400 440 500 550 De 415 V 72 V 595 v 575 200 V P296 P151 53 sev wav rov asv 972 fare v wav Table 6 8 Hecommended values for DC Link voltage regulation level 134 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes DC Link Voltage Ud P004 E01 Overvoltage Level P151 Nominal Regulation Level Time Figure 6 13 Deceleration curve with DC Link voltage limitation regulation JU f NOTES The factory setting is at maximum Link regulation 15 deactivated To activate this regulation we recommend to set P151 according table 6 8 If even after this setting the inverter is still disabled due to overvoltage E01 during the load acceleration increase the value of the Parame
214. alculated during the Self tuning routine Special Function Parameters It includes parameters related to special functions Symbols and definitions used in this chapter 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 Indicates that the parameter changed only with the inverter disabled motor stopped Indicates that the values can change as a function of the motor parameters Indicates that the values can change as a function of P413 Tm Constant obtained during Self tuning Indicates that the values can change as a function of P409 P411 obtained during Self tuning Indicates that the values can change as a function of P412 Tr Constant obtained during Self tuning Indicates that the values can change as a function of P296 Indicates that the values can change as a function of P295 Indicates that the values can change as a function of P203 Indicates that the values can change as a function of P320 For new inverters User Default no parameters The inverter will be delivered with settings according to the market considering the HMI language V F 50 Hz or 60 Hz and the required voltage The reset of the standard factory setting may change the parameters related to the frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Values within parenthesis mean the factory setting for 50 Hz The maximum value of P156 and P401 is 1 8 x P295 for model 4 2 A 500 600 V and 1 6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A 220 230 V 2 9 A and
215. anel EN61800 3 1996 Class A11 2000 distribution Serial Interface unrestricted distribution Serial Interface unrestricted distribution 24 distiibution 30A FN 3258 55 52 Schaffner 203 First environment restricted A1 Fe 042 distribution Interface 2 turns filter input side 30 A No FN 3258 55 52 No First environment restricted A1 38 A distribution 45 A No FN 3258 100 35 2 Schaffner 203 No No First environment restricted 1 1151 042 filter distribution input output sides Table 3 12 Schaffner filters list for 09 inverter series with 380 480 power supply 71 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 380 480 V power supply Model EBA RS 485 Serial Interface 45 FN 3258 100 35 EBB RS 485 Serial Interface 45 FN 3258 100 35 Profibus DP 12 MBaud 45 A FN 3258 100 35 60 A 86 A 105 A BE FN 3359 1000 99 142A 180A 211A 240 A 312A 361 A 450 515 600 Notes Input Input Optional Device filter Choke 2 x Schaffner 203 1151 042 filter input output 2 x Schaffner 203 1151 042 filter input output sides Schaffner 203 042 2 turns in the control 2 x Schaffner 203 1151 042 filter input output d 2 X Schaffner 203 1151 042 Output filter side 2 X Schaffner 167 1151 043 output filter side Schaffner 159 1151 044 output f
216. are defined in the file sys_pswd cfg that is located under directory user pswd Each line of the file has a pair login password that corresponds to a user account In order to change the file containing the user accounts create with the assistance of a simple text editor a file that contains in each line a pair login password A colon shall separate the two words Notice that no password cryptography is available i e the login and the password are completely visible After creating modifying the user accounts transfer via FTP the file sys pswd cfg to the directory user pswd Example of file transfer through FTP C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe ftp 192 168 0 4 5 x 192 168 0 4 Conectado 192 168 0 4 220 Service ready Usuario 192 168 0 4 none user 331 User name ok need password Senha 230 User logged in ftp cd psw 200 directory changed to pswd ftp dir 200 Command OK 158 Listing files rw rw rw 0 root root 9 Jan 1 01 01 sys pswd cfg rw rw rw 0 root root 9 Jan 1 01 01 web pswd cfg 226 Transfer OK Closing connection ftp 124 bytes recebidos 0 16Segundos 0 80Kbytes s ftp gt put sys pswd cfg 200 Command OK 158 Connecting for STOR 226 Transfer OK Closing connection Lin 9 bytes enviados em 0 00Segundos 9000 00Kbytes s tp NOTE The CFW 09 that comes from the factory has a normal user account Username user Password user Users of the normal
217. ated Efficiency 50 0 to 99 9 According to 213 the motor rated power factor P404 MOTOR PARAMETERS P400 to P499 Motor Nameplate Data P400 Motor Rated Voltage 0 to 690 P296 214 P401 2 Motor Rated Current 0 0 to 1 30 x P295 02 1 0 x P295 214 402 20 RPM 0 to 18000 1750 1458 rom 214 0 to 7200 P202 3 and 4 P403 17 Motor Rated Frequency to 300 P202 0 1 2 and 5 60 50 214 P404 Motor Rated hp 0 0 33 hp 0 25 kW 1 5 hp 1 1 kW 214 1 0 50 hp 0 37 kW 2 0 75 hp 0 55 kW 3 1 0 hp 0 75 kW 4 1 5 hp 1 1 kW 5 2 0 hp 1 5 kW 6 3 0 hp 2 2 kW 7 4 0 hp 3 0 kW 8 5 0 hp 3 7 kW 9 5 5 hp 4 0 kW 10 6 0 hp 4 5 kW 11 7 5 hp 5 5 kW 12 10 0 hp 7 5 kW 13 12 5 hp 9 0 kW 14 15 0 hp 11 0 kW 15 20 0 hp 15 0 kW 16 25 0 hp 18 5 kW 17 30 0 hp 22 0 kW 18 40 0 hp 30 0 kW 19 50 0 hp 37 0 kW 20 60 0 hp 45 0 kW 21 75 0 hp 55 0 kW 22 100 0 hp 75 0 kW 23 125 0 hp 90 0 kW 24 150 0 hp 110 0 kW 25 175 0 hp 130 0 kW 26 180 0 hp 132 0 kW 27 200 0 hp 150 0 kW 28 220 0 hp 160 0 kW 29 250 0 hp 185 0 kW 30 270 0 200 0 kW 31 300 0 hp 220 0 kW 32 350 0 hp 260 0 kW 30 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Parameters Function Factory User s 33 380 0 hp 280 0 kW 34 400 0 hp 300 0 kW 35 430 0 hp 315 0 kW 36 440 0 hp 330 0 kW 37 450 0 hp 335 0 kW 38 475 0 hp 355 0 kW 39 500 0 hp 375 0 kW 40 540 0 hp 4
218. b or switch Off the module is not connected to another device Module Status Green or Red Steady Off No power applied o the module Steady Green The module is operating correctly Flashing Green the module has not been configured Flashing Red A minor recoverable error has been detected Steady Red A major internal error has been detected Flashing Green Red The module is performing a power on self test Network Status Green Red Steady Off The module has no power or no IP address has been assigned Steady On the module has at least one established EtherNet IP connection Flashing Green There are no EtherNet IP connections established to the module Flashing Red One or more of the connections in which this module is the target has timed out Steady Red The module has detected that its IP address is already in use Flashing Green Red The module is performing a power on self test Activity Green Flashing indicates that a packet has been received and or transmitted 289 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES JE NOTE The communication board that comes with the product has been developed by the HMS Industrial Networks AB company Therefore the network configuration software will not recognize the product as the CFW 09 variable frequency inverter but as the Anybus S EtherNet IP at the Communication Adapter The differentiation amo
219. be protected against short circuit but not the diodes of the rectifier bridge at the inverter input This option may damage the inverter in case of short circuit of some internal component 56 3 2 5 Power Connections 3 2 5 1 AC Input Connection gt bee CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION __ Shielding Figure 3 9 Power grounding connections DANGER Provide an AC input disconnecting switch to switch OFF input power to the inverter This device shall disconnect the inverter from the AC input supply when required e g during maintenance services However it cannot be used as an emergency stop device ATTENTION The neutral conductor of the AC input for the inverter must be physically grounded but do not use itfor grounding purpose of the inverter s ATTENTION A contactor or another device that frequently disconnects and reapplies the AC supply to the inverter in order to start and stop the motor may cause damage to the inverter power section The drive is designed to use control signals for starting and stopping the motor If used the input device must not exceed one operation every 6 minutes otherwise the inverter may be damaged ATTENTION Set jumper to select the rated line voltage 380 480 V for inverters 86 A or higher Refer to item 3 2 3 NOTE The AC input voltage must be compatible with the inverter rated voltage Supply line capacity The CFW 09
220. ble for the connection between inverter and DB resistor Provide physical separation between this cable and the signal and control cables When the DB resistor is mounted inside the panel consider the watt loss generated when the enclosure size and ventilation required are calculated DANGER Inverters must be grounded for safety purposes PE The earth or ground connection must comply with the local regulations For grounding use cables with cross section as indicated in table 3 5 Make the ground connection to a grounding bar or to the general grounding point resistance lt 10 ohms DANGER Do not share the ground wiring with other equipment that operates with high current for instance high voltage motors welding machines etc several inverters are used together refer to figure 3 10 Grounding bar Internal to the panel w ow ow c Figure 3 10 Grounding connections for more than one inverter 3 2 5 4 Networks CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION ATTENTION Do not use the neutral from the main power supply to ground the inverter EMI When electromagnetic interference EMI generated by the inverter causes problems with other equipment use shielded wires or install the motor wires in metallic conduits Connect o
221. can be operated with 2 input phases only single phase operation without output current derating 7 Rated input current for three phase operation This is a conservative value In practice the value of this current depends on the line impedance Please refer to table 9 2 131 121 106 99 96 96 Table 9 2 X Line impedance drop 2 rated inverter output current of the rated outout current input rms 8 Loss considering rated work conditions rated output current and rated switching frequency 342 9 2 ELECTRONICS GENERAL DATA CONTROL PERFORMANCE Vector Mode INPUTS CC9 Board OUTPUTS CC9 Board SAFETY METHOD OUTPUT FREQUENCY SPEED CONTROL TORQUE CONTROL ANALOG DIGITAL ANALOG RELAY PROTECTION K K 4 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Source V F Scalar or Vector Control with Encoder Feedback or Sensorless Vector Control without Encoder PWM SVM Space Vector Modulation Current Flux and Speed Digital Regulators Scan Time Current Regulators 0 2 ms 5 kHz Flux Regulator 0 4 ms 2 5 kHz Speed Regulator Speed Measurement 1 2 ms to 3 4 x motor rated frequency P403 This rated frequency can be set from 0 Hz to 300 Hz in Scalar and VVW Mode from 30 Hz to 120 Hz in Vector Mode VVW Regulation 1 of Base Speed Speed Range 1 30 Sensorless Regulat
222. ccess control Reading Telegram This telegram allows the master receive from the inverter the content corresponding to the inquiry code In the answer telegram the inverter transmits the data requested by the master 1 Master AL Le ______ LCS 2 Inverter we T Te ee CODE VAL Hexadecimal Format of the reading telegram EOT control character of End of Transmission ADR inverter address ASCII A B C to ADdRess CODE address of the 5 digit variable coded in ASCII ENQ control character ENQuiry enquiry Format of the inverter answer telegram ADR 1 character inverter address STX control character Start of Text TEXT consists in CODE address of the variable separation of character VAL 4 digits value HEXADECIMAL ETX control character End of TeXt BCC CheCksum Byte EXCLUSIVE OR of all the bytes between STX excluded and ET X included NOTE In some cases there can be an inverter answer with refer to item 8 13 3 5 304 1 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Writing Telegram This telegram sends data to the inverters variables The inverter answers by indicating if the data have been accepted or not 2 Inverter 8 13 35 Execution and Telegram Test Format of the writing telegram EOT control character of End Of Transmission ADR inverter address STX contro
223. celerates down to 0 rpm The last frequency reference value the 4 and keys is saved If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter change parameter P121 Keypad Reference OBSERVATIONS 1 If the rotation direction of the motor is not correct switch off the inverter Wait 10 minutes to allow a complete discharge of the capacitors and then swap any two wires at the motor output 2 If the acceleration current becomes too high specially at low frequencies 15 Hz adjust the Torque Boost at P136 Increase decrease the content of P136 gradually until you obtain an operation with constant current over the entire frequency range Refer to P136 in chapter 6 3 If 201 fault occurs during deceleration increase the deceleration time at P101 P103 101 CHAPTER 5 START UP 5 3 2 Typeof Control Sensorless or Vector with Encoder Operation Via Keypad HMI ACTION Power up the inverter Press the Cros key Press the keys or until POOO is reached Gros Press the PROS key to enter the programming mode 102 For the majority of the applications the Sensorless Vector Control is recommended This mode permits an operation over a 100 1 speed range a speed control accuracy of 0 5 Refer to P412 chapter 6 high torque and fast dynamic response Another advantage of this type of control is a higher immunity to sudden AC input voltage variati
224. ces the gaskets lifetime It is recommended to do this no more than 20 times If problems are detected on the gaskets we recommend changing the failed gasket immediately Certify that the door gasket Is on its correct position at the moment you will close the inverter Certify that the door screw gaskets are perfect on the moment you are ready to close the inverter All these recommendations are very important to become a successful installation 8 16 5 8 17 8 18 A How to Specify CFW 09 SUPPLIED BY THE DC LINK LINE HD CFW 09 RB REGENERATIVE CONVERTER CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES NOTE Do not remove the gaskets inside the cable glands which were not used They are necessary to guarantee NEMA 4X protection To specify a NEMA 4X inverter it is necessary to include the term 4 in the field Enclosure Degree of Protection according to the CFW 09 specification in chapter 2 item 2 4 CFW 09 Identification Remember that the NEMA 4X line is only up to 10 hp The CFW 09HD inverter line supplied by DC Link has the same installation mechanical programming and performance characteristics as the Standard CFW 09 line Up to size 5 an HD inverter is required to make the supply through the DC Link In this case is sufficient to supply a standard inverter through the DC Link with an external pre charge circuit The models of size 6 and larger are fitted with an internal pre charge circu
225. col Reference Guide Rev J MODICON June 1996 2 MODBUS Application Protocol Specification MODBUS ORG may 8 2002 In these documents are defined the format of the messages used by these elements that are part of the Modbus network the services or functions that can be made available via network and also how these elements exchange the data on the network 8 14 1 1 Transmission Modes Two transmission modes are defined in the protocol definition ASCII and RTU The transmission modes define the form how the message bytes are transmitted It is not permitted to use the two transmission modes on the same network In the RTU mode each transmitted word has one start bit eight data bits 1 parity bit optional and 1 stop bit 2 stop bits if no parity bit is used Thus the bit sequence for the transmission of 1 byte is as follows In the RTU mode each transmitted word has 1 start bit eight data bits 1 parity bit optional and 1 stop bit 2 stop bits if parity bit is not used Thus the bit sequence for the transmission is as follows 8 14 1 2 Message Structure The Modbus RTU network operates in Master Slave system and it can consist in RTU Mode of up to 247 slaves but only one Master The master always initiates the communication with a question to a slave and the slave answers the question Both messages question and answer have the same structure Address Function Code and CRC Depending on what is being requested only the data f
226. connect the equipment frame to a suitable ground PE point ATTENTION Electronic boards have components sensitive to electrostatic discharges Never touch the components or connectors directly If this is unavoidable first touch the metallic frame or use a suitable ground strap Never apply a high voltage test on the inverter If this is necessary contact WEG To avoid operation problems caused by harsh ambient conditions such as high temperature moisture dirt vibration or premature aging of the components periodic inspections of the inverter and installations are recommended PROBLEMS CORRECTIVEACTIONS Loose screws Tighten them Loose connectors Blowers are dirty Clean them Abnormal acoustic noise Replace the blower Blower is not running Abnormal vibration Dust in the air filters Clean or replace them Dust oil or moisture accumulation Clean them Smell Replace them Dust oil or moisture accumulation etc Clean them Connection screws are loose Tighten them Discoloration smell electrolyte leakage Replace them Safety valve is expanded or broken Deformation Discoloration Replace it Smell Table 7 3 Periodic inspections after start up 235 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 7 4 1 Cleaning Instructions 236 Notes 1 It is recommended to replace the blowers after each 40 000 hours of operation 2 Check the capacitors every six months It is recommended to replace them after five years
227. ction Isolated analog input on the optional board EBB Refer to chapter 8 Range Factory Setting Unit 100 0 to 4100 0 0 0 0 1 96 0 to 3 0 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes When a current signal is used at the Analog Input 2 set the switch 51 1 on the control board to ON Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference Refer to P234 P241 Input AI3 Function 0 P221 P222 After Ramp Reference Maximum Torque Current PID Process Variable Maximum Torque Current AI3 Al2 N Table 6 37 AI3 function When the option 0 P221 P222 is selected may supply the speed reference if set to do so at P221 P222 which is subject to the speed limits P133 P134 and the acceleration deceleration ramps P100 to P103 Refer to figure 6 26 The option 1 After Ramp Reference valid only for P202 3 and 4 is generally used as an additional reference signal for instance in applications with a dancer Refer to figure 6 25 It bypasses the accel decel ramp The option 2 Maximum Torque Current permits controlling the torque current limit P169 P170 through the analog input AI3 In this case P169 P170 will be Read only parameters Refer to figure 6 26 a For this type of control check if P160 should be equal to one or zero When Als is set to maximum P020 100 95 the torque
228. ctor 0 50 to 0 99 Enter the programming mode Motor Power Factor 0 68 Exit the programming mode 113 CHAPTER 5 START UP ACTION N Press the key to to the next parameter Press the to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to select the Motor Rated Efficiency Press the R06 key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the PROG key to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to select the motor ventilation type Press the Pros key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode 114 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Motor Rated Efficiency 50 0 to 99 Enter the programming mode Motor Rated Efficiency 67 0 96 Exit the programming mode Motor Ventilation Type Selection 0 Self Ventilated 1 Separate Ventilation 2 Optimal Flux 3 Increased Protection Enter the programming mode Selected Motor Ventilation Type 0 Self Ventilated Exit the programming mode ACTION Press the key to to the next parameter Press the Pros key to enter the programming mode Use the keys to select the desired Self tuning mode Press the Gros key to start the self tuning routine Note Display shows P409 to P413 during the Self Tuning routine Messages and values of the estimated parameters
229. cy For the case in figure 6 15 the motor efficiency at full load condition is 84 96 0 84 that results in TB1 0 19 or 19 of the motor rated torque Starting at TB1 point the braking torque varies in the reverse proportion of the speed 1 N At low speeds the braking torque reaches the torque limit level set by the inverter For the case of figure 6 15 the torque limit 100 96 is reached when the speed is 20 96 of the rated speed CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes The braking torque indicated in figure 6 15 can be increased by increasing the inverter torque limit P169 maximum forward torque current or P170 maximum reverse torque current general smaller motors have lower efficiency higher losses consequently Optimal Braking can achieve higher braking torques with smaller motors Examples 0 75 kW 1 hp IV poles 0 76 that results in TB1 0 32 15 kW 20 hp IV poles n 0 86 that results in TB1 0 16 1 0 TB1 _ Speed PU 0 0 2 1 0 2 0 Figure 6 15 T x rpm curve for optimal braking and typical 10 hp 7 5 kW motor ariven by an inverter with torque limitation set for a value equal to the rated motor torque a Torque generated by the motor in normal operation driven by inverter in motor mode 0 Braking torque generated by Optimal Braking c Braking torque generated with DC Injection Braking NOTE The en
230. d The end content of the CRC variable is the value of the CRC field that is transmitted at the end of the message The least significant part is transmitted first CRC only then the most significant part CRC is transmitted 315 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 14 2 Operation of the CFW 09 inthe Modbus RTU Network 8 14 2 1 Interface RS 232 and RS 485 Description 316 Times between Messages In the RTU mode there is no specific character that indicates the beginning or the end of a message Thus the only indication for the beginning or the end of a new message is the data transmission absence in the network by 3 5 times the time required for transmission of one data word 11 bits Thus if a message is initiated after elapsing of the minimum time required without transmission the network elements assume that the received character represents the beginning of a new message In similar mode after this time has elapsed the network elements will assume that the message has been ended If during the transmission of a message the time between the bytes is longer than this minimum required time the message will be considered invalid since the inverter will discard the already received bytes and will mount a new message with the bytes that are being transmitted The table below shows the time for three different communication rates Signal Tas eem bytes Tas JR DM MI Message Figure 8 52
231. d divided by 10 M This value remains stored even when the inverter is turned OFF Example Indication of 22 hours powered Indicates the total number of hours that the inverter has run Indicates up to 6553 5 hours rolls over to 0000 If P204 is set to 3 the P043 is reset to zero This value remains stored even when inverter is turned OFF Parameter P044 kWh Counter 060 Fifth Error Occurred P061 Sixth Error Occurred P062 Seventh Error Occurred P063 Eighth Error Occurred P064 Ninth Error Occurred P065 Tenth Error Occurred P070 Current and Motor Speed P071 Command Word P072 Fieldbus Speed Heference Range Factory Setting Unit 0 to 65535 iE 1 kWh 0 to 71 pd 0 to 71 1 0 to 71 Ea 0 to 71 1 to 71 0 to 71 0102600 0 1 lt 100 1 gt 99 9 0 to P134 1 rpm LCD 0 to 65535 LED 0 to FFFFh LCD 0 to 65535 LED 0 to FFFFh CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Indicates the energy consumed by the motor Indicates up to 65535 kWh then it returns to zero If P204 is set to 4 the 044 is reset to Zero This value remains stored even when inverter is turned OFF Indicates the numbers of the fifth sixth seventh eighth ninth and tenth occurred error respectively Record Systematic P014 15 P016 P017 P060 P061 P062 gt P063 P064 P065
232. d on the LED display LCD display indicates the fault code and description The ERROR LED flashes CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Indication of the inverter status LEDs 7 2 TROUBLESHOOTING POINT TO BE PROBLEM CHECKED Motor does not run Incorrect Wiring Analog Reference if used Incorrect Programming Fault Motor Stall LED LED Power Error XE Description Inverter is powered up and is ready A fault has been detected The FAULT LED flashes indicating the number of the Fault Code Example nnt nnm 2 75 15 Note If the fault 00 occurs the ERROR LED is ON continuously 19 XE CORRECTIVEACTION 1 Check the power and control connections For example the digital inputs DIX programmed for Start Stop General Enable and No External Fault must be connected to 24 V For factory default programming XC1 1 DI1 must be connected to 24 V XC1 9 and XC1 10 connected to XC1 8 1 Check if the external signal is properly connected 2 Check the status of the speed potentiometer if used 1 Check if the parameters are properly programmed for the application 1 Check if the inverter is not disabled due to a Fault condition Refer to table 7 1 2 Check if there is a short circuit between terminals XC1 9 and XC1 10 short circuit at 24 Vdc power supply 1 Reduce the motor load 2 Increase P169 P170 or P136 P137 Table 7 2 Troubleshooting 233
233. ds EBC and New model CFW 09 SHARK NEMA 4 56 New models for voltages currents and powers Models 500 600 V Inclusion of the items 8 14 Modbus RTU 8 17 CFW 09 Supplied by the DC Link Line HD 8 18 CFW 09 RB Regenerative Converter Inclusion of new functions Overcurrent Protection Default factory reset 50 Hz Timer Relay Ramp Holding PID Regulator to Academic Changing General revision and update of the software version 2 6X to 3 1X Change on the maximum value of P156 and P401 for some models Change on the maximum value of P331 Change on the factory default value of P404 New functions Incorporation of the Mechanical Brake Logic for cranes Load Detection Logic and addition of option Indication of Torque Current Polarity at the DOx and RLx outputs VVW Control DC Braking for VVW and Sensorless Flying Start function for the Sensorless Control support for EtherNet IP communication board read write function for the PLC board parameters through Modbus Indication of the Analog Outputs values in read only parameters P027 to P030 Simultaneous indication of the speed and current in parameter P070 P313 4 Changes to LOCAL mode keeping the commands Regulation of the maximum torque current through options 12 and Al2 Al3 function F gt Fx function ready 2 Updating of the software version to V4 0X Updating of the parameters P309 and P313 Addition of new parameters P335 P336 P337 P338
234. e Electronic circuit isolated from the encoder frame Recommended number of pulse per revolution 1024 INSTALLATION OF THE EBC BOARD The EBC board is installed directly on the control board CC9 fixed by means of spacers and connected through the XC3 connector NOTE For installation in the models of size 1 remove the lateral plastic cover of the product Mounting instructions 1 Insert carefully the pins of the connector EBC1 into the female connector XC3 of the control board CC9 Check if all pins of the connector XC3 fit exactly 2 Press on the board center near to XC3 until the connector is inserted completely 3 Fix the board to the 2 metallic spacers by means of the 2 bolts i ots al 9 F Dooogdo00006006 e 1 io g gt cre D Figure 8 9 EBC board layout BOARD 9 BOARD mn rennin 188 99 SPACER TIED c M3 x 8 Screw PIBSSSSSSSSS BESS 1Nm Torque Figure 8 10 board installa
235. e 7 107 147 211 247 Model Current Voltage 500 690 500 690 500 690 500 690 Load CTNT Power kVA 107 314 Rated Output Current A 107 315 Maximum Output Current A 160 370 5 Rated Input Current 315 Rated Switching Frequency kHz 2 5 Maximum Motor hp kW 9 100 75 300 220 Watts Loss kW 3 6 Frame Size 10E 315 343 418 472 Model Current Voltage 500 690 500 690 500 690 500 690 Load Power 553 Rated Output Current A 555 Maximum Output Current 708 Rated Input Current A 555 Rated Switching Frequency kHz 25 25 25 25 25 2 5 Maximum Motor hp kW 600 450 Wats Loss AW 9 s ss s2 2 n 123 Frame Size 10E Note CT Constant Torque VT Variable Torque Factory Default 339 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 9 1 5 660 690 V Power Supply Model Current Voltage Load Power kVA Rated Output Current 100 127 179 225 660 690 660 690 660 690 660 690 EM _ v 152 214 269 310 127 179 225 259 d Maximum Output Current 150 190 5 268 5 337 5 Rated Input Current 127 179 225 259 Rated Switching Frequency kHz 25 25 5 25 25 200 150 Maximum Motor hp kW 9 00 75 150 110 150 110 200 150 200 150 250 185 300 220 P Watts Loss kW
236. e CFW 09 is powered up the output set to the option 32 Overweight is activated In order to deactivate the output i e detect the overweight condition the following conditions shall be satisfied P361 1 Load Detection On Parameters P362 P363 and P367 properly set P367 Overweight Level lower than the output current P367 Is during the stabilization time If P361 0 Load Detection Off the output always remains activated Slack Cable Situation where the lifted load weight is lower than the minimum weight detected by the crane When the CFW 09 is powered up the output set to the option 33 Slack Cable is activated In order to deactivate the output i e detect the slack cable condition the following conditions shall be satisfied P361 1 Load Detection On Parameters P362 P363 P364 and P365 properly set Slack cable condition detected 182 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes NOTES If the slack cable condition is detected during the stabilization time the motor remains at the stabilization speed until receiving a Stop command However if this condition is detected outside of the stabilization time the output set to this option will be deactivated and the motor will maintain the same speed The only way of disabling the Slack Cable function is stopping the motor To
237. e DPRAM test Color LED Status Red Fault during the test of the ASIC and Flash ROM Green Board has not been initialized Green Board has been initialized and is operating ocu Table 8 16 Signaling LED of Fieldbus board status NOTE The red fault indications mean hardware problems of the electronic board The reset is realized by switching OFF ON the inverter If the problem persists replace the electronic board The electronic board is also fitted with four other bicolor LEDs placed at the right bottom side indicating the Fieldbus status according to the figure below CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Acyclic Traffic TR Fieldbus Diagnostics Off line Figure 8 40 LEDs indicating the status of the Profibus DP network LED Color Function Indicates certain faults at the Fieldbus Flashing at 1 Hz Configuration error the IN OUT area size programmed at the board initialization is different from the size programmed during the network configuration Flashing at 2 Hz User parameter data error the size contents of the user parameter data programmed at the board initialization are different from the size contents programmed during the network configuration Flashing 4 Hz Enabling error of the Profibus Communication ASIC OFF no problems Fieldbus Diagnostics Indicates that the board is On line at the Fieldbus ON the board is off line and the data exchange is not possible
238. e User Default 2 P205 Display Default Selection 0 P005 Motor Frequency 2 P002 1 P003 Motor Current 2 P002 Motor Speed 3 P007 Motor Voltage 4 006 Inverter Status 5 P009 Motor Torque 6 P070 Motor Speed and Motor Current 7 P040 PID Process Variable P206 Auto Reset Time 0 to 255 o s P207 Reference Engineering Unit 1 32 to 127 ASCII 114 150 A B Vek ds 29 96 BS P208 2 11 Reference Scale Factor 1 to P 1800 1500 150 P209 Motor Phase Loss Detection 0 Off 0 Off ILLI 151 1 210 Decimal Point of the Speed Indication 151 P2110 Zero Speed Disable 0 Off 151 212 Condition to Leave Zero 0 or N gt P291 0 N or N gt P291 152 Speed Disable 1 N gt P291 P213 Time Delay for Zero Speed Disable 0 to 999 0 cx Lo P214 9 Line Phase Loss Detection 0 Off 152 1 P215 0 Keypad Copy Function 0 Off 0 Off 152 1 Inverter Keypad 2 Keypad gt Inverter 216 Reference Engineering Unit 2 32 to 127 ASCII 112 154 A B Y Z 0 ELS 217 Reference Engineering Unit 3 32 to 127 ACSII 1092m 154 AB uc Z 29 218 LCD Display Contrast 0 to 150 154 Adjustment Local Remote Definition P220 9 Local Remote Selection Source 0 Always Local 2 Keypad 154 1 Always Remote Default Local 2 Keypad Default Local 3 K
239. e information about the Analog Output refer to chapter 8 169 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit P256 0 000 to 9 999 Analog Output AO3 1 000 Gain 0 001 P257 010 63 Analog Output AO4 5 Function Located on the Optional I O Expansion Board EBA P258 0 000 to 9 999 Analog Output AO4 1 000 Gain 0 001 170 Description Notes Adjusts the gain of the AO3 analog output for P256 1 000 the output value is set according to the description after figure 6 31 Check possible options on table 6 40 For factory default values P257 5 and P258 1 000 4 10 V when the output current is equal to 1 5 x P295 For more information about the AO4 output refer to chapter 8 P251 P253 257 did 1 AO2 4 Torque Reference 3 P202 3 or 4 Vector Torque Current 4 P202 2 3 or 4 Vector Output Current 5 with filter 0 3 s PID Process Variable a 6 Active Current P202 2 0 1 2 0r 5 7 with filter 0 1 5 Power kW 8 with filter 0 5 22 Torque Positive 202 3 10 or 4 vector i Motor Torque PLC Dead Zone for Speed 13 Indication WEG Use 15063 15 to 63 Motor Voltage 14 Table 6 40 Functions of analog outputs Adjusts the gain of the AO4 analog output for P258 1 000 the 4 output value is set according to the description after figure 6 31 Parameter P259 Dead
240. e inver ter electronics therefore the maximum recommended serial cable length 15 10 30 ft To implement the serial communication an RS 232 SERIAL INTERFACE module has to be added to the CFW 09 This module is installed in place of the Keypad making the RS 232 connection RJ11 connector available If the use of the HMI is also required the RS 232 module also provides its connection 262 8 7 LINE REACTOR DC BUS CHOKE CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 229 g SERIAL INTERFACE RS 232 Figure 8 18 RS 232 module The RS 232 PC Communication Kit which allows the connection of the CFW 09 toa PC via the RS 232 interface is composed of RS 232 Serial Interface Module 3m 108 Cable for RJ 11 to DB9 connection SuperDrive Software for Windows for CFW 09 programming operation and monitoring Refer to hardware and system needs for SuperDrive To install the RS 232 PC communication kit proceed as follows Remove the keypad from the inverter Install RS 232 Serial Interface Module in place of the keypad Install the SuperDrive software in the PC Consult the on line help or installation guide Use the cable to connect the inverter to the PC M Follow the SuperDrive software instructions Consult the on line help or installation guide Due to the input circuit characteristic common to all passive front end inverters available in the market which consists of a s
241. e inverter will be delivered with settings according to the market considering the HMI language V F 50 Hz or 60 Hz and the required voltage The reset of the standard factory setting may change the parameters related to the frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Values within parenthesis mean the factory setting for 50 Hz 12 The maximum value of P156 and P401 is 1 8 x P295 for model 4 2 A 500 600 V and 1 6 x P295 for models 7 Aand 54 A 220 230 V 2 9 7 500 600 V 107A 147 and 247 A 500 690 V 100 A 127 A and 340 A 660 690 V 32 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Parameters that Condition where it occurs Parameters that are affected During the Durin args and modified automatically ee OT when set start up operation P203 P220 P222 P223 P224 P225 NO YES P226 P227 P228 P237 P263 P264 P265 P279 P313 mn P295 P156 P157 P158 P169 V F YES P290 P365 P366 P367 P296 YES NO P320 YES B5 NO NO P402 P122 P123 P124 P125 P126 YES YES P127 P128 P129 P130 P131 133 134 135 208 288 289 403 404 YES P406 NO Table 1 Interdependence among parameters parameters that change the settings of others when modified versus parameters that are automatically modified as a function of a parameter setting during start up and or normal operation E34 Long period at torque limitation 230 E41 Self Diagnosis Fault 230 E70 Internal DC Supply Undervoltage 231 E71 PLC Watchdog E
242. e of P162 varies according to the value of P161 In case it is needed to increase more these gains set them directly at P161 and P162 Note Values of P161 12 0 may cause oscillations in the torque current iq and in the speed Vector with Encoder Control P202 z 4 The value of P413 is estimated by the self tuning routine when P408 3 or 4 In case it is not possible to estimate it the setting shall be performed manually Refer to P161 P162 219 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 65 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS PARAMETERS P500 to P699 6 5 1 PID Regulator 6 5 2 Description 220 The CFW 09 is fitted with the PID regulator that be used for closed loop process control This function acts as a proportional integral and derivative regulator superimposed on the normal inverter speed control The speed will be changed in order to maintain the process variable the variable that should be controlled for instance water level of a container at the desired value set in the setpoint This regulator can control for example the flow in a piping system through the flow feedback to the analog input AI2 or AI3 selected via P524 and the flow reference set at P221 or P222 when the inverter drives the motor of a pump that circulates the fluid through this piping system Other application examples level control temperature control dosing control etc The function of the PID regulator i
243. e same The transfer rate is 9600 bits s following an exchange protocol question answer type by using ASCII characters The master is able to realize the following operations related to each inverter IDENTIFICATION network number inverter type software version CONTROL general enabling disabling enabling disabling by ramp direction of rotation speed reference local remote JOG error RESET E ES IS ESL ES ESI STATUS RECOGNITION ready Sub run local remote fault JOG direction of rotation setting mode after Reset to Factory Setting setting mode after changing the Scalar Control Mode to Vector Mode self tuning NHANNANANARARAN 8 13 2 Interfaces Description 8 13 2 1 RS 485 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES PARAMETERS READING CHANGE OF PARAMETERS Typical examples of network use PC master for parameterization of one or several inverters at the same time SDCD monitoring inverter variables PLC controlling the operation of an inverter in an industrial process The physical connection between the inverters and the network master is performed according to one of the standards below a RS 232 point to point up to 10 m b RS 485 multipoint galvanic isolation up to 1000 m This interface allows the connection of up to 30 inverters to a master PC PLC etc attributing to each inverter an address 1 to 30 that must be set
244. e stator resistance that can be obtained from the self tuning routine and the motor nameplate data to automatically estimate the torque value the output compensation voltage value and consequently the slip compensation value which substitute the function of parameters P137 and P138 109 CHAPTER 5 START UP Power up the inverter Press the 06 Press the keys until Po00 is reached Press the roc key to enter the programming mode Use the keys eo to set the password value Press the key PROG to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the keys or until P202 is reached Press the PROG programming mode 110 In order to get a good steady state speed regulation the slip frequency is calculated from the estimated load torque value which uses the motor nameplate data The following sequence is valid for Connection 1 refer to item 3 2 7 The inver ter should have been already installed and powered up according to instructions in chapter 3 and item 5 2 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Inverter is ready to be operated Enables the access to change parameters content With the factory default programming P200 1 Password Active must be set to 5 to allow parameters changes Enter the programming mode Password value factory default 5 Exit the programming mode Type of Control Sel
245. e the programmed relay it is Time for RL3 ON 0 0 required that the DIx remains in on off status during the time set at 0 1 2 parameters P283 P285 284 286 Otherwise the relay will be reset i Refer to figure 6 34 P286 0 0 to 300 Note For this function program P279 and or P280 28 Timer Time for RL3 OFF 0 0 015 186 N gt Nx Motor Speed Relay Transistor Output OFF ON Relay Transistor Output OFF OFF e N gt Nx Relay Transistor Output OFF OFF g Torque gt Tx Motor Torque 009 Relay OFF Transistor Output CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION OFF d Is gt Ix Relay Transistor Output OFF OFF f Is lt Ix Relay Transistor Output h Torque lt Tx Motor Torque 009 ci Relay Transistor Output OFF Figure 6 39 a to h Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions 187 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION i Enabled Hours gt Nx f 6553 5 h Hx P294 Hours Enable Relay Transistor k External Fault Ready Run State Fault Exy State c EOX Relay Transistor Output ON OFF m N 0 Zero Speed Zone wA Relay Transistor Output OFF OFF Pre charge Ok Link CC e NT Pre Charge Level Relay Transistor Output ON OFF ON
246. e transition is effected from 0 V to 24 V the relay will be enabled according to the time set at P283 RL2 or P285 RL3 When the transition from 24 V to 0 V occurs the programmed relay will be disabled according to the time set at P284 RL2 or P286 RL3 After the DIx transition to enable or disable the programmed relay it is required that the DIx remains in on off status during the time set at parameters P283 P285 and P284 P286 Otherwise the relay will be reset Refer to figure 6 36 Note For this function program P279 and or P280 28 Timer 24 V pe LIH ON RL2 OFF RL3 P283 P284 P283 P284 P285 P286 P285 P286 Figure 6 36 Operation of the function of the timers RL2 and RL3 Multispeed The selection of P266 and or P267 and or P268 7 requires that P221 and or P222 8 Refer to parameters P124 to 131 START STOP Accel Ramp Decel Ramp Motor Speed 124 V DI Open Time Note All digital inputs set to general enable must be on in order that the inverter operates as shown above c NO EXTERNAL FAULT Motor Speed Motor Coasts to Stop Time 24 V 2 24 V Start Stop Open Dix Time 124 V Ramp 2 Dix Open Time P102 P403 gt 100 101 Motor Speed Time CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION b GENERAL ENABLE Accel Ramp Motor Coasts to Stop 24
247. eck all motor connections and verify if its voltage current and frequency match the inverter specifications Check if the selected inverter AC power is correct refer to item 3 2 3 NOTES Operation in mode When the motor data is set properly during the first power up routine the inverter automatically sets the additional parameters used for the correct operation under this control mode 5 Uncouple the load from the motor If the motor cannot be uncoupled make sure that the direction of rotation FWD REV cannot cause damage to the machine 6 Close the inverter cover or cabinet doors After the inverter has been checked AC power can be applied 1 Check the supply voltage Measure the line voltage and check if it is within the specified range refer to item 9 1 2 Power up the AC input Close the input circuit breaker or disconnect switch 3 Check if the power up has been successful When the inverter is powered up for the first time or when the factory default parameter values are loaded P204 5 a start up sub routine is run This sub routine requests the user to program some basic parameters to ensure proper operation and motor protection A start up programming example is shown below Inverter Motor Line CFW 09 WEG IP55 Rated Current 9A Power 5 hp Rated Voltage 380 V to 480 V rom 1730 4 POLE Model CFW090009T3848ESZ Rated Current 7 9A Cooling Self ventilated Rated Voltage 460 V Frequency
248. ecrease FWD REV JOG Local Remote and Program LCD display 2 lines x 16 characters LED display 4 digits with 7 segments LEDs for FWD REV and LOC REM indication Display Accuracy Current 5 of Rated Current Speed Resolution 1 rpm 5 K Remote mounting possibility cables available up to 10 m 30 ft NEMA 1 1 20 3 6 Ato 240 A 380 480 V models and all 220 230 V and 500 600 V DEGREE OF models and 107 A to 211 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 179 A 660 690 V PROTECTION Protected chassis IP20 361 A to 600 A 380 480 V models 247 A to 472 A 500 CHASSIS IP20 690 V and 225 A to 428 A 660 690 V 1 Available in models gt 30 A 220 230 V or gt 30 A 380 480 V gt 22 A 500 600 V for all 500 690 V and 660 690 V models 9 2 1 Applicable Standards 344 GENERAL MECHANICAL HAAN E AN A AA I RI UL508C Power conversion equipment 01840 Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for electrical equipment EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EN60204 1 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance the final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device EN60146 IEC 146 Semiconductor convertors EN61800 2 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 2 General requirements
249. ection 0 60 Hz 1 V F 50 Hz 2 V F Adjustable 3 Sensorless Vector 4 Vector with Encoder 5 VVW key to enter the Enter the programming mode ACTION Use the and keys to select the type of control VVW Press the key 2706 to save the selected option and start the tuning routine after changing to VVW Control Mode Pros Press the key and use the N keys to set the correct motor rated voltage value Press the PROS key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the key to to the next parameter Press the 806 to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated current value Press the ros key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION selected Type of Control 5 VVW Motor Rated Voltage Range 0 to 690 V Programmed Motor Rated Voltage 460 V Exit the programming mode Motor Rated Current Range 0 0 to 1 30 x P295 Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated Current 7 9A Exit the programming mode 111 CHAPTER 5 START UP Press the next Press the to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated frequency value Press the no key to save the programm
250. ed value and exit the programming mode N Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the PROG key to enter the programming mode Use the and 7 10 set the correct motor rated rom value Gros Press the PROG key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode 112 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY key to go to the DESCRIPTION Motor Rated Frequency Range 0 to 300 Hz Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated Frequency 60 Hz Exit the programming mode Motor Rated rom Range to 18000 rpm Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated rpm 1730 rpm Exit the programming mode N Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the PROP key to enter the programming mode Use the 2 keys to select the motor rated power Press the PROG key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode N Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the PROG 27 key to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to select the Motor Rated Power Factor Gros Press the PROG key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION Motor Rated hp Range 1 to 1600 0 CV 1 to 1190 0 kW Enter the programming mode Selected Motor Rated Power 5 0 CV 3 7 KW Exit the programming mode Motor Rated Power Fa
251. elay when only N gt Nx condition is not satisfied that is independent of Nt gt Nx condition Timer These times enable and disable the relays 2 and 3 refer P283 to P286 Brake Vel Real Speed uses the Real Speed in the comparison of N gt Nx to activate the brake Note Nx is programmable at P288 Brake Ref Total Speed Reference Uses the total speed reference in the comparison of N t gt Nx Note Nx programmable in P288 181 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes NOTE For further details refer to figures 6 39 and s Programming 203 2 some parameters that are used in the brake logic function will be automatically changed See description of parameter P203 Only one of the options Brake Vel or Brake Ref must be programmed in the digital or relay outputs For further details contact WEG Preliminary settings Nx P288 7 to 10 of the motor speed Sensorless Control 2 96 to 5 96 of the speed Vector with Encoder Control Ix P290 20 96 to 130 96 of P401 P355 0 seconds P354 1 5 x time to activate the brake P356 0 85 x time to release the brake P353 0 2 seconds NOTE These preliminary settings are suggestive and may be changed according to the application Overweight Situation where the lifted load weight is greater than the maximum allowed When th
252. en two variable transmissions to the same inverter a waiting time that is compatible with the used inverter 8 13 3 6 Telegram Sequence In the inverters the telegrams are processed in determined time intervals Therefore a pause larger than the sum of the times Ta cit should C be guaranteed between two telegrams addressed to the same inverter refer to item 8 13 6 8 13 3 7 Variable Code The field designated with CODE contains the parameter address and the basic variables formed by 5 digits ASCII characters as follows CODE Number of the basic variable Equipment number 8 CFW 09 9 any inverter Specifier 0 basic variables 1 P000 to P099 2 P100 to P199 3 P200 to P299 4 P300 to P399 5 P400 to P499 6 P500 to P599 7 P600 to P699 Equal to zero 0 8 13 4 Telegram Examples Change of the minimum speed P133 to 600 rpm in the inverter 7 1 Master 4 0 NMIN 600 258H Address 7 2 Inverter 306 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Reading of output current from the inverter at address 10 Supposing that the same was at 7 8 A at the moment of the enquiry 1 Master Code P003 addr 10 2 Inverter Tr Te ev ev 4 Code P003 P003 4EH 7 8A addr 10 A NOTE Values sent and received via ser
253. ensates for the 0 1 96 speed drop as the load increases P138 allows the userto setthe VSD for more accurate slip compensation Once set up P138 will compensate for speed variations due to load by automatically adjusting both voltage and frequency Total Reference aE Refer to figures 6 26 and 6 27b e9 Speed Active Slip Output m Compensation Current P139 P138 Figure 6 8 Block diagram P138 Parameter P139 Output Current Filter only for P202 0 1 or 2 for Control This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 0 1 2 Control or 5 VVW P140 Dwell Time at Start P141 Dwell Speed at Start This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 0 1 2 V F Control or 5 VVW CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes Output Voltage EE MS A Function 27 Xp to motor load Frequency Figure 6 9 V F curve with slip compensation To set Parameter 138 Run the motor without load up to approximately half of the application top speed Measure the actual motor or equipment speed Apply load Increase P138 until the speed reaches its no load value Values of P138 lt 0 0 are used in special applications where the reduction of the output speed is desired as function of the motor current increase Ex load sharing between two motor drive sets 0 0
254. er Sowa i020 P130 2 01 541511486 Power Board 1 HMI CFW09 LED KMR CFWOS 01 1 01 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBA1 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 01 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBB 04 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 0 1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBC1 03 SCH 00 Current Transformer 0307 2495 Current transformer 200 2 2 Only types specified with braking DB 238 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Models 380 480 V Type Amperes Name Specification Ses 30 Units per Inverter 500 5275 Fan 0400 3284 Length 190 60x60 1 1 1 _ 5000 5305 Fan2x04002428 150 110 60 60 ilil T 5000 5292 Fan 0400 3679 Length 165 mm 40x40 Jilli 5000 5283 Fan 2 0400 3681 135 175 mm 60 60 1 5000 5259 Fan 0400 3682 Length 140mm 80x80 2 O E CCS DUE 00 941512481 Driver and Power Supply 01 KMLCFWO ___ Kime J 4 00 541512369 Power Board 203400 1
255. er Unit Description Notes Speed 24 V Ti fi fl Te V Open Figure 6 2 Multispeed P132 to 100 When the effective overspeed exceeds the value of P134 P132 longer Maximum 10 than 20 ms the CFW 09 will disable the PWM pulses by E17 Overspeed Level 1 132 setting is a value percent of 134 When programmed P132 100 96 this function remains disabled P133 2 11 0 0 to P134 1 Define the maximum and minimum motor operation speed reference Minimum Speed 90 75 Are valid for any type of speed reference signal Reference 1 rpm For more details about the actuation of P133 refer to P233 Analog Inputs Dead Zone P134 2 11 P133 1 to 34 x 402 Maximum Speed 1800 1500 a Reference 1 rom Speed 133 Speed 10 V 10 Reference P133 134 127 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit P135 0 to 90 Speed Transition to 18 Control 1 rpm Jg This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 z 3 Sensorless Vector Control P136 0 to 9 Current Reference 1 for I F Mode 1 For Sensorless Vector Control P202 3 128 Description Notes b Speed Reference Figure 6 3 a and b Speed limits considering the Dead Zone active P233 1 The speed at which the transition from Sensorless Vector Control to
256. er of parameter to be read from the Variables Written in the Inverter The read values will have the same order as described in the product Manual or shown on the The values are read without decimal point when it is the case Examples a HMI displays 12 3 the read via Fieldbus will be 123 b HMI displays 0 246 the read via Fieldbus will be 246 There are some parameters which representation on the 5 segment display can suppress the decimal point when the values are higher than 99 9 These parameters are P100 P101 P102 P1083 P155 P156 P157 P158 P169 for P202 0 1 2 and 5 P290 and P401 Example Indication on the 7 segment display 130 Indication on the LCD display LCD 130 0 the read value via Fieldbus is 1300 The read of the Parameter via Fieldbus has the following meaning 0 ready 1 2 Undervoltage 3 with fault except E24 to E27 5 Torque Current This position indicates de POO9 Parameter content disregarding the decimal point lowpass filter with a time constant of 0 55 filters this variable 295 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 12 7 2 296 Variables Written in the Inverter 6 Motor Current This position indicates de Parameter content disregarding the decimal point A lowpass filter with a time constant of 0 3 s filters this variable The variables are written in the following order 1 Logical Control 2 Motor speed refere
257. erial interface standard RS 232 you must apply a level conversion module from RS 232 to RS 485 In this case we have the connection of a master to an inverter point to point Data can be changed in a bi directional way but not simultaneous HALF DUPLEX The logical levels meet STANDARD EIA RS 232C that determines the use of balanced signals In this case one wire is used for transmission TX one for reception RX and one for return 0 V This configuration is a three wire economy model Refer to item 8 6 This item describes the protocol used for serial communication Parameters are those existing in the inverters whose visualization or alteration is possible through the HMI interface Variables are values that have specific inverter functions and that can be read and in some cases modified by the master Basic variables are those that can be accessed only through the serial interface 8 13 3 2 Parameters Variables Resolution 8 13 3 3 Characters Format 8 13 3 4 Protocol CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM INVERTER BASIC SERIAL CONECTION VARIABLES PARAMETERS lt gt During the parameter reading changing the decimal point is disregarded in the values received with the telegram excepting the Basic Variables 04 Reference via Serial and 08 Motor Speed that are standardized in 13 bits 0 to 8191 For instance Writin
258. ers Aand B are not of the same model check the values of P295 Rated Current and P296 Rated Voltage of Inverter B If the inverters are driving different motors check the motor related parameters of Inverter B 8 To copy the parameters content of the Inverter A to other inverters repeat items 5 to 7 of this procedure 153 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P216 Reference Engineering Unit 2 P217 Reference Engineering Unit 3 P218 LCD Display Contrast Adjustment P220 4 LOCAL REMOTE Selection Source 154 Range Factory Setting Unit 32 10 127 112 p 32 10 127 109 m 0 to 150 127 01010 2 Description Notes INVERTER B INVERTER A Parameters Parameters IINV keypad i keypad INV P215 1 215 2 Press Press Keypad Keypad Figure 6 24 Copying the parameters from the Inverter A to the Inverter B While the Keypad runs the reading or writing procedures it cannot be operated These parameters are useful only for inverters provided with a keypad with LCD display The engineering unit of the speed reference is composed of three characters which will be displayed on the indication of the Speed Reference 001 and Motor Speed 002 P207 defines the left character P216 the center character and P217 the right character For more details refer to Parameter P207 This parameter is usefu
259. es Motor ei Push button Starter m Clusler a E Tr p 122 Device II Bar Code Configuration Input Output Lid Scanner Devices Motor Controller Inverter Figure 8 41 DeviceNet network Fieldbus connector of user of the inverter Connector 5 ways connector of type plug in with screwed terminal screw terminal Pin Pin Color Black 2 Blue 4 5 White Red Table 8 18 Connection of the pins to the DeviceNet CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Line Termination To avoid reflection the initial and the end points of the network must be terminated with the characteristic impedance Thus a 120 ohms 0 5W resistor must be connected between the pins 2 and 4 of the Fieldbus connector Baud Rate Node Address There are three different baud rates for the DeviceNet 125 kbits s 250 kbits s or 500 kbits s Choose one of these baud rates by setting the DIP switches on the electronic board The node address is selected through the six DIP switches on the electronic board permitting an addressing from 0 63 addresses Baud Rate bits s DIPs 1 and 2 Address DIP 3to DIP8 125k 00 0 000000 250 01 1 000001 500 k 10 2 000010 Reserved 11 61 111101 62 111110 Baud Rate Address 63 111111 123 4 5 6 78 Figure 8 42 Baud rate configuration an addressing to the DeviceNet Configuration File EDS File Each element of a DeviceNet network i
260. eset can be made as follows Disconnecting and reapplying AC power power on reset By pressing the key 0 manual reset Automatic reset through P206 auto reset By digital input 12 P265 to P270 By Serial interface By Fieldbus interface The table below defines each Fault Code explains how to reset the fault and shows the possible causes for each Fault Code FAULT RESET POSSIBLE CAUSES 00 Short circuit between two motor phases Output Manual reset Key 0 Short circuit between braking resistor cables Overcurrent Auto reset Dix Digital Input V Serial Fieldbus 201 Overvoltage Ud E02 Undervoltage Ud 228 When the output current reaches 2 x P295 caused by very high load inertia acceleration ramp too fast or incorrect regulation and or configuration parameters M Transistor module shorted P169 to P172 set too high V Power Supply voltage too high check Ud in P004 220 230 V Models Ud 400 V 380 480 V Models Ud 800 V 500 600 V and 500 690 V Models with power supply between 500 V and 600 V Ud 1000 V 500 690 V models with power supply between 660 V and 690 V and 660 690 V models Ud 1200 V Load inertia too high or deceleration ramp too short P151 or P153 set too high V Power Supply voltage too low DC Link check Ud in P004 220 230 V power supply Ud 223 V 380 V power supply Ud
261. estimate P413 Mechanical Time Constant Tm In this case parameter P413 will also consider the driven load VVW Control Voltage Vector WEG P202 5 In the self tuning routine for the VVW Control only the mot stator resistance P409 is obtained Therefore the self tuning routine is always run with the motor stationary Value estimated by the Self tuning routine 217 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit P410 0 to 1 25 x P295 Motor Magnetizing 0 0 Current 1 0 1A This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control P411 0 0 00 to 99 99 Motor Flux Leakage 0 00 Inductance 0 01 mH Jg This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control P412 0 000 to 9 999 Lr Rr Constant Rotor 0 000 Time Constant Tr 0 001 5 Jg This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control 218 Description Notes When the motor can operate decoupled from the load P408 2 this value is estimated by the Self tuning routine P408 1 or 3 otherwise itis obtained from a pre stored value array valid for WEG motors If a non WEG motor is being used set this parameter to the correct value before starting Self tuning For P202 4 vector with encoder the value set at P410 determines the motor flux Thus ensure correct setting If this setting is too low
262. eters P322 and P323 the values of P321 P322 and 323 shall be readjusted 201 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit 324 V to 513 V P296 2 446 V 1V 356 V to 564 V P296 3 490 V 1V 388 V to 615 V P296 4 535 V 1V 425 V to 674 V P296 5 588 V 1V 466 V to 737 V P296 6 644 V 1V 486 V to 770 V P296 7 672 V 1V 559 V to 885 V P296 8 773 V 1V P323 178 V to 282 V Ud Loss Recover P296 0 Level 267 V 1V This parameter 307 V to 487 V is shown on the P296 1 display s only when 461 V 202 4 Vector Control avector GOMITO 324 V to 513 V P296 2 486 V 1V 202 Description Notes UE NOTE Cares with Application The use of the line reactance or DC choke is mandatory to limit the inrush current when the network is reestablished UM NOTE Thefunction Ride Through in Vector Mode for models 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 428 A 660 690 V works only up to a maximum time of 2 s In these models the control power supply is not fed from the DC Link it is a separate power supply with 2 s autonomy NOTE To activate the Ride Through the line supply must fall to a value lower than P321 1 35 Ud Nominal 67 Loss Recover P323 Line Loss P321 gt Ride Through P322 F
263. everse Torque Current Vector Control Maximum Speed P134 P172 Maximum Reverse Torque Current at Maximum Speed P134 P173 Curve Type of the Max Torque 0 Ramp 1 Step Flux Regulator P177 P178 P179 Maximum Flux P180 0 to 120 P181 Magnetization Mode 1 Start Stop CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS 200 to P399 Generic Parameters 1 P201 47 Language Selection 0 Portugu s 1 English 2 Espanol 3 Deutsch 202 049 of Control 0 V F 60 Hz 1 V F 50 Hz 2 V F Adjustable 3 Sensorless Vector 4 Vector with Encoder 5 VVW Voltage Vector WEG P203 Special Function Selection 0 None 1 PID Regulator 2 Mechanical Brake Logic P204 00 Load Save Parameters 0 Not Used 1 Not Used 2 Not Used 3 Reset P043 4 Reset P044 5 Loads Factory Default 60 Hz 6 Loads Factory Default 50 Hz P169 has different function for V F or Vector Control CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Factory Setting S User s Setting 524 143 0 00 without differential action 0 010 Le i 125 145 125 mE 145 1 14 146 146 146 0 General Enable LT 146 B mE i 12 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Factory Unit User s Setting Setting 296 Function Adjustable Range Parameters 7 Loads User Default 1 8 Loads User Default 2 9 Not Used 10 Save User Default 1 11 Sav
264. eypad Default Remote 13 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Function Parameters Adiustable R Factory Unit User s Setting Setting 596 4 012 018 5 Serial L 6 Serial R 7 Fieldbus L 8 Fieldbus R 9 PLC L 10 PLC R P2210 Local Speed Reference Selection 0 keypad 0 Keypad 1 2 2 AI3 4 14 5 gt 0 6 AddAl 7 E P 8 Multispeed 9 Serial 10 Fieldbus 11 PLC 2224 8 Remote Speed Reference 0 keypad 1 Selection 1 2 AI2 4 14 5 gt 0 6 AddAl TS 8 Multispeed 9 Serial 10 Fieldbus 11 PLC P2230 Local FWD REV Selection 0 Always Forward 2 Keypad 1 Always Reverse Default FWD 2 Keypad Default FWD 3 Keypad Default REV 4 Dl2 5 Serial Default FWD 6 Serial Default REV 7 Fieldbus Default FWD 8 Fieldbus Default REV 9 Polarity Al4 10 PLC FWD 11 PLC REV P224 8 Local Start Stop Selection 0 I and 0 Keys 0 I and 0 Keys 1 DIx 2 Serial 3 Fieldbus 4 PLC P225 8 Local JOG Selection 0 Disable 1 Keypad 1 Keypad 14 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE t Functi Adjustable R arameters unction Justapie nange Setting Setting age 2 013 to 018 3 Serial 4 Fieldbus 5 PLC P226 09 Remote FWD REV Selection 0 Always Forward 4 012 1 Always Reverse 2 Keypad
265. f 16 alphanumeric characters There are also 4 indicator LEDs and 8 keys Figure 4 1 shows the front view of the Keypad and indicates the position of the readouts keys and status LEDs Functions of the LED Display The LED Display shows the fault codes inverter status the parameter number and its value For units of current voltage or frequency the LED display shows the unit in the right side digit L S D as shown here current U voltage V H gt frequency Hz Blank speed and other parameters NOTE When the indication is higher than 9999 for instance in rpm the number corresponding to the ten of thousand will not be displayed ex 12345 rpm will be read as 2345 rpm The correct indication will be displayed only on the LCD display LEDs Display LCD Display Green LED Local RedLED Remote Figure 4 1 CFW 09 standard keypad Functions of the LCD Display The LCD Display shows the parameter number and its value simultaneously without requiring the toggling of the PROS key It also provides a brief description of each parameter function fault code and inverter status CHAPTER 4 KEYPAD HMI OPERATION LOCAL and REMOTE LEDs Inverter in Local Mode Green LED ON and Red LED OFF Inverter in Remote Mode Green LED OFF and Red LED ON Direction of Rotation FWD REV LEDs Refer to figure 4 2 below Speed Forward Reverse Forward Key or DI2 E
266. for vector Regulation Mode Optimal Braking control This gives the shortest possible deceleration time without using dynamic braking or regeneration 1 Without losses Automatic deceleration ramp control Optimal braking is not g This parameter active The deceleration ramp is automatically adjusted to is shown on the keep the DC link voltage below the level set in P151 This display s only when avoids E01 DC link overvoltage tripping Can also be used P202 4 with eccentric loads Vector Control 2 Enable Disable Dix 24 V The Braking acts as described for 150 0 via DIx Dixz0 V The Without Losses braking becomes inactive The DC link voltage will be controlled by parameter P153 Dynamic Braking Table 6 7 DC Link voltage regulation mode P151 9 339 to 400 P296 0 P151 sets the DC Link Voltage Regulation Level to prevent 01 DC Link Voltage 400 overvoltage This Parameter jointly with the Parameter P152 allows two Regulation Level 1V operation modes for the DC Link Voltage Regulation Please find below For V F Control a description of the two operation modes P202 0 1 2 or 5 58510 800 P296 1 ia DC Link Voltage Regulation type when 152 0 00 151 is 800 1 different from the maximum value ramp Holding When the Link Voltage reaches the Regulation Level during the deceleration the deceleration ramp time is increased and the speed is maintained at a constant value
267. g if the purpose is to change the content of P100 to 10 0 s you must send 100 disregarding the decimal point Reading If we read 1387 in P409 the value is 1 387 the decimal point is disregarded Writing to change the content of V04 to 900 rpm we must send 8191 V04 900 x P208 4096 Supposing P208 1800 rpm Reading If we read 1242 in VO8 this value is given by P208 8191 V08 1242 x 273 rpm Supposing P208 1800 rom 1 start bit 8 information bits they codify text characters and transmission characters removed from the 7 bits code according to ISO 646 and complemented for even parity eighth bit 1 stop bit After the start bit follows the less significant bit Start ac bit 8 bits of information Et The transmission protocol meets Standard ISO 1745 for data transmission in code Only text characters sequences without header are used The errors monitoring is made through transmission related to the parity of the individual 7 bit characters according to ISO 646 The parity monitoring is made according to DIN 66219 even parity The master uses two types of messages 303 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES READING TELEGRAM for inquiring of the inverter variable content WRITING TELEGRAM to change inverter variable content or to send controls to the inverters Mg NOTE No transmission between two inverters is possible The master has the bus a
268. g Output AO1 2 Function P252 0 000 to 9 999 Analog Output AO1 1 000 Gain 0 001 P253 010 14 Analog Output AO2 5 Function P254 0 000 to 9 999 Analog Output AO2 1 000 Gain 0 001 P255 010 63 With factory default values P251 2 and P252 1 000 AO1 10 V when the motor speed is equal to the maximum speed defined at P134 The 1 output be physically located on the control board 9 as a 0 V to 10 V output or on the option board EBB AO1 as a 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA output Refer to chapter 8 Adjusts the gain of the AO1 analog output For P252 1 000 the 1 output value is set according to the description after figure 6 31 Check possible options on table 6 40 With factory default values P253 5 and P254 1 000 AO2 10 V when the output current is equal to 1 5 x P295 The AO2 output can be physically located on the control board CC9 as a 0 V to 10 V output or on the option board EBB AO 2 as a 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA output Refer to chapter 8 Adjusts the gain of the AO2 analog output For P254 1 000 the AO2 output value is set according to the description after figure 6 31 Check possible options on table 6 40 Analog Output AO3 2 Function Located on the Optional I O Expansion Board EBA With factory default values P255 2 and P256 1 000 10 V when the motor speed is equal to maximum speed defined at P134 For mor
269. hall only be manually reconfigured when the excitation current signal id is oscillating and compromising system operation JE NOTE The excitation current id may be unstable in case of P175 gt 12 Note id can be observed at analog outputs and or AO4 by setting P255 14 and or P257 14 or at P029 and or P030 Parameters P177 and P179 define the output limits of the flux regulator in the Sensorless Vector Control JE NOTE These parameters shall not be changed P178 is the flux reference to both Vector controls Sensorless and with Encoder This parameter is represented as a percentage of the motor rated speed P402 and defines the speed where the field weakening region of the motor starts If the inverter is operating in Vector Control and the motor is not reaching its rated speed itis possible to gradually reduce the value of parameters P180 and or P178 until it works appropriately Action It applies magnetization current after General Enable ON It applies magnetization current after Start Stop ON 0 General Enable 1 Start Stop Table 6 12 Magnetization mode In sensorless vector magnetization current is permanently ON To disable magnetization current when the motor is stopped program P211 to 1 ON This can be given a time delay by programming P213 greater than Zero CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 6 3 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS P200 to P399 Range
270. hapter 4 Keypad HMI Operation or when there is a parameter change attempt that cannot be changed with running motor E25 variable or parameter not existing E26 expected value out of the allowed limits E27 writing attempt in a read only variable or logical control disabled E28 Serial communication is inactive If the time programmed at P314 has elapsed without the inverter receiving a valid Modbus telegram this is displayed by the HMI and the inverter adopts the action programmed at P313 JE NOTE If a parity fault is detected during inverter data reception the telegram will be ignored The same happens when syntax errors occur Ex Code values different from the numbers 0 to 9 Separation character different from etc Times for Read Write of Telegrams MASTER Tx data TxD data INVERTER RSND request to send bu 8 13 7 Physical Connection of the RS 232 and RS 485 Interface Network Master PC CLP CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Board i mnn munit Gg WW CS en a Shield cable 7 M P 22 M Pp M a Shield cable Figure 8 49 CFW 09 network connection through RS 485 Serial Interface Notes E WN A QA LINE TERMINATION include line termination 120 Q at the ends So set 53 1 53 2 EBA and 57 1 57 2 EBB to refer
271. he inverter panel consider the heat dissipated by the resistor when defining the panel ventilation Set Parameter P154 to the Ohms value of the DB resistor and Parameter P155 to the resistor power rating in kW DANGER The CFW 09 provides an electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor to avoid overheating The braking resistor and the transistor can be damaged if They are not properly sized Parameters P153 P154 and P155 are not properly set The line voltage exceeds the maximum allowed value E A K The electronic thermal protection provided by the inverter if properly programmed protects the DB resistor in case of overloads not expected during normal operation but it does not ensure protection in case of a dynamic braking circuit failure In this case the only guaranteed method to avoid burning the resistor and eliminate risk of fire is the installation of a thermal overload relay in series with the resistor and or the installation of a thermostat on the resistor body wiring itin away to disconnect the inverter power supply is case of overheating as shown below Contactor or Circuit Breaker Power Supply Overload Control Power Relay Supply Thermostat Braking Resistor Figure 8 22 Braking resistor connection NOTE Through the power contacts of the bimetallic overload relay circulates Direct Current during the DC Braking process CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
272. hown model has been calculated so the braking current does not exceed the maximum current specified in table 8 13 For this following parameters have been considered DBW 01 rated line voltage 480 V DBW 02 rated line voltage 690 V Factory Standard Value of P153 HOW TO SPECIFY THE DBW TYPE DBW 01 Z WEG Braking Rated Output Current DC Supply Input Supply Voltage Fan Supply Voltage Standard Code End Module 220 to 480 V at Input 2180 210 to 1 110 Vrms DBW 01 0165 165A 800 2 220 Vrms 0240 240 0300 300 0210 210A 5069 500 10 1200 Vd 0380 380 271 8 10 3 1 8 10 3 2 Mechanical Installation CHAPTER amp CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES DBW 01 and DBW 02 meg MADE IM Hptaz tiatn ifi DBW MOU DBWOSOSADDMMBSZ 10790748 WEG Item Identification Label DP SUID 1224567860 a Rated Output KOMINA RATED VOLTAGE 420 800 BAIDA OUTIMZ 4 i Data Serial Number Front View Sa OC NL Y rbpeh o E 4 7 J Mis IRNTED vi a0 dw Xen qat i pee DVOITAGE 435 300 Woo n Le X x Figure 8 23 Identification label The environmental operating conditions of the DBW are the same
273. ial interface are always integer values It is necessary to know the parameter resolution in order to read the correct value Ex Real Current Value 7 8 A lt gt Received Value 78 8 13 5 Variables and Errors of the Serial Communication 8 13 5 1 Basic Variables V00 code 00800 Indication of the inverter type reading variable The reading of this variable allows the inverter type identification For the CFW 09 this value is 8 as defined in 8 13 3 7 V02 code 00802 Indication of the inverter state reading variable Logical status byte high Error code byte low Where Logical status EL15 EL14 EL13 EL12 EL 11 110 EL9 EL8 307 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES EL8 EL9 EL10 EL11 EL12 EL13 EL14 EL 15 0 ramp enabling run stop inactive 1 enabling 0 general enabling inactive 1 2 general enabling active 0 reverse 1 forward 0 JOG inactive 1 JOG active 0 local 1 remote 0 without undervoltage 1 with undervoltage not used 0 without error 1 with error Error Code hexadecimal error number Ex 200 00H 01 gt 01 E10 OAH V03 code 00803 Selection of the Logical Control Writing variable whose bits have the following meaning Inverter enabled EL8 EL9 1 BYTE HIGH desired action mask The corresponding bit should be set to 1 so the action happens MSB LSB
274. ibution Filter output side 167 1151 043 UVW Notes 1 First environment restricted distribution Basic Standard CISPR 11 30 to 230 MHz 30 dB uV m in 30 m 230 to 1000 MHz 37 dB uV m in 30 Second environment unrestricted distribution Basic Standard CISPR 11 Group 2 class A 30 to 230 MHz 40 dB uV m in 30 m 230 to 1000 MHz 50 dB uV m in 30 m RS 485 Serial Interface 45 Profibus DP FN 3258 100 35 12 MBaud 2 Motor shielded cable length 20 m Table 3 13 Schaffner filters list for 09 inverter series with 220 230 power supply 73 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 334 EMC Filter Characteristics Table 3 14 shows the main technical characteristics of Epcos and Shaffner filters used in CFW 09 inverter series Figure 3 20 presents drawings of these filters Drawing WEG Nominal Power Weight Connector 0208 2126 B84143A8R105 a 0208 2127 B84143A16R105 6 9 090 0208 2128 0208 2129 45 0208 2130 0208 2131 66 20 ee 0208 2132 980 27 42 f 0208 2133 120 39 49 g 0208 2134 150 8 80 h 0208 2135 Epcos 220 60 115 i i 0208 2136 0208 2137 400 0208 2138 60 57 22 k 0208 2139 100 99 28 0208 2140 0208 2141 2 0208 2142 0208 2143 __ 400 3 28 o 0208 2144 600 6 amp 7 22 J p 2 0208 2075 45 0208 2076 p 46 7 u 385 1 0 209 45 0208 2077 47 0208 2078 52
275. id error code 3 this error occurs in the following conditions Value is out of permitted range Writing in data that cannot be changed only read register or register that does not allow changing with enabled inverter or bits of logic status Writing in function of the logic command that has not been enabled via serial interface When any error occurs in the message content not during the data transfer the slave must return a message indicating the error type that occurred The errors that may occur in the CFW 08 during the message processing are errors relating to invalid function code 01 invalid data address code 02 and invalid data value code 03 The messages sent by the slave have following structure Response Slave Slave address Function Code with most significant bit to 1 Error code CRC CRC Master requests from the slave at address 1 to write parameter 89 inexistent parameter 327 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Query Master Response Slave Field Value Slave address Slave address 01h Register low E C3h value high Value low 1 BJ CRC e Dh 328 8 15 KME for Extractable Mounting M8x20 hexagon socket head screw CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES The kit KME enables the mounting of CF W 09 inverter in the sizes 7 8 8E 9 10 and 10E models 361 A to 600 A 380 480 V 107 A
276. idth 800 31 50 and 1000 mm 39 37 362 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 247 Ato 472 A 500 690 V Models size 10E and 225 Ato 428 A 660 690 V Models size 10E 700 00 37 70 284 70 72100 275 00 215 00 75 00 dimensions will depend panel dimensions b The fixing panel supports identified by X and are not supplied with KME Kit These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes 275 00 as specified el 215 00 212 00 eld 210 00 Figure 9 14 b KIT KME for Size 10E Panel Width 800 mm 31 50 in and 1000 mm 39 37 in 363
277. ield has variable length Master Q uery Message Address 1 byte Function Code 1 byte Data n bytes CRC 2 bytes Slave Answer Message Figure 8 51 Message structure 314 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Address The master initiates the communication by sending one byte with the address of the slave to which the message is addressed The slave with the right slave address initiates the message with its own address The master can also send a message destined to address 0 zero which means that the message is destined to all network slaves broadcast In this case no slave will answer to the master Function Code This field contains an only byte where the master specifies the type of service or the function requested to the slave read write etc According to the protocol each function is used to access a specific data type In the CFW 09 all data are available as holding type registers referenced from the address 40000 4x Besides these registers the inverter status enabled disabled with error no error and the command for the inverter Start Stop Run CW CCW etc can be also accessed through the coils read write functions or the internal bits referenced from the address 00000 or Ox on Data Field This field has variable length The format and the content of this field depend on the used function and transmitted values This field and the respective functions are de
278. ilter side Schaffner 159 1151 044 Output filter side Schaffner 159 1151 044 Output filter side Schaffner 159 1151 044 Output filter side Schaffner 203 1151 042 UVW Schaffner 167 1151 043 UVW Schaffner 159 1151 044 UVW Schaffner 159 1151 044 UVW Schaffner 159 1151 044 UVW Schaffner 159 1151 044 UVW 1 First environment restricted distribution Basic Standard CISPR 11 30 to 230 MHz 30 dB uV m in 30 m 230 to 1000 MHz 37 dB uV m in 30 m Electromagnetic radiation Inside disturbance level Conducted Metallic Product Standard Emission EN61800 3 1996 Class 2 A11 2000 First environment restricted 1 distribution First environment restricted 1 distribution First environment restricted 1 distribution 1 First environment restricted 1 distribution environment restricted 1 distribution environment restricted 1 distribution environment restricted distribution 1 environment restricted distribution 1 environment restricted distribution 1 Second environment unrestricted distribution Basic Standard CISPR 11 Group 2 class 30 to 230 MHz 40 dB uV m in 30 m 230 to 1000 MHz 50 dB uV m in 30 m 2 Motor shielded cable length 20 m Table 3 12 cont Schaffner filters list for CFW 09 inverter series with 380 480 V power supply 72 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION 220 230 V power su
279. imal Braking feature can be used and in many cases eliminate the need for Dynamic Braking Refer to chapter 6 Parameter P151 NOTE If dynamic braking will be used set P151 to its maximum value For a precise sizing of the dynamic braking resistor application data such as deceleration time load inertia and braking duty cycle must be considered The RMS current capacity of the inverter s dynamic braking transistor must also be taken into account as well as its maximum peak current which defines the minimum resistance value ohms of the braking resistor Refer to table 8 12 The DC Link voltage level at which dynamic braking is activated is defined by the Parameter P153 Dynamic Brake Level CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES The braking resistor is defined according to the deceleration time load inertia and resistive torque In most cases a resistor with an ohmic value indicated on table 8 12 and a power rating of 20 of the driven motor can be used Use Wire type resistors with suitable insulation to withstand the instantaneous current peaks For critical applications with very short braking times high inertia loads Ex centrifuges or with very short and frequent duty cycles contact WEG to define the most suitable resistor CFW 09 Model Maximum Minimum T Braking 5 Braking enm recommended Power Wiring Power Supply Rated Current A Fir je Current o KWI resistor BR UD 00 Voltage V
280. in parameter P287 5 Programming P203 2 some parameters that are used in the brake logic function will be automatically programmed See details in parameter P203 9 The following start parameters are available Start Stop DI1 Forward Run Reverse Run via DI3 and DI2 or DI4 Fieldbus Note If another kind of start command which was not mentioned above is used together with the brake logic function E24 will be generated and an incompatibility message will be displayed See detailed description table 4 2 When the start command used 15 Fieldbus WEG recommends to program P313 5 Cause Fatal Error 189 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION r Operation of Parameters P353 to P356 with Ix gt Imr Current Imag Reset Pulse for the integrator of the speed regulator Start Stop Accepted only after P355 P356 RLx or DOx Output brake activation P353 P355 Speed Reference A Real Brake Real Speed Time Note The Start Stop function the figure above is valid only for commands from the 011 Digital Input 1 set to the option 1 Start Stop Figure 6 39 cont r Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions 190 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION S Operation of Parameters P353 to P356 with Ix lt Imr Current Magnetized G __ Ix Motor M Reset Pulse for the integrat
281. ines Power up 10 ON OFF cycles per hour maximum 1 every 6 minutes CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 9 1 2 220 230 V Power Supply 6 7 10 13 16 24 28 220 230 220 230 220 230 220 230 220 230 220 230 220 230 Rated Output Current 28 Maximum Output Current A 6 18 15 15 2 s 4 Rated Input Current 72159 33 6 Rated Switching Frequency kHz LII STE d 5 Maximum Motor hp KW 9 1 5 1 1 10 7 5 Watts Loss W Co pow ow pow om 320 Model Current Voltage N 45 54 70 86 105 130 Model Current Voltage 220 230 220 230 220 230 220 230 220 230 220 230 Load Power kVA 21 27 28 34 34 52 60 Rated Output Current A WAHL 130 150 Maximum Output Current A 68 105 120 158 195 Rated Input Current A ee pae T 180 Rated Switching Frequency kHz ene a7 ER ms 25_ Es 2s ES 60 EX 18 5 e 5 22 22 30 30 37 Watts Loss KW 1 0 1 2 1 5 9 1 3 380 480 V Power Supply 3 6 4 5 5 9 13 16 24 Model Current Voltage 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 380 480 Rated Output Current Aj 3e p 4 os m e Ln Maximum Motor np RW s Watts Loss W Note Constant Torque VT Variable Torque Factory Default 337 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 30 38 45
282. ing zero Ready Inverter neither is in fault non in undervoltage condition No Fault Inverter is not in any fault condition With Error means that the inverter is disabled due to some error No E00 Inverter is not in an 200 fault condition No E01 E02 E03 Inverter is not in an E01 or E02 or E03 fault condition No E04 Inverter is not in an E04 fault condition No E05 Inverter is not in an E05 fault condition 4to 20 mA OK If applicable the 4 to 20 mA current reference is present Zero Speed Motor speed is lower than the value set at P291 Zero Speed Zone Not Used Digital Output remains inactive Forward Motor is running forward Torque gt Tx and Torque lt Tx Valid only for P202 3 or 4 Vector Control Torque corresponds to motor Torque as indicated in Parameter 009 Ride Through means that the inverter is executing the Ride Through function Pre charge OK means that the DC Link voltage is higher than the pre charge voltage level Fieldbus allows changing the state of the digital outputs P275 to P280 from the Fieldbus network Refer to item 8 12 7 gt and Nt gt Nx this option works only for P202 4 Vector with Encoder Control means that both conditions must be satisfied in order that DOx Saturated Transistor and or RLx relay picked up The Digital Outputs will come back to its OFF state that is DOx Cut off Transistor and or RLx released r
283. ins the magnetization current no load current This maintains the motor with rated flux and when the next START command is given it will achieve a quick response For self ventilated motors with no load current higher than 1 3 of the rated current generally small motors lower than 10 hp it is recommended that the motor does not stay in this condition magnetization current for a long time since it may overheat In these cases we recommend to deactivate the command Ge neral Enable when the motor has stopped thus decreasing the motor current to zero when stopped Another way to disable magnetization current with the motor stopped is to program P211 to 1 zero speed disable is ON for both vector modes and for vector with encoder still another option is to program P181 to 1 Magnetization mode If magnetization current is disabled with the motor stopped there will be a delay at start while the flux builds up The VVW Voltage Vector WEG Control Mode follows the same philosophy of the V F Control The VVW Control allows a reasonable improvement of the steady state inverter performance it results in a better speed regulation and in a higher torque capability at low speeds frequencies lower than 5 Hz As a result the frequency speed range of the system is increased with respect to the V F Control Other advantages of this control are the simplicity and ease of setting The VVW Control uses the stator current measurement th
284. inverter DC Link voltage in volt 0 0 to 1020 eal 0 1 Hz Indicates the inverter output frequency in hertz Hz rdy run Sub Exy Indicates the inverter status rdy inverter is ready to be started or enabled run inverter is enabled Sub inverter is disabled and line voltage is too low for operation undervoltage Exy inverter is in a fault condition xy is the number of the Fault code example E06 0 to 800 Indicates the inverter output voltage in volt V 1 Vac 0 0 to 150 0 M Indicates the torque developed by the motor It is determined as follows D poog 10 100 y fe Where Tm Measured motor torque current _ Nominal motor torque current given by Speed 1 for lt Nrated y P401 X P178 Y for gt Nrated 410 N 100 0 0 to 3276 M Indicates the instantaneous output power in kilowatt kW 0 1 kW LCD 1 Indicates the Keypad LCD display the status of the 6 digital inputs LED 0 to 255 the control board DI1 to DI6 and the 2 digital inputs of the I O Expansion Board 017 and 018 Number 1 stands for Active DIx closed and number 0 stands for Inactive DIx open in the following order 012 DIZ 018 The LED display shows a decimal value related to the 8 Digital Inputs where the status of each input is considered one bit of a binary number where 119 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DES
285. ion Table 6 57 Load detector Mg NOTE Refer to figures 6 46 a andb 0 to P134 The motor accelerates up to the stabilization speed and remains at this 90 speed during the time set at parameter P363 1 rpm During this period the CFW 09 detects the load condition by using the average Current 209 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P363 Stabilization Time Ji Available only if P361 1 On P364 Slack Cable Time MP Available only if P361 1 On P365 Slack Cable Level Available only if P361 1 On P366 Light Load Level Available only if P361 1 On P367 Overweight Level 9 Available only if P361 1 On P368 Speed Reference Gain Available only if P361 1 On P369 207 Frequency Fx 210 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 1 to 10 0 0 1 0 15 0 0 to 60 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 10 1 3 295 0 1 x P295 0 0 to 1 3 x P295 0 3 x P295 0 1A 0 0 to 1 8 x P295 1 1 x P295 0 1A 1 000 to 2 000 1 000 0 0 to 300 0 4 0 0 1 Hz Description Notes Time that the CFW 09 waits before starting the load detection after the stabilization speed has been reached Time that the CFW 09 waits to commutate the digital DOx and relay outputs set to the option Slack Cable Detection If the Slack Cable condition is no longer valid 09 resets the digital or relay outputs
286. ion 0 5 of Base Speed Speed Range 1 100 With Encoder with EBA or EBB Board Regulation 0 01 of Base Speed with 14 bit Analog Input EBA Board 0 01 of Base Speed with Digital Reference Keypad Serial Port Fieldbus Electronic Potentiometer Multispeed 0 1 of Base Speed with 10 bit Analog Input CC9 Board Range 10 to 180 Regulation 10 of Rated Torque with encoder Range 20 to 180 96 Regulation 10 of Rated Torque sensorless above 3 Hz 2 Non Isolated Differential Inputs 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Impedance 400 0 to 10 V 500 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 Resolution 10 bit Programmable Functions 6 Isolated Inputs 24 Vdc Programmable Functions 2 Non Isolated Outputs 0 to 10 V RL gt 10 1 mA Maximum Resolution 11 bits Programmable Functions 2 Relays NO NC contacts available 240 Vac 1 A Programmable Functions 1 Relay NO contact available 240 Vac 1 A Programmable Functions Overcurrent Output Short circuit Trip Point 2 x Rated Current for CT application DC Link Under Overvoltage Power Supply Undervoltage Phase Fault 0 Inverter Overtemperature Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload Motor Inverter Overload I x t External Fault CPU EPROM Error Output Ground Fault Programming Error 343 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS KEYPAD HMI STANDARD HMI CFWO09 LCD 8 Keys Start Stop Increase D
287. is programmed different than Inactive without Fieldbus board in the XC140 connector of the CC9 control board or 2 The Fieldbus board is inserted but is defective or 3 The Fieldbus board is inserted but the standard programmed at P309 is not equal to the standard of the used board You can program in Parameter P313 which action the inverter will perform when E30 is detected When the PROG key of the HMI is pressed the E30 Fault indication is removed from the display The variables are arranged in the memory of the Fieldbus device starting at the address OOh both for writing and reading The address differences are corrected by the protocol and by communication board The way the variables are arranged at each address in the memory of the Fieldbus depends on the equipment that is used as Master For instance in the PLC Athe variables are arranged as High and Low and in the PLC B the variables are arranged as Low and High 299 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 13 SERIAL COMMUNICATION 8 13 1 Introduction 300 The basic objective of the serial communication is the physical connection of inverters in a configured equipment network as shown below Slave 1 Slave 2 s Slave n Inverter Inverter Inverter n lt 30 The inverters possess control software for the transmission reception of data through the serial interface to facilitate the data reception sent by the master and the sending of data requested by th
288. isplay shows 5 last password 6 Use the keys to change to the desired password value password 1 7 Press display shows 000 From this moment on the new password becomes active Thus to change parameters content POOO has to be set to the new password password 1 NOTE After reset to default the password becomes 5 again Speed Reference value in rpm Factory Default With filter of 0 5 s The displayed units can be changed from rpm to other units at parameters P207 P216 and P217 The scale factor can be changed at P208 and P210 It does not depend on the speed reference source Through this parameter is possible to change the speed reference P121 when P221 or P222 O Indicates the actual motor speed in rpm factory default With filter of 0 5 s The displayed units can be changed from rpm to other units at parameters P207 P216 and P217 The scale factor can be changed at P208 and P210 Through this parameter is possible to change the speed reference P121 when P221 or P222 O Indicates inverter output current in ampere A Parameter P004 DC Link Voltage P005 Motor Frequency P006 Inverter Status P007 Output Voltage P009 Motor Torque P010 Output Power P012 Digital Inputs to 018 Status CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 0 0 to 1235 1V Indicates the
289. it address byte low Number of bits byte high Number of bits byte high Number of bits byte low Number of bits byte low Byte Count Field number of data bytes CRC Byte 1 CRC Byte 2 Byte 3 etc to CRC CRC The value of each bit that is being sent is placed at a position of the data bytes sent by the master The first byte in the bits 0 to 7 receives the 8 first bits by starting from the initial address indicated by the master The other bytes if the number of inscribed bits is higher than 8 remain in sequence If the number of inscribed bits is not a multiple of 8 the remaining bits of the last byte should be filled in with O zero Example command writing for general enabling bit 100 1 general enabling bit 101 1 and CWW direction of rotation bit 102 0 for a CFW 09 at address 1 Query Master Response Slave Field Value Number of bits byte high 00h Number of bits byte low 03h Byte Count 54h Bits Value CRC 15h CRC EE ___ __ As only three bits are written the master needed only one byte to transmit the data The transmitted values are in the three less significant bits of the byte that contains the value for the bits The other bits of this byte remained with the value 0 zero 324 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 14 3 6 Function 16 Write This function allows writing values to a register group that must be in Multiple Registers numerical sequence This function can als
290. it and have internal changes For more detail refer please to the Addendum of the CFW 09 Frequency Inverter Manual of the CFW 09HD line supplied by DC Link Refer to WWW Weg net There are two problems associated to a conventional inverter with diode bridge atthe input harmonics injection to the network and braking of loads with high inertia or that run at high speeds and require short braking times The harmonic injection to the network happens with any type of load The braking problems appear with loads such as sugar centrifuges dynamometers cranes and winders The CFW 09 converter with RB option Regenerative Braking is WEG solution for these problems refer to figure 8 58 Shows the main components of a inverter with CFW 09 RB Figure 8 58 Simplified diagram of a driving with CFW 09 RB 333 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 334 As shown in the figure 8 58 CFW O9RB unit is fitted with a capacitor bank and an IGBTs bridge Externally is mounted a network reactance and a capacitive filter By switching the IGBTs bridge the energy can be transferred in a controlled way from the network to the capacitor bank One can say that by means of the switching process the CFW 09RB emulates a resistive load There is also a capacitive filter to prevent the bridge switching interferes in other network loads To complete this drive the use of aCFW O9HD is required that drives the motor and its load This drive is shown
291. ix diode rectifier and capacitor bank the input current drained from the power supply line of inverters is non sinusoidal and contains harmonics of the fundamental frequency These harmonic currents circulate through the power supply line causing harmonic voltage drops which distort the power supply voltage of the inverter and other loads connected to this line These harmonic current and voltage distortions may increase the electrical losses in the installation overheating components cables transformers capacitor banks motors etc as well as a lowering power factor The harmonic input currents depend on the impedance values that are present in the rectifier input output circuit The addition of a line reactor and or DC bus choke reduces the current harmonic content providing the following advantages Increased input power factor Reduced RMS input current Reduced power supply voltage distortion Increased life of the DC Link capacitors 263 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 7 1 Application Criteria 264 The Line Reactor and the DC Bus Choke when properly sized have practically the same efficiency in reducing the harmonic currents The DC Bus Choke has the advantage of not introducing a motor voltage drop while the Line Reactor is more efficient to attenuate power supply voltage transients DC Link Inductor equivalent to the line reactor is L ml xy DC EQUIVALENT AC NOTE The 44 A to 79
292. ix the Fieldbus connector to the inverter frame by using the 150 mm 5 9 in cable refer to figure 8 36 Figure 8 36 Fastening of the Fieldbus connector 279 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Sizes 3 to 10 models up to 30 A Connect the Fieldbus connector to the metallic L by using the 150 mm 5 9 in Fasten the set to the metallic support plate of the control board refer to figure 8 37 lili tr IIT e Figure 8 37 Fastening of the connector 6 Connect the other cable end of the Fieldbus connector to the electronic Fieldbus board as shown in figure 8 38 DEVICENET PROFIBUS DP Figure 8 38 Connection to the Fieldbus board 280 8 12 2 Profibus DP CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Introduction The inverter that is fitted with the Profibus DP Kit operates in slave mode allowing the reading writing of their parameters through a master The inverter does not start the communication with other nodes it only answers to the master controls A twisted pair of copper cable realizes the connection of the Fieldbus RS 485 allowing the data transmission at rates between 9 6 kbits s and 12 Mbits s Figure 8 39 show a general view of a Profibus DP network PROFIBUS DP Master Personal Computer with Configuration Software anmai SEE PROFI
293. kW 9 Watts Loss kW 9 Frame Size 82 s2 m 10E 8 O Note CT Constant Torque VT Variable Torque Factory Default 340 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 5 1 Constant Torque VT Variable Torque Torque Torque Speed Nominal Speed Nominal Figure 9 1 Load characteristics 2 The power rating in KVA is determined by the following equation Input Voltage V x Current Rating A 1000 The values shown on the tables 9 1 2 to 9 1 5 were calculated considering the inverter rated current rating and an input voltage of 230 V for 220 230 V models 460 V for 380 480 V models 575 V for 500 600 V models and 690 V for 660 690 V models 3 Rated Output Current is valid for the following conditions Relative Air Humidity 5 to 90 96 non condensing Altitude 1000 m 3 300 ft nominal conditions From 1000 m to 4000 m 3 300 ft to 13 200 ft with 1 current reduction for each 100 m 330 ft above 1000 m 3 300 ft Ambient Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F nominal conditions From 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F with 2 96 current derating for each 1 1 8 F degree above 40 C 104 F The rated current values are valid for the indicated switching frequencies The 10 kHz switching frequency is not possible for the 2 9 Ato 79 A 500 600 V 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 428 A 660 690 V mode
294. ke Logic P224 or P227 0 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 30 or 31 Start Stop via keypad HMI with the Mechanical Brake Logic 36 P265 or P267 or P269 y P266 or P268 or P270 14 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 30 or 31 3 wire Start Stop with 37 the Mechanical Brake Logic P263 3 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 08 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 30 or 31 Fast Stop Mode with the 38 Mechanical Brake Logic P232 1 or 2 and P275 or P276 or P277 or P279 or P280 30 or 31 Coast to Stop or Fast Mode with the Mechanical Brake Logic 39 92 Table 4 2 Incompatibility between parameters E24 5 1 5 2 PRE POWER CHECKS INITIAL POWER UP CHAPTER 5 START UP This chapter provides the following information How to check and prepare the inverter before power up How to power up and check for proper operation How to operate the inverter The inverter shall be installed according to chapter 3 Installation and Connection DANGER Disconnect the AC input power before making any connections Even when the inverter project is different from the suggested connections the following recommendations are applicable 1 Check all connections Check if the power grounding and control connections are correct and well tightened 2 Clean the inside of the inverter Remove all shipping material from the inside of the inverter or cabinet 3 4 Check the motor Ch
295. l 5 to 15 V e ren 25 24 com ov Reference MOST I T _ 5 i i NIE Ez g Max Recommended lenght 100 m 300 ft iConnector XC9 DBS Male External Power Supply Voltage for encoder 5 to 15 Vdc consumption 40 mA plus consumption of the encoder 0 V reference of the Power Supply Voltage Valid pin position with encoder HS35B models from Dynapar For other encoder models check the correct connection to meet the required sequence Figure 8 11 EBC1 encoder input 257 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES JE NOTE The maximum permitted encoder frequency is 100 kHz Sequence of the encoder signals la NN Motor running clockwise 8 3 KEYPAD WITH CFW 09 standard Keypad HMI is provided with LEDs and LCD display LEDs ONLY It can also be supplied with an LED Display only In this case the keypad model number is HMI CFW 09 LED It operates in the same way as the standard keypad but it does not show the text messages of the LCD and does not provide the copy function The dimensions and the electrical connections are the same as for the standard keypad Refer to item 8 4 Figure 8 12 Keypad with LED display only 8 4 REMOTE KEYPAD The CFW 09 keypad both the standard or the LED display only can be installed AND CABLES directly
296. l character of Start of TeXt TEXT consists in CODE variable address separation character VAL 4 HEXADECIMAL digit value ETX control character of End of TeXt BCC Byte of CheCksum EXCLUSIVE OR of all the bytes between STX excluded and ET X included Format of the inverter answer telegram Acceptance ADR inverter address ACK ACKnowledge control character No acceptance ADR inverter address Not AcKnowledge control character That means that the data were not accepted and the addressed variable continues with its old value The inverters and the master test the telegram syntax The answers for the respective verified conditions are defined as follows Reading telegram No answer with wrong telegram structure control characters received incorrectly or wrong inverter address CODE corresponding to the variable does not exist or there is only writing variable TEXT with valid telegrams 305 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Writing telegram No answer with wrong telegram structure control characters received incorrectly or wrong inverter address code corresponding to the variable does not exist wrong BCC checksum byte only reading variable VAL out of the allowed range for the respective variable operation parameter out of the alteration mode with valid telegrams The master should maintain betwe
297. l only for inverters provided with a keypad with LCD display It allows the adjustment of the LCD Display contrast Increase decrease the parameter content to obtain the best contrast Defines the source of the LOCAL REMOTE selection command Parameter P221 LOCAL Speed Heference Selection P222 0 Speed Heference Selection Range Factory Setting Unit O to 11 0 010 11 1 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes P220 LOCAL REMOTE Selection 0 Always LOCAL Mode Always REMOTE mode Ke of the Keypad HMI LOCAL Default Key of the Keypad HMI REMOTE Default Digital inputs DI2 to DI8 P264 to P270 Serial Local Default SuperDrive or incorporated Modbus Serial Remote Default SuperDrive or incorporated Modbus Fieldbus Local Default Optional Fieldbus board Fieldbus Remote Default Optional Fieldbus board PLC L Optional PLC board PLC R Optional PLC board Table 6 25 LOCAL REMOTE selection IN AIA In the factory default setting the key of the Keypad HMI will select Local or Remote Mode When powered up the inverter starts in Local Mode The description as apposed to refers to the analogue signal after scaling and or gain calculations have been applied to it Refer to figure 6 29 P221 P222 LOCAL REMOTE Speed Reference Selection 0 e of the keypad Analog
298. l remain stored until a new value is programmed 3 If the last value programmed in the parameter is not functionally compatible with other parameter values already programmed an E24 Programming Error will be displayed Example of programming error Programming two digital inputs DIx with the same function Refer to table 4 2 for the list of programming errors that will generate an E24 Programming Error 91 CHAPTER 4 KEYPAD HMI OPERATION o e 7 8 4 allow the reprogramming of any parameter value it is required to change parameter to the password value The factory default password value is 5 Otherwise you can only read the parameter values and not reprogram them For more detail refer to POOO description in chapter 6 E24 Incompatibility between parameters Two or more parameters between P264 or P265 P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 1 LOC REM Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 6 Ramp 2 Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 9 Speed Torque P265 equal to 8 and P266 different than 8 or vice versa FWD Run REV Run P221 or P222 equal to 8 Multispeed and P266 7 and P267 7 and P268 7 P221 7 or P222 7 and 265 5 and P267 5 or P266 5 and P268 5 with reference E P and without DIx increase E P or without decrease
299. l supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with y fixing holes as specified Figure 9 12 a KIT KME for Size 8 Panel Width 600 mm 23 62 in 357 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 180 A 240 A 380 480 V Models size 8 675 3769 1099 50 1139 50 1087 50 5 The X dimensions will depend panel dimensions b The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and X with fixing holes as specified Figure 9 12 b KIT KME for Size 8 Panel Width 800 mm 31 50 in 358 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 107 A to 211 A 500 600 V Models size 8E and 100 Ato 179 A 660 690 V Models size 8E 410 00 675 77 275 0 AAT 37 69 374 00 1257 50 1269 50 ZH OL 65 246 00 5 X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions b The fixing panel supports identified by and are not supplied with KME Kit These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified Figure 9 12 c KIT KME for Size 8E Panel Width 600 mm 23 62 in 359 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 107 Ato 211 A 500 600 V Models size 8E and 100 Ato 179 A 660 690 V Models size 8E 615 675 37 69 374 00 1269 50 1309 50 NOTES a The X dimensions will depe
300. led lll Speed reference higher than 3 96 IV 1 1 gt 0 125 x P401 or gt 0 125 x P401 gt 0 125 x P401 0103 Defines the number of digits after the decimal point of the Speed 0 Reference 001 and the Motor Speed indications 002 1 0 1 P211 Zero Speed Disable 0 0 Off 1 Table 6 21 Zero speed disable When active it disables general disabling motor runs freely the inverter when the speed reference and the actual motor speed are lower than the value set at P291 Zero Speed Zone The CFW 09 will be enabled again when one of the conditions defined by the Parameter 212 is satisfied 151 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P212 0 or 1 Inverter leaves zero Condition to Leave 0 speed disable if Zero Speed Disable P001 Speed ref N P291 or P002 Motor speed N P291 P001 Speed ref gt P291 Table 6 22 Condition to leave zero speed disable When the PID Regulator is active P203 1 and in Automatic mode the inverter leaves the Zero Speed besides the programmed condition in P212 only when the PID input error the difference between setpoint and process variable is higher than the value programmed in P535 P213 0 to 999 P213 0 Zero speed disable without timing 2 Zero 213 gt 0 Zero speed disable will only become active after the time
301. lf tuning Mode Selection 0 No 1 No Rotation 2 Run for Im 3 Run for Tm only with Encoder 4 Estimate Tm only with Encoder Enter the programming mode Sensorless Only select option 2 Run for Im if no load is coupled to the motor shaft Otherwise select option 1 No Rotation 2 With Encoder In addition to the options above it is also possible to estimate the Tm Mechanical Time Constant value With the load coupled to the motor shaft select 3 Run for Tm The motor will only run when Tm is estimated All other parameters are estimated with the motor at standstill If only Tm estimation is desired select option 4 Estimate Tm Refer to P408 in chapter 6 107 CHAPTER 5 START UP Press the PROG key to start the self tuning routine End of the Self tuning routine Inverter is back to normal operation Press the D otart key N Press the 4 key and hold until 1800 rpm is reached i Press the FWD REV key Obs The LEDs on the keypad show whether the motor is running FWD or REV Press the Stop key Press the key and hold it Release the Qos key 108 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY Messages and values of the estimated parameters are DESCRIPTION oelf tuning routine in progress Motor Speed rpm Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm Minimum Speed in the Forward CW direction of rotation 3 for 4 pole motors Motor accelerates u
302. llows controlled motor braking without using a Dynamic Braking DB resistor Self tuning auto tune function with Vector Control permitting automatic setting of the control regulators and control parameters by means of the automatic identification of the motor and the load parameters Technical specifications for each model of CFW 09 are described in chapter 9 The block diagram below gives a general view of the CFW 09 D DCLink choke connection optional only fromsize 2 and up 2 DC Link connection 3 DB resistor connection Up to size 7 only Option for sizes 4 to 7 Power harga me Three phase papacitor EF IGBT rectifier PAN Inverter RFI filter db PE DC Link in p Feedbacks TOUS TUI voltage Phase fault 4 22 4 Phase fault only from size and up Modbus RTU 5 74 POWER CONTROL Internal electronics power supplies control power interfaces be Coda eee get EXPANSION optional isolated RS 485 1 digital input remote CCQ 146 input 14bitanal outputs ini Control Digital Board w External Inputs 32 bits isola 410 20 mA In Control DI DI6 RISC isola 410 20 mA guti 2 digital outputs Analog l 1 encoder In Out i Inputs i 1 PTC input Al2 FIELDBUS Optional gt Analog _ Profibus DP Outputs
303. ls The operation at 10 kHz is possible for Control Mode and Vector Control with Encoder Mode In this case it s necessary to derate the output current according to table 9 1 P kVA NA 341 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Models Load Switching Output Current Type Frequency Derating 6 Ato 45 A 220 230 V CT VT 10 kHz 0 8 CT kH 54 A to 130 A 220 230 V Ur 5 kHz Contact WEG 10 kHz 3 6 A to 24 A 380 480 V Cw T T 30 A to 142 A 380 480 V 10 ____1 ___ Contact WEG 180 A to 600 A 380 480 V 10 10kHz 63 500 600 V 0 8 79 500 600 V 5 kHz 107 A to 472 A 500 690 V Contact WEG 100 A to 428 A 660 690 V Table 9 1 Output current derating for switching frequency gt rated switching frequency 4 Maximum Current 1 5 x I Nominal for 60 seconds every 10 minutes Nominal Rated Current CT applications considering the applicable derating depending on altitude or ambient temperature as specified in note 3 The maximum output current is the same for CT and VT This way the inverter has a lower overload capacity when VT current is used 5 The indicated maximum motor hp kW ratings are based WEG 230 V 460 V 575 V 4 pole motors and normal duty loads A precise inverter sizing must consider the actual motor nameplate and application data 6 Rated input current for single phase operation Note 7 Aand 10A 220 230 V models
304. lt 8 0 Parameter P413 0 Tm Constant Mechanical Time Constant Jg This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes Typical TR values for WEG standard motors TR 5 Motor Power Number of poles CV hp kW 2 4 6 8 50 2 60 2 50 Hz 60 2 50 Hz 60 2 50 Hz 60 Hz 2 1 5 0 07 0 07 5 37 0 14 0 11 10 7 5 0 13 0 14 15 11 0 28 0 22 20 15 0 21 0 24 50 37 0 31 0 32 100 75 0 70 0 56 150 110 0 67 200 150 103 300 220 350 250 1 86 1 85 1 53 Table 6 63 Typical TR values for some WEG standard motors 0 00 to 99 99 The setting of P413 determines the gains of the speed regulator 161 0 00 and P162 0 01 5 When P408 1 or 2 observe the following If P413 20 then the Tm constant will be obtained as a function of the motor inertia memory stored value If P413 gt 0 then the value of P413 will not be changed during the self tuning routine Sensorless Vector Control P202 3 When the value of P413 obtained from the self tuning routine provides unsuitable gains for the speed regulator modify this parameter to better adjust the speed regulator gains The value of P161 provided by the self tuning routine or through the changing of P413 will be limited in the range 6 0 x P161 x 9 0 The valu
305. ly the maximum motor cable length for conducted emission clas ses 1 2 and according to EN61800 3 and the electromagnetic radiation disturbance level Controling and Signal Wiring Transforme FE Ground Rod Grid or Building Steel Structure Figure 3 18 Epcos EMC filters connection in CFW 09 frequency inverters 68 380 480 V power supply Inverter Model 3 6A 24 A 30A 38 A 9 45 A 9 60A 70A 86 A 105A 142A 8 180A 211A 240 A 312 8 361 450 515 600 Notes Maximum motor cable length according to conducted emission E EN61800 3 Epcos Input Filter B84143A8HR105 B84143A16R105 841434258105 B84143A36R105 B84143A50R105 B84143A66R105 B84143A90R105 B84143A120R105 B84143G150R110 B84143G220R110 84143 320520 84143 400520 84143 600520 84143 1000520 N A Not Applicable The inverters were not tested with these limits lt lt lt lt lt JA CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level Product Standard EN61800 3 1996 A11 2000 First environment restricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution Second environment unrestricted distribution First environment restricted distribution First environment restricted
306. mage 35 1 5 36 In this Manual qualified personnel defined as people that are trained to 1 Install ground power up and operate the CFW 09 according to this Manual and the local required safety procedures 2 Use of safety equipment according to the local regulations 3 Administer Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation CPR and First Aid DANGER Always disconnect the supply voltage before touching any electrical component inside the inverter Many components are charged with high voltages even after the incoming AC power supply has been disconnected or switched OFF Wait at least 10 minutes for the total discharge of the power capacitors Always connect the frame of the equipment to the ground PE at the suitable connection point ATTENTION All electronic boards have components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges Never touch any of the electrical components or connectors without following proper grounding procedures If necessary to do so touch the properly grounded metallic frame or use a suitable ground strap Do not apply High Voltage High Pot Test on the Inverter If this test is necessary contact WEG A AU NOTE Inverters can interfere with other electronic equipment In order to reduce this interference adopt the measures recommended in chapter 3 Installation and Connection NOTE Read this entire Manual carefully and
307. mm in mm 1145 1122 5 44 19 1124 5 44 27 11525 45 08 Figure 9 9 cont Size 8 and 8E dimensions in mm inch 354 in 38 58 45 37 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 9 DETAIL OF CUTOUT WITHOUT FLANGE 592 23 31 3x 9 102 3 54 542 21 34 344 13 54 620 24 41 647 25 47 A B 11 2 0 44 M10 11 2 0 44 M10 9 8 5 5 e cun 2 8 24 0 94 8 Air Flow outlet 1020 40 16 950 37 40 Air Flow inlet Figure 9 10 Size 9 dimensions in mm inch 355 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 10 AND 10E DETAIL OF CUTOUT WITHOUT FLANGE 40 1 57 40 1 57 E be i x 592 23 31 _ 152 5 98 350 13 78 548 21 57 350 13 78 626 24 65 656 25 83 A B 11 2 0 44 M10 11 2 0 44 M10 9 2 amp 9 24 0 94 Air Flow outlet 20 0 79 N To o 1185 46 65 1135 44 69 99 3 90 Air Flow inlet _____ 700 27 09 Dimensions Size 10 Size 10E 582 Figure 9 11 Size 10 and 10E dimensions in mm inch 356 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 180 A 240 A 380 480 V Models size 8 675 37 69 1099 50 1139 50 1087 50 5 a Xdimensions will depend on panel dimensions b The fixing pane
308. n isabl Bit 100 amp disable Stop 1 Ramp enable Start 0 General disable Bit 101 1 General enable Bit 102 0 Counter clockwise direction of rotation 1 Clockwise direction of rotation isabl Bit 103 0 JOG disable 1 JOG enable 0 Goes to local mode Bit 104 1 Goes to remote mode Bit 105 Not used Bit 106 Not used 0 does not reset inverter Bit 107 1 It resets inverter This Item describes in details the functions that are available in the CFW 09 for the Modbus RTU communication Please note the following during the message preparation Values are always transmitted as hexadecimal values The address of one data the data number and the value of the registers are always represented through 16 bits Thus these fields are transmitted by using two bytes high and low To access the bits and the form to represent one bit depend on the used function The messages both for enquiry and response cannot be longer than 128 bytes The resolution of each parameter or basic variable is as described in item 8 13 3 2 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 91431 Function 01 It reads the content of an internal group of bits that must compulsorily in Read Coils a numerical sequence This function has the following structure for the read and response messages the values are always hexadecimal and each filed represents one byte Query Master Response Slave Slave address Slave address
309. n the CFW 09 is not used according to this Manual No part of this Manual may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of WEG 22 SOFTWARE VERSION It is important to note the Software Version installed in the Version CFW 09 since it defines the functions and the programming parameters of the inverter This Manual refers to the Software version indicated on the inside cover For example the Version 1 0X applies to versions 1 00 to 1 09 where X is a variable that will change due to minor software revisions The operation of the CFW 09 with these software revisions are still covered by this version of the Manual The Software Version can be read in the Parameter P023 23 ABOUT THE CFW 09 The CFW 09 is a high performance Variable Frequency Inverter that permits the control of speed and torque of a three phase AC induction motor The technological advantage of the CFW 09 is due to the Vectrue technology that provides the following benefits Programmable scalar volts Hz or Vector Control with the same product Vector Control can be programmed for Sensorless that means that standard motors can be controlled without encoder feedback or Closed Loop with an encoder attached to the motor shaft 37 CHAPTER 2 GENERAL INFORMATION 38 The Sensorless Vector Control permits high torques and quick response even at very low speeds and during the starting of the motor The Optimal Braking function a
310. n the model CFW 09 in the option field Special Hardware refer to item 2 4 NOTE Hemember that the operation at higher currents than the rated current in variable Torque mode is not possible with all inverter types refer to items 9 1 2 and 9 1 3 Thus the HV option is only possible with the types that can be operated in that situation CFW 09 with DC Link inductor Dimensions mm _ Size 2 160 105 5 Size 3 Size 4 7 08 6 77 5 27 Size 5 193 5 Size 6 7 E T Size 8 325 240 221 5 80 5 Table 8 11 CFW 09 with DC Link inductor dimensions 8 8 LOAD REACTOR 8 9 HFIFILTER CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES The use of a three phase load reactor with an approximate 2 96 voltage drop decreases the dv dt voltage rising rate of the PWM pulses commonly generated atthe inverter output of any AC frequency converter This practice reduces the voltage spikes on the motor windings and leakage currents that may be generated when long distance cables between inverter and motor are used There are many factors that influence the peak level Vp and rise time tr of voltage spikes Cable type cable length motor size switching frequency and other variables all affect Vp and dv dt WEG as specialists in both VSDs and motors are able to provide an integrated solution The load reactor value is calculated in the same way as the line reactor refer to item 8 7 1 If the cables between inverter and motor
311. nce for option P309 1 or 4 2 0 it writes in 1 and 2 3 Status of the Digital Outputs 4 Number of the Parameter to be read for option P309 2 or 5 4 0 it writes in 1 2 and 4 5 Number of the Parameter to be changed 6 Content of the Parameter to be changed selected in the previous position for option P309 or 6 61 0 it writes in 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 1 Logical Control C L The word that defines the C L is formed by 16 bits being 8 bits of high orders and 8 bits of low orders and having the following construction High Order Bits they select the function that shall be driven when the bit is set to 1 CL 15 Inverter fault reset CL 14 Without function CL 13 To save the changes of the parameter P169 P170 in the EEPROM CL 12 Local Remote control CL 11 Jog control CL 10 Direction of rotation CL 09 General enabling CL 08 Start Stop Low Order Bits they determine the status that is wanted for the function selected in the high order bits CL 7 Inverter fault reset always it varies from 0 1 an inverter reset is caused with the presence of faults except E24 E25 E26 e E27 CL 6 No function STOP detection is not necessary to activate the correspondent upper bit refer to the description of parameter P310 CL 5 To save P169 P170 in the EEPROM 0 to save 1 to not save CL 4 Local Remote control 0 Local 1 Remote CL 3 Jog control 0 Inacti
312. nd on panel dimensions y b The fixing panel supports identified by are not supplied with KME Kit These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified Figure 9 12 d KIT KME for Size 8E Panel Width 800 mm 31 50 in 360 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 312 Ato 361 A 380 480 V size 9 Models 688 00 370 494 70 69 00 275 00 275 00 69 00 4 1 E 1116 50 1133 50 MIT 092 79 00 5 a dimensions will depend on panel 075 00 dimensions b The fixing panel supports identified by Y are not supplied with KME Kit These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified 010 00 075 00 Figure 9 13 for Size 9 Panel Width 800 mm 31 50 in and 1000 39 37 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 450 A to 600 A 380 480 V Models size 10 700 00 37 70 494 70 75 00 075 00 215 00 75 00 1358 50 1317 00 1297 00 02 092 79 0 40 5 dimensions will depend on panel 275 00 dimensions b The fixing panel supports identified by X and not supplied with KME Kit These should be constructed according to panel dimensions and with fixing holes as specified 010 00 212 00 275 275 00 210 00 10 00 2 Figure 9 14 for Size 10 Panel W
313. ne end of the shielding to the inverter grounding point and the other end to the motor frame Motor frame Always ground the motor frame Ground the motor in the panel where the inverter is installed or ground it to the inverter The inverter output wiring must be laid separately from the input wiring as well as from the control and signal cables ATTENTION For IT networks also Known as ungrounded or high earthing impedance networks it is necessary to consider the following Models 180 A to 600 A 380 480 V 2 9 Ato 79 A 500 600 V 107 Ato 472 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 428 A 660 690 V have a varistor and capacitor connected between input phase and ground that must be disconnected if an IT network is used for that remove the jumper as shown in figure 3 11 500 600 V 500 690 V 660 690 V models the jumper is accessible taking out models 2 9 Ato 14 A 500 600 V or opening models 22 Ato 79 A 500 600 V 107 Ato 211 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 179 A 660 690 V the front cover or taking out the connections cover 247 Ato 472 A 500 600 V and 225A to 428 A 660 690 V In models 180 Ato 600 A 380 480 V besides opening or taking out the front cover s it is required to remove the control board mounting plate shield The external RFI filters that are necessary in order to fulfill the requirements of European EMC Directive as stated in item 3 3 cannot be used with IT networks The user must check and assume the responsibili
314. nected to one another on the same metallic backplane The wiring between them should be kept as short as possible Two filters are suggested Epcos and Schaffner detailed on the following items 3 3 2 and 3 3 3 Figures 3 18 and 3 19 present a connection diagram for EMC filters Epcos and Schaffner respectively 67 CHAPTER INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Description of conducted emission classes according to the standard EN61800 3 Class B first environment unrestricted distribution Class 1 first environment restricted distribution Class A2 second environment unrestricted distribution ATTENTION For installation with inverters that complies class A1 first environment restricted distribution note that this is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according to IEC EN61800 3 1996 A11 2000 In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures ATTENTION For installation with inverters that complies class A2 second environment unrestricted distribution note that this product is not intended to be used on low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if used on such a network 3 3 2 Epcos Filters The following tables 3 9 3 10 and 3 11 show the Epcos filters for CFW 09 frequency inverters with 380 480 V 500 600 V and 660 690 V power supply respective
315. ng several CFW 09 inverters will be based on the device address on the network Related errors The EtherNet IP uses the same error codes as the other Fieldbus protocols i e E29 and E30 E29 Fieldbus communication is off E30 Communication board is off For detailed information refer to the item 8 12 7 3 ME NOTE The inverter will indicate E29 only when the connection with the master is lost The inverter will not indicate this error while no connection has been established Control and Monitoring Through the WEB The EtherNet IP communication board has an HTTP server internally This means that the communication board can serve HTML pages In such a way it is possible to configure network parameters control and monitor the CFW 09 inverter through a WEB browser installed in a computer connected to the same network of the inverter Use the same read write variables of the inverter to perform these operations refer to items 8 12 7 1 and 8 12 7 2 NOTE For the first WEB access use the factory default username and password Username web Password web CFW 09 Frequency Inverter Mozilla Firefox Arquivo Editar Exibir Ir Favoritos Ferramentas Ajuda e e DX http 192 168 0 1 webjindex_weg htm gt CFW 09 Frequency Inverter CFW 09 Frequency Inverter EtherNet IP Communication Board This web page allows you to configure CFW 09 on the network monitor drive status send commands to CFW 09
316. nly Keypad Remote Keypad and Cables Blank Cover RS 232 PC Communication kit The accessories comprise Encoder Line Reactor DC Bus Choke Load Reactor and RFI filter boards for Fieldbus communication kit for extractable assembling NEMA AX IP56 line HD and RB and PLC board line The I O expansion boards expand the function of the CC9 control board There are four different I O expansion boards available and their selection depends on the application and extended functions that are required The four boards cannot be used simultaneously The difference between EBA and EBB option boards is in the analog inputs outputs The EBC1 board is used for the encoder connection The board is for RS 485 and motor A detailed description of each board is provided below The EBA board can be supplied in different configurations combining some specific features The available configurations are show on table 8 1 EBA Board models Code Included Features EBA 01 EBA 02 E 03 A1 A2 Differential input for incremental encoder with isolated internal 12 V power Not ym Available available available Buffered encoder output signals isolated input signal repeater differential Available Not Not output available to external 5 V to 15 V power supply available available Analog differential input 14 bits 0 006 of the full scale range bipolar Not 10 V to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA programmable AVANADE available
317. nts used to form the overload curve as shown in figure 6 18 with the factory default levels 139 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes This overload curve adjustment improves the protection of self ventilated motors or it can be programmed with a constant overload level at any speed for blower cooled motors This curve is changed when P406 Ventilation Type is changed during the start up subroutine Refer to item 5 2 160 4 0 or 1 WE NT Optimization of the 0 Speed Regulator for torque control Maintain Normal 160 0 Standard Operation Speed Regulator Normal or Saturated Saturated Set P160 1 P202 4 Set P160 0 P202 3 Speed reference setting Refer to the text below Setting of the desired Torque Refer to the text below Figure 6 19 Torque control Speed Regulator operating with Current Limitation Saturated for torque limitation purposes The speed reference shall be set to value at least 10 higher than the working speed It ensures that the output of the speed regulator will be equal to the maximum allowed value set for the maximum torque current 169 or P170 or external limitation through Al2 or AI3 In such way the regulator will operate with current limitation i e saturated When the speed regulator is positively saturated i e in the forward direction set in P223
318. o 1 s gt 99 9 s Table 6 65 Suggestions for gain settings of the PID regulator UP NOTES 1 For temperature and level control the action type will depend on the process For instance in the level control when the inverter drives the motor that removes fluid from a tank the action will be contrary as when the inverter drives the motor that fills a tank and thus the fluid level increases and the inverter should increase the motor speed to lower the fluid level otherwise the inverter action that drives the pump motor to pump fluid into the tank will be direct 2 In case of level control the setting of the integral gain will depend on the time required to fill the tank from the minimum acceptable level up the desired level in the following conditions For the direct action the time should be measured by considering the maximum input flow and the minimum output flow the inverse action the time should be measured by considering the minimum input flow and the maximum output flow The equation to calculate an initial value for P521 PID Integral Gain as a function of the system response time is presented below P521 0 02 t t time seconds 0 or 1 It selects the feedback input Process Variable of the PID regulator 0 d Alx AI2 P237 to P240 AI3 P241 to P244 Table 6 66 Feedback selection 223 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P525 Keypad
319. o 4 mA P240 Analog Input AI2 Offset 100 0 to 100 0 167 P241 09 Analog Input AI3 Function 0 P221 P222 0 P221 P222 167 Requires Optional I O Expansion 1 Without ramp Board EBB 2 Maximum Torque Current 3 PID Process Variable 4 Maximum Torque Current Al2 P242 Analog Input AI3 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 168 P243 Analog Input AI3 Signal 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 0 0 to 10 168 1 4 10 20 0 10 20 10100 20 to 0 mA 20 10 4 244 Analog Input AI3 Offset 100 0 to 100 0 E 168 245 Analog Input Al4 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 aooo 1 168 P246 Analog Input AI4 Signal 0 to 10 0 to 20 O 0 to 10 168 Requires Optional I O Expansion 1 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Board EBA 2 10 to 0 V 20 to 0 mA 3 20 to 4 mA 4 10 to 10 V P247 Analog Input Al4 Offset 100 0 to 4100 0 0 169 P248 Input Filter Al2 0 0 to 16 0 0 J 169 Analog Outputs P239 Analog Input Al2 Signal 0 1 2 251 Analog Output 1 Function 0 Speed Reference 2 Real Speed 169 CC9 or EBB board 1 Total Reference 2 Real Speed 3 Torque Current Reference Vector 4 Torque Current Vector 5 Output Current 6 PID Process Variable 7 Active Current V F 8 Power kW 9 PID Setpoint 10 Positive Torque Current 11 Motor Torque 12 PLC 13 Dead Zone for S
320. o P134 600 500 1 rpm P133 to P134 900 750 1 rpm P133 to P134 1200 1000 1 rpm P133 to P134 1500 1250 1 rpm P133 to P134 1800 1500 1 P133 to P134 1650 1375 1 Description Notes During the JOG or JOG commands the values of P122 or P123 respectively added to or subtracted from the speed reference to generate the total reference Refer to figure 6 26 These parameters P124 to P131 are shown only when P221 8 and or P222 8 Multispeed Multispeed is used when the selection of a number up to 8 of pre programmed speeds 15 desired If you want to use only 2 or 4 speeds any input combination of 014 015 and DI6 can be used The input s programmed for other function s must be considered as 0 V in the table 6 5 It allows control of the speed by relating the values programmed in parameters P124 to P131 10 logical combination of the Digital Inputs The advantages of this function are stability of the fixed references and electrical noise immunity isolated digital inputs DIx Multispeed function is active when P221 Local Mode or P222 Remote Mode is set to 8 5 Digital Input Programming 266 7 DI5 P267 7 DI6 P268 7 8 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds OV Pied 24 24 130 Table 6 5 Multispeed references CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Paramet
321. o P211 to P213 When the setpoint of the PID regulator is by HMI P221 P222 0 and P536 is zero active by commutating from manual to automatic the process variable value will be loaded at P525 In this way you prevent PID oscillations during the commutation from Manual to Automatic P536 Action Type 0 Active 1 Inactive Table 6 69 Automatic set of P525 When the Set Point value is equal to the Process Variable and it is within the range defined by the hysteresis value set at parameter P537 the digital or relay output set to the option Set Point 2 Process Variable SP PV is activated and remains in this condition until the process variable reaches a value outside of the hysteresis range refer to figure 6 39 v UE NOTE This function is enabled only in the automatic mode and when P203 1 It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs Process Variable VPx and Process Variable VPy 227 7 7 1 FAULTS AND POSSIBLE CAUSES DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter assists the user to identify and correct possible faults that can occur during the CFW 09 operation Guidance on Preventive Maintenance is also provided When a fault is detected the inverter is disabled and the Fault Code is displayed on the readout in the EXX form where XX is the actual Fault Code ie EO1 To restart the inverter after a fault has occurred the inverter must be reset The r
322. o be used to write a single register the values are always hexadecimal values and each field represents one byte Query Master Response Slave Slave address Slave Address Function Function Initial register address byte high Initial register address byte high Initial register address byte low Initial register address byte low Number of registers byte high Number of registers byte high Number of registers byte low Number of registers byte low Byte Count Field number of data bytes CRC Data 1 high CRC Data 1 low Data 2 high Data 2 low etc to CRC CRC Example writing of the acceleration time P100 1 0 s and deceleration time P101 2 0 s of a CFW 09 at the address 20 Query Master Response Slave Field Value Slave address Slave address 14h Initial register byte high 00h Initial register byte high 00h Initial register byte low 64h 64h Number of registers byte high 00h 00h Number of registers byte low 02h Byte Count 02h P100 high D2h P100 low GAN __ P101 high __ ___ 101 E wem no u 2 CRC x o e Log qe cL As the two parameters have a resolution of a decimal place for writing of 1 0 and 2 0 seconds thus the values 10 000Ah and 20 0014h should be transmitted 325 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 14 3 7 Function 43 Read Auxiliary function that permits reading of the manufacturer model and version
323. oard DPS3 00 541512951 Gate Resistor Board CRG7 00 S41512798 Gate Resistor Board CRG6 00 CO C2 88 28 C2 541512821 Board FCB1 00 541512999 Board FCB1 01 2 541512803 00 541512846 Rectifier Snubber Board RCS3 00 541512890 Signal Interface Board 151 08 541512891 Signal Interface Board CIS1 09 9 541512894 SignalineraceBoadCISTig 541512895 Signal Interface Board 151 13 641512896 Signal Interface Board CIS1 14 641512963 Gate Driver Board GDB1 00 5417102023 HMI LED Optional 1 541513011 2 00 ional 5417102036 Kit KMR Optional 541512897 Signal Interface Board 151 15 41510226 Interface board with HMI Optional 541510110 Function Expansion Board Optional 541511761 Function Expansion Board Optional 541511770 Function Expansion Board Optional 541510200 Function Expansion Board Optional 541511788 Function Expansion Board Optional 541511796 Function Expansion Board Optional 247 8 1 I O EXPANSION BOARDS 8 1 1 EBA I O Expansion Board CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES This chapter describes the optional devices that are available for the CFW 09 and the accessories that may be necessary in specific applications Options include the Expanded I O Boards LED o
324. ode LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION selected Inverter Rated Voltage 1 380 V Exit the programming mode Motor Rated Voltage 0 to 690 V Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated Voltage 380 V Exit the programming mode Motor Rated Current Range 0 0 to 1 30 x P295 Enter the programming mode 95 CHAPTER 5 START UP ACTION Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated current value Press the Gros key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode N Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the noc key to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to set the correct motor rated frequency value PROC Press the to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the key to go to the next parameter Press the key to enter the programming mode 96 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Programmed Motor Rated Current 7 9A Exit the programming mode Motor Rated Frequency Range 0 to 300 Hz Enter the programming mode Programmed Motor Rated Frequency 60 Hz Exit the programming mode Motor Rated rom Range O to 18000 rpm Enter the programming mode Use the Q and keys to set the correct motor rated rom value PROC Press the key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode N Press
325. of operation 3 If the inverter is stored for long periods we recommend to power it up once a year during 1 hour For 220 230 V and 380 480 V models apply supply voltage of approximately 220 Vac three phase or single phase input 50 or 60 Hz without connecting motor at output After this energization wait 24 hours before installing it For 500 600 V 500 690 V and 660 690 V models use the same procedure applying a voltage between 300 V and 330 Vac to the inverter input When necessary clean the CFW 09 following the instructions below Cooling system Remove AC power from the inverter and wait 10 minutes Remove all dust from the ventilation openings by using a plastic bush or a soft cloth Remove dust accumulated on the heat sink fins and from the blower blades with compressed air Electronic Boards Remove AC power form the inverter and wait 10 minutes Remove all dust from the printed circuit boards by using an anti static soft brush or remove it with an ionized compressed air gun If necessary remove the PCBs from the inverter Always use a ground strap CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING 75 SPARE PART LIST Models 220 230 V Types Name hem v Specification re 7 39 18 16 2428146 Units per Inverter 500 5275 Fan 0400 3681 Length 255 60x60 __ 1 t ta Fan _5000 5292 Fan 0400 3679 Length 165 40x40 fifili 5000 5267 Fan 0400 3
326. ofessional applications only Therefore the harmonic current emissions defined by the standards EN 61000 3 2 and EN 61000 3 2 A 14 do not apply NOTE The 500 600 V models are intended to be connected to an industrial low voltage power supply network or public network which does not supply buildings used for domestic purpose second environment according to the EN61800 3 standard The filters specified in items 3 3 2 and 3 3 3 do not apply to the 500 600 V models For installing the frequency inverters in accordance to the Product Standard EN61800 3 the following items are required 1 Output cables motor wiring must be flexible armored or to be installed inside a metallic conduit or in a tray with equivalent attenuation 2 The control inputs and outputs and signal wiring must be shielded or installed inside a metallic conduit or a tray with equivalent attenuation 1115 essential to follow the grounding recommendations presented in this manual 4 For first environment low voltage public network install an RFI filter radio frequency interference filter at inverter input 5 For second environment industrial areas and unrestricted distribution EN61800 3 install an RFI filter at inverter input NOTE The use of a filter requires Thecable s shielding must be solidly connected to the common backplane using brackets The inverter and the filter must be mounted in close proximity electrically con
327. oftware or via HMI CAN interface with CANopen and DeviceNet protocols Master Slave function ElectronicGear Box It has own 32 bits CPU with flash memory HNN AN AAA Position 1 Speed t to t Position 3 t t 12 PEAB t tot t V2 mm om n 4 Position 2 t to t Figure 8 60 Trajectory example by using the PLC board Technical Specification PLC 1 PLC 2 Digital inputs 24 Vdc bipolar 24 Vdc bipolar 250 Vac 3 A ou 250 Vdc 3 A Transistorized outputs E 24 Vdc 500 mA Exc Encoder power supply 1 e tee 12 bits 10 V to 10 V or to 20 mA Note For more details refer to the PLC Board Manual The manual is available in the site www weg net 250 Vac 3 A or Relay outputs 250 Vdc 3 A 24 Vdc 500 mA Analog output 14 bits 10 V to 10 V or Analog input es to 20 mA Motor PTC isolated input Motor PTC isolated input 335 9 1 9 1 1 Power Supply Specifications 336 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the technical specifications electrical and mechanical of the 09 inverter series Operating voltage range 220 230 V 380 480 V and 660 690 V models 15 to 10 96 500 600 V models up to 32 A 15 of rated input voltage up to 690 V 500 600 V models higher or equal to 44 A 500 V 15 96 to 15
328. on 0 Direct 0 Direct User s 224 1 Reverse P528 Process Variable Scale Factor 9999 1000 225 529 Decimal Point of Proc Var 003 25 P530 Engineering Unit of Proc Var 1 32 to 127 ASCII 37 226 0 1 9 531 Engineering Unit of Proc Var 2 32 to 127 ASCII 32 blank 226 A By OF 1 249 532 Engineering Unit of Proc Var 3 32 to 127 ASCIl 32 blank 226 A B 0 1 9 T gt P533 Value of Proc Var X 0 0 to 100 900 P534 Value of Proc Var Y 0 0 to 100 1 1 0 P535 532 41 144 1 Inactive P537 Hysteresis for Set point 1 to 100 PL 227 Process Variable Notes presented on Quick Parameter Description 1 Parameter can be changed only with the inverter disabled motor stopped 2 Values may change as a function of the Motor Parameters 3 Values may change as a function of P413 Tm Constant obtained during Self tuning 4 Values may change as a function of P409 and P411 obtained during Self tuning 5 Values may change as a function of P412 Tr Constant obtained during Self tuning 6 Values may change as a function of P296 7 Values may change as a function of P295 8 Values may change as a function of P203 9 Values may change as a function of P320 10 User s Standard for new inverters without parameter 11 Th
329. on and load changes thus avoiding nuisance tripping due to overcurrent The adjustments necessary for a good sensorless control operation are made automatically The Vector Control with Encoder Feedback offers the same advantages as the Sensorless Control described above with the following additional benefits Torque and speed control down to zero speed rpm Accuracy of 0 01 in the speed control The closed loop vector control with encoder requires the use of the optional board EBA or EBB for encoder connection Refer to chapter 8 OPTIMAL BRAKING This setting allows controlled motor braking within shortest possible times without using other means such as DC Link chopper with braking resistor for more details about this function refer to P151 chapter 6 The inverter is supplied with this function set at maximum This means that the braking is disabled To enable the braking set P151 according to table 6 8 The sequence below is based on the example in item 5 2 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Inverter is ready to be enabled Enables the access to change parameters content With the factory default programming P200 1 Password Active must be set to 5 to allow parameters changes Enter the programming mode ACTION Use the and keys to set the password value Press the PROS to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the keys or
330. on the inverter cover or remotely If the keypad is installed remotely the HMI 09 Frame can be used The use of this frame improves the visual aspect of the remote keypad as well as provides a local power supply to eliminate voltage drop problems with long cables It is necessary to use the frame when the keypad cable is longer than 5 m 15 ft The table below shows the standard cable lengths and their part numbers Cable Length WEG Part N 1m 3 ft 0307 6890 2 m 6 ft 0307 6881 3m 10 ft 0307 6873 5 15 ft 0307 6865 7 5 22 ft 0307 6857 10 m 30 ft 0307 6849 These cables require the use of the remote HMI 09 frame Table 8 6 CFW 09 keypad cables The keypad cable must be installed separately from the power cables following the same recommendations as for the CC9 control board refer to item 3 2 6 For assembling refer to details in figure 8 13 and 8 14 258 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Figure 8 13 Standard HMI remote HMI frame kit and HMI CFW09 LCD 4 for panel installation To meet NEMA 250 and IEC 60529 the HMI can be supplied with two specific degrees of protection a Dimensions of the HMI CFW09 LED LCD with NEMA 5 IP51 degree of protection Keypad Dimensions 23 09 d _ 19 0 75 Cutout Dimensions for Panel Front View Back View Door Installation 4 0 2x Figure 8 14 a Keypad dimensions in mm inch and mounting procedures 259 CHAP
331. ong estimation of P412 Lr Tr Constant and P413 Mechanical Time Constant Tm overcurrent fault E00 may also occur during the inverter operation Note The word load represents anything coupled to the motor shaft such as a gearbox an inertia wheel etc Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit P409 0 000 to 77 95 Motor Stator Resistance 0 000 Rs 0 0010 This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 4 Vector Control a 5 VVW CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes Run for Tm The value of parameter P413 Mechanical Time Constant Tm is measured with the motor rotating It shall be run preferentially with the load coupled to the motor Measure Tm It estimates only the value of P413 Mechanical Time Constant Tm with the motor rotating It shall be run preferentially with the load coupled to the motor NOTES When P408 1 or 2 The parameter P413 Mechanical Time Constant Tm is set to an approximated value of the motor mechanical time constant The value of this parameter is set based on the motor rotor inertia table data is valid for WEG motors on the Drive Rated Current and on the Drive Rated Voltage Vector with Encoder Control P202 4 When P408 is set to option 2 Run for Imr and the self tuning routine is finished itis mandatory to couple the load to the motor and set parameter P408 to 4 Measure Tm in order to
332. only if an optional DeviceNet Drive Output Word 3 0 Profile communication kit were used The parameters P341 to P345 permit programming the content of the P342 Output Word 4 output words 3 to 7 output the master sends to the inverter Using these parameters it is possible to program the number of another P343 parameter whose content must be made available at the network master Output Word 5 Hd dee For instance if one wishes to write the acceleration ramp value in the P344 CFW 09 inverter one must program the value 100 in one of these Output Word 6 parameters because the parameter P100 is the one where this data is programmed It is worthwhile to remind that the value read from any P345 parameter is represented with a 16 bit word with sign in two s Output Word 7 complement Even if the parameter has decimal resolution the value is transmitted without the indication of the decimal point E g if one wishes to write value 5 0s in the parameter P100 the value programmed via the network must be 50 These parameters are used only if the inverter were programmed to use the instances 102 103 and if the number of input output words programmed in P346 were greater than 2 In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface refer to the CFW 09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual P346 2 to 7 This parameter is applicable onl
333. only valid for 500 690 V and 660 690 V Auto reset models refer to figures 3 7 f and g v Dix Serial v Fieldbus When the PLC board stops communicating with the CFW 09 for more than 200 ms Table 7 1 cont Faults and possible causes Notes 1 E03 Fault can occur only with 220 230 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 45A 380 480 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 30 500 600 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 22A 500 690 V Models 660 690 V Models P214 set to 1 2 In case of E04 Fault due to inverter overtemperature allow the inverter to cool before trying to reset it The E04 fault code can also indicate a failure in the pre charge circuit But this is valid only for 220 230 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 70 A 380 480 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 86 A 500 690 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 107 A 660 690 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 1000 A The failure in the pre charge circuit means that the pre charge contactor sizes up 10 130 220 230 V 142 A 380 480 V and 79 A 500 600 V or pre charge thyristor sizes above 130 A 220 230 V 142 A 380 480 V 500 690 V and 660 690 V is not closed thus overheating the pre charge resistors 3 For 220 230 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 16 380 480 V Models with rated current equal or higher than 1
334. or of the Start Stop speed regulator P354 Accepted only 55 gt P356 y P356 RLx or DOx Output brake activation Speed Reference Real Brake Real Speed Time Figure 6 39 cont s Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions 191 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION t gt 1 P369 P370 Fx P369 P369 P370 Relay Transistor OFF OFF v Set Point Process Variable Relay Transistor OFF gt _2 369 P369 P370 Relay Transistor OFF 040 P537 P525 P537 OFF Figure 6 39 cont t to v Details about the operation of the digital and relay output functions 192 Parameter P287 Hysteresis for Nx Ny P288 20 Nx Speed P289 2 11 Ny Speed P290 Ix Current P291 Zero Speed Zone P292 N N Band At Speed Band P293 Tx Torque P294 Hours Hx CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 0 0 to 5 0 Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions d N Nx N Ny and Mechanical Brake Logic 0 to P134 Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions 120 100 1 rpm N gt Nx gt Nx and lt Ny 0 to P134 1800 1500 1 rom 0 0 to 2 0 x P295 Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions 1 0 x P295 Is gt Ix and Is Ix
335. ote Mode If the JOG command is selected for to 018 one of the Digital Inputs must be programmed as follows Digital Input Parameters DIS P265 3 JOG P266 3 JOG P267 3 JOG DIG P268 3 JOG DI7 P269 3 JOG DI8 P270 2 3 JOG Table 6 3 JOG Command selected by digital input During the JOG command the motor accelerates to the value defined at P122 following the acceleration ramp setting The direction of rotation is defined by the Forward Reverse function P223 or P226 JOG is effective only with the motor at standstill The JOG and JOG commands are always via Digital Inputs One Dlx must be programmed for JOG and another for JOG as follows Parameters Digital Inputs JOG JOG DIS P265 10 P265 11 266 10 266 11 P267 10 P267 11 DIG P268 10 P268 11 DI7 P269 10 P269 11 DI8 P270 10 P270 11 Table 6 4 JOG and JOG command selection CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P124 2 11 Multispeed Reference 1 P125 02 11 Multispeed Reference 2 P126 11 Multispeed Heference 3 P127 200 Multispeed Heference 4 P128 2 11 Multispeed Heference 5 P129 02 11 Multispeed Reference 6 P130 9 11 Multispeed Heference 7 P131 90 Multispeed Heference 8 126 Range Factory Setting Unit P133 to P134 90 75 1 rpm P133 to P134 300 250 1 rpm P133 t
336. p to 1800 for 4 pole motors Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm and then reverses the direction of rotation accelerating back up to 1800 rpm Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to the speed set at P122 Ex P122 2 150 rpm CCW direction of rotation Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm 5 3 3 Type of Control VVW Keypad Operation CHAPTER 5 START UP NOTES 1 P401 maximum value 15 1 8 x P295 for model 4 2 500 600 V and 1 6 x P295 for models 7 A and 54 A 220 230 V 2 9 A and 7 A 500 600 V 107 A 147 Aand 247 A 500 690 V 100A 127 Aand 340 A 660 690 V 2 The self tuning routine can be cancelled by pressing the 0 key 3 The last speed reference value set via the and 15 If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter change parameter P121 Keypad Reference 4 If 201 fault occurs during deceleration you must increase deceleration time at P101 P103 OBSERVATION If the rotation direction of the motor is not correct switch off the inverter Wait 10 minutes to allow a complete discharge of the capacitors and swap any two wires at the motor output If motor is equipped with an encoder change the phase of the encoder connections exchange channel A and A ATTENTION In Vector Mode P202 3 or 4 when the command STOP START STOP is enabled refer to figure 6 37 the motor will decelerate up to zero speed but it mainta
337. parameter 001 Total Speed Reference Sum of the speed references P001 without ramp JOG JOG JOG See figure 6 26 185 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes Nx P288 Speed Nx User selected speed reference point Ny P289 Speed Ny User selected speed reference point Ix P290 Current Ix User selected current reference point 15 Motor Current Torque 009 Motor Torque Tx P293 Torque Tx User selected torque reference point Vpx P533 Process Variable x User selected reference point Vpy P534 Process Variable y User selected reference point Nt Total Reference Refer to figure 6 26 after all scalings offsets additions etc Hx P294 Hours Hx PLC Refer to PLC board manual Fx P370 Frequency Fx Frequency reference defined by the user P283 0 0 to 300 Used in the function as Relay Output Timer of the relay 2 3 When the timing function of the relays 2 and 3 is programmed at any DIx and when the transition is effected from 0 V to 24 V the relay will P284 0 0 to 300 be enabled according to the time set at P283 RL2 or P285 RL3 Tim for RLOOEE 0 01 When the transition from 24 V to 0 V occurs the programmed relay will 0 1 5 be disabled according to the time set at P284 RL2 or P286 RL3 P285 0 0 to 300 After the DIx transition to enable or disabl
338. parameters P237 4 and 241 4 the torque current limit P169 and 170 is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs and Al2 Note The range of the sum between Al2 and 3 may vary from 0 to 180 If the sum result is negative then the value will be set to zero Refer to P234 P243 Switch S4 1 EBB 0 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA Off On On 2 3 20 10 4 Table 6 38 Al3 signal selection When a current signal is used at the Analog Input set the 54 1 switch on the EBB board to ON Options 2 3 provide an inverse reference with which 15 possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference Refer to P234 M Refer to P234 243 Switch 2 1 0 OFF ON 1 ON 2 OFF ON 3 20 to 4 mA ON 4 10 to 10 V OFF Table 6 39 Al4 signal selection CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes When a current signal is used at the Analog Input set the switch 52 1 on the EBA board to ON Options 2 and provide an inverse reference with which is possible to have maximum speed with minimum reference Refer to P234 It sets the time constant of the RC Filter of the Input Al2 refer to figure 6 29 Check possible options on table 6 40 Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit P247 100 0 to 100 0 Analog Input Al4 0 0 Offset 0 1 96 P248 0 0 to 16 0 Filter Input Al2 0 0 0 15 251 010 14 Analo
339. peed Indication 14 Motor Voltage 252 Analog Output AO1 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 0 2 d P253 Analog Output AO2 Function 0 Speed Reference 5 Output Current 169 CC9 or EBB board 1 Total Reference 2 Real Speed 3 Torque Current Reference Vector 16 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Functi Adjustable R Unit unction justable Range Setting ni Setting age u 14 Motor Voltage i P254 Analog Output AO2 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 P255 Analog Output Function 0 Speed Reference 2 Real Speed Requires Optional I O Expansion 1 Total Reference Board EBA 2 Real Speed 3 Torque Current Reference Vector 4 Torque Current Vector 5 Output Current 6 PID Process Variable 7 Active Current V F 8 Power kW 9 PID Setpoint 10 Positive Torque Current 11 Motor Torque 12 PLC 13 Not Used 14 Motor Voltage 15 to 63 Exclusive WEG use P256 Analog Output AO3 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 b ch cho 140 P257 Analog Output AO4 Function 0 Speed Reference 5 Output Current Requires optional I O Expansion 1 Total Reference Board EBA 2 Real Speed 3 Torque Current Parameters 4 Torque Current Vector 5 Output Current 6 PID Process Variable 7 Active Current V F 8 Power kW 9 PID Setpoint 10 Positive Torque Current 11 Motor Torque 12 PLC 13 Dead Zone for Speed Indication Reference Vector 4 Torque Current Vecto
340. pical Terminal Connections 64 3 3 European EMC Directive Requirements for Conforming Installations 67 SPON MIeiirzi 2 cr 67 3 9 2 EPCOS FIGS din ia BU one 68 9 9 9 T LOTES ciui 71 3 3 4 EMC Filter 51 5 74 CHAPTER 4 Keypad HMI Operation 4 1 Description of the 86 4 2 Use of the Keypad 88 4 2 1 Keypad Ebr Eo ea upon 88 4 2 2 Read Only Variables and Status 89 4 2 3 Parameter Viewing and Programming 90 CHAPTER 5 Start up 5 Pre Pow r 93 5 2 93 53 A 98 5 3 1 Type of Control 60 Hz Operation Keypad HMI 99 5 3 2 Type of Control Sensorless or Vector with Encoder Operation Via Keypad 102 5 3 3 of Control VVW Keypad Operation 109 CHAPTER 6 Detailed Parameter Description 6 1 Access and Read Only Parameters to P099
341. potentials ENCODER CONNECTION Refer to item 8 2 INSTALLATION The EBB board is installed on the CC9 control board secured with spacers and connected via Terminal blocks XC11 24 V and XC3 JE NOTE For the CFW 09 Size 1 Models 7 A 10 and 13 220 230 V and 3 6 A 5 5 A and 9 A 380 480 V the plastic cover must be removed to install the EBB board 252 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Mounting Instructions 1 2 3 Set the board configuration via 54 55 56 and S7 dip switches refer to table 8 4 a Carefully insert terminal block XC3 EBB into the female connector of the control board Check that all pins fit in the XC3 connector Press on the EBB board near XC3 and on the left top edge until com plete insertion of the connector and plastic spacer Secure the board to the metallic spacers with the screws provided Plug XC11 connector of the EBB board to the XC11 connector of the CC9 control board EBB BOARD f M3 x 8 Screw J 1 Torque j Figure 8 6 EBB board installation procedure 253 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Switch ON 94 1 Speed reference 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA 5 1 and 55 2 AO1 Speed m 56 1 56 2 2 Motor Current FO RUIMA S7 1 and 57 2 Without termination With termination 120 Q Factory default Obs Each group of switches must be set
342. pply Electromagnetic radiation disturbance level Conducted Product Standard EN61800 Emission 3 1996 Class 1 Common mode Ferrite Input filter Optional Model Device 6A No FN 3258 7 45 No No First environment restricted B 7 FN 3258 16 45 First environment restricted B 10A distribution 13A 24 distribution distribution FN 3258 100 35 2 x Schaffner 203 A1 1151 042 filter distribution 45A EBA FN 3258 100 35 input output sides RS 485 2 x Schaffner 203 First environment restricted A1 Serial Interface 1151 042 filter distribution input output sides 45 A EBB FN 3258 100 35 2 x Schaffner 203 First environment restricted A1 1151 042 filter distribution input output sides Schaffner 203 1151 042 choke 2 turns in the control cable 2 x Schaffner 203 First environment restricted A1 1151 042 distribution filter input output sides 54 A No FN 3258 100 35 No No Yes Second environment A1 70A unrestricted distribution 86 A FN 3258 130 35 2 Schaffner 203 Yes First environment restricted 1 1151 042 Schaffner distribution Filter output side 203 1151 042 UVW 105A No FN 3359 150 28 2 X Schaffner 203 2X Yes First environment restricted A1 1151 042 Schaffner distribution Filter output side 203 1151 042 UVW 130A No FN 3359 250 28 2 X Schaffner 167 2 Yes First environment restricted 1 1151 043 Schaffner distr
343. r 5 Output Current 6 PID Process Variable 7 Active Current V F 8 Power kW 9 PID Setpoint 10 Positive Torque Current 11 Motor Torque 12 PLC 13 Not Used 14 Motor Voltage 15 to 63 Exclusive WEG use P258 Analog Output AO4 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 Ce 170 259 Dead Zone for Speed Indication 0 to P134 1000 rom 17 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Ep mucus Adiustable Ran En arameters justapie nange Setting Setting age Digital Inputs P263 Digital Input DI1 Function 0 Not Used 1 Start Stop 172 1 Start Stop 2 General Enable 3 Fast Stop 264 0 8 Digital Input 012 Function 0 FWD REV 0 FWD REV 172 1 Local Remote 2 Not Used 3 Not Used 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Reverse Run 265 8 Digital Input Function 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 172 1 Local Remote 2 General Enable 3 JOG 4 No External Fault 5 Increase E P 6 Ramp 2 7 Used 8 Forward Run 9 Speed Torque 10 JOG 11 JOG 12 Reset 13 Fieldbus 14 Start 3 wire 15 Man Auto 16 Not used 17 Disables Flying Start 18 DC Voltage Regulator 19 Parameter Setting Disable 20 Load user 21 Timer RL2 22 Timer RLS P266 Digital Input DI4 Function 0 Not used 0 Not Used 172 1 2 Local Remote 2 General Enable 3 JOG 4 No external Fault 5 Decrease E P 6 Ramp 2 7 Multispeed MSO
344. r 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Resolution 10 bits Programmable Functions Incremental Encoder Feedback Input Internal 12 Vdc 200 mA max isolated power supply Differential inputs signals A A B B Z and Z 100 kHz max 14 bits resolution Used as speed feedback for the speed regulator and digital speed measurement 1 Programmable Isolated 24 Digital Input 077 1 Programmable Digital Input DI8 For motor PTC thermistor Actuation 3 9 kQ Release 1 6 kQ 11 bits 0 05 96 of full scale Programmable Functions same as AO1 and 2 of CC9 control board Buffered Encoder Output Input signal repeater Isolated differential outputs 2 Isolated Transistor Outputs DO1 DO2 Open collector 24 Vdc 50 mA Programmable Functions 2 Isolated Analog Outputs 1 2 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Linearity 345 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 9 4 MECHANICAL DATA SIZE 1 121 4 76 Air Flow inlet 139 5 47 127 6 00 f1 Air Flow outlet 8 0 31 ICCC 26 f1 Air Flow inlet Figure 9 2 Size 1 dimensions in mm inch CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 2 98 01 9 2 7900172 f1 Air Flow inlet Figure 9 3 Size 2 dimensions in mm inch 347 CHAPTER 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SIZE 3 219 8 62 Conduit for power cable 274 10 78
345. r Board 244 60 Jaf 641512969 Power Board fof 53 6 00 541512973 Power Board P53 6 00 J 00 541512974 Power Board P536 01 541512975 Power Board P63 6 00 P63 6 01 641512976 Power Board P63 6 01 541512977 Power Board P79 6 00 1512978 Power Board P79 6 01 Jf HMLOFWOSTED KMR CFWO09 CF11 01 EBA1 01 EBA1 02 EBA1 03 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Types 5 Specification 63 79 Units per Inverter EBB 04 S41512671 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 05 S41512741 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 EBC1 01 S41513174 Function Expansion Board Optional EBC1 02 S41513175 Function Expansion Board Optional EBC1 03 S41513176 Function Expansion Board Optional Only for types specified with braking DB Models 500 690 V Types Amp res Name Item specification 107 147 211 247 815 343 418 472 Units per inverter GBTModue 02980008 IGET 200 1700 e 02980009 IGBTModue300A170V 3 6 6 9 9 12 12 Ir EU uas SL CC 0303 9986 ThyrstorDioleModue oe 0303 9994 Thyristor Diode _
346. r Cables Grounding Cables Max Power High Speed Fuse mm AWG MCM mm AWG MCM Terminal Cable Size Semiconductor 9259 E SENSE EE rms Fuse A volts 2 9 500 600 450 3 6 380 480 T 1504 2503 0 15 450 4 0 380 480 1504 2503 4 0 10 450 4 2 500 600 450 5 5 380 480 1544 2502 __4 0 10 25 450 6 0 220 230 ___ 2503 2503 40060 2 450 70 0930 2503 __ 2503 4 0 10 450 7 0 500 600 450 9 0 380 480 2503 25 12 450 1 10 500 600 450 12 500 600 500 13 220 230 14 500 600 L 2502 40 0 4 0 10 500 16 220 230 2 5 12 22 500 600 25 4 7200 24 220 230 ___ 4000 40 0 _ 4000 _ 35 500 24 380 480 4040 4000 4000 35 1250 27 500 600 7200 28 220 230 60 8 60 8 6 08 501 1250 30 380 480 2100 32 500 600 1666 66 _ 254 50 7200 38 380 480 7200 44 500 600 14400 45 220 230 ___ 1606 16 6 16 6 160 __ 2549 63 2450 45 380 480 7200 53 500 600 63 500 600 25 4 25 4 16 6 16 6 120 250 80 14400 54 220 230 68 220 230 16 6 25 4 1660 16 60 500 980 7200 60 380 480 70 380 480 25 4 25 4 1606 1660 50 1 980 14400 63 500 600 79 500 600 25 4 25 166 16 6 120 250 80 14400 70 220 230 86 220 230 86 220 230 105 220 230 35 2 50 1 16 6 25 4 50 1 125 1440
347. r P100 will be identified through the acyclic messages as being located at slot 0 index 99 The value for the parameters is always communicated with a 2 byte 1 word size The value is also transmitted as an integer without decimal point and its representation depends on the used resolution E g P003 3 6 A value read via the network 36 283 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 12 4 DeviceNet 284 The parameters 000 P001 P215 and 408 are not available for access via network In order to be able to use the Profibus DP V1 interface one must select the option 1 2 or 3 at P309 This programming is the same for the Profibus DP VO or DP V1 interfaces A specific GSD file for this interface is supplied with the Profibus DP V1 communication kit Introduction The DeviceNet communication is used for industrial automation mainly for the control of valves sensors input output units and automation equipment The DeviceNet communication Link is based on a communication protocol broadcast oriented the Controller Area Network CAN The connection to the DeviceNet network is realized by means of a shielded cable comprising a twisted pair and two wires for the external power supply The baud rate can be set to 125 kbits s 250 kbits s or 500 kbits s Figure 8 41 gives a general view of a DeviceNet network Controller DeviceNet oA 111 Other Devic
348. r PC Optional Models 500 600 V Types Amp res Name Item Specification 22 32 Units per Inverter HMKCFWO9 LCD S417102024 HMILCD MESSI 5167 Power Pezer a rx Hill CFWOSLED S417102096 Optoma EBA1 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 01 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 1 EBB 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 243 CHAPTER 7 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Models 500 600 V Types T Specification 22 32 Units per Inverter EBB 04 05 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBC1 01 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBC1 02 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 EBC1 03 Function Expansion Board Optional 1 SCI1 00 RS 232 Module for PC Optional Only types specified with braking DB Models 500 600 V Types 5 79 Units per Inverter 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 244 Specification Pre charge Contactor 035506138 Contactor CWM50 00 220 v 50 60 Hz __ 1 1 1 Pre charge Transformer 0299 0160 Preload Transformer Pre charge Resistor 0301 1852 Vettified Wire Resistor 20R75W 1 1 Em 4 ern 22 GENOD DPS5 00 0850 00 512986 Board CB5D 00 00 01 2 541413063 CB5EOOBoard J 14 CB5E 01 341413081 CB5E 01 Board 0 KML CFW09 0 41512968 Powe
349. r connection UD Positive pole of the DC Link circuit DCR Connection to the external DC Link choke optional PE Ground Safety 49 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION a Size 1 models b Size 2 models c Size 3 4 and 5 models d Size 6 and 7 220 230 V and 380 480 V models Size 7 500 600 V models f Size 8 380 480 V models W BR aln 666 5 1 UD DCR Busse ag cum PA UE 9 Size 9 and 10 380 480 V models h Size 8E 500 690 and 660 690 V models P V W UD UD DCR Figure 3 6 a to h Power terminals 50 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION Size10E 500 690 V and 660 690 V models Figure 3 6 i Power terminals 3 2 2 Location of the Power Grounding Control Connections b Size 3 4 and 5 models a Size 1 and 2 models q O contro p x sss GROUNDING Note No voltage selection needed for these models Figure 3 7 a and b Location of the power grounding control connections and rated voltage 51 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION c Size 6 and 7 models RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION CONTROL CONTROL POWER GROUNDING f Size 8E RATED VOLTAGE SELECTION CONTROL AUXILIA
350. r current Maximum Reverse 125 that produces reverse torque While operating in torque limitation the Torque Current 1 96 motor current can be calculated by This para 2 meters P169 and TIE AE MNA P295 P410 170 shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control 144 Parameter P171 Maximum Forward Torque Current at the Maximum Speed N P134 P172 Maximum Reverse Torque Current at the Maximum Speed N P134 These para meters P171 and P172 are shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control P173 Type of Curve for the Maximum Torque This para meter is show on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes The maximum torque produced by the motor is given by P295 x ns x K Tmotor 96 ix100 P401 P410 x P178 100 where 1 for N x Nrated Nrated P180 _ X 1go 19 gt Nrated While the Optimal Braking is operating P169 limits the maximum output current in order to produce the braking forward torque refer to P151 Refer to the description for P169 above 0 to 180 Torque current limitation as a function of the speed 125 Torque Current 1 010 180 P170 P169 125 1 96 P172 P171 Speed synch Speed x P180 P134 100 Figure 6 22 Operation curve
351. rd setting is needed It is recommended to use the auto sensing resource Configuration File EDS file Each device on an EtherNet IP network is associated to an EDS file that contains information about the device operation The EDS file provided along with the product is used by the network configuration software CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Configuration of the Network Master Data For the master configuration besides the IP address used by the EtherNet IP board it is necessary to indicate the number of I O instances and the quantity of data exchanged with the master in each instance For the CFW 09 with Anybus S EtherNet IP board the following values must be programmed Input Instance 100 Output Instance 150 Data amount programmable through P309 it may be 2 4 or 6 words with 16 bits 4 8 or 12 bytes The EtherNet IP board for the CFW 09 is described in the network as a Generic Ethernet Module By using these configurations it is possible to program the network master so that it communicates with the inverter Indication The communication board has four two color LEDs located on the right bottom corner to indicate the module and the network status w OO Status Activity 4 Network Status Figure 8 46 Indication LEDs for the status of the EtherNet IP network LED Color Function Link Green On the module is connected to another device on the network typically a hu
352. returns to the RDY state The DC braking at start is not available for The V Hz and Vector with Encoder Control Modes JOG JOG and JOG command Start commands through the serial and Fieldbus interfaces with P202 3 When P211 1 Zero speed Disable When the Flying Start function is set P320 gt 1 The DC current level is set at P302 VVW and P372 sensorless During the DC Braking the LED displays flashes dL b ri This parameter adjusts the DC voltage DC braking torque applied to the motor during the braking process The current level set at this parameter represents a percentage of the inverter rated current This parameter works only for the Sensorless Vector Control P398 Function 0 1 Table 6 58 Slip compensation during regeneration This parameter sets the motor rated efficiency This parameter is important to the correct operation of the VVW Control The incorrect setting of this parameter results in the incorrect calculation of the slip compensation The default value of this parameter is automatically set when parameter P404 is modified The suggested value is valid only for IV pole standard three phase WEG motors The user shall set this parameter manually for other motor types 213 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 6 4 MOTOR PARAMETERS P400 to P499 Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P400 0 to 690
353. rity at the digital or relay outputs Description of the Torque Polarity function for the Torque Master Slave function The implementation of this function requires the digital or relay outputs of the master CFW 09 to be set to the options P275 34 Torque Polarity or P275 35 Torque Polarity Therefore a load resistor Rc shall be connected at the digital output DO1 XC4 5 DO2 XC4 7 as presented in figure 8 1 This output shall be connected to the digital input 012 of the Slave CFW 09 which shall be set to the option P264 0 Direction of Rotation In the master CFW 09 In the slave CFW 09 Vector with encoder Vector with encoder P100 P101 0 P275 or P276 34 35 160 1 57 0 15 P223 226 012 4 P358 2 00 P264 0 253 4 P237 2 234 1 2 Table 6 44 Minimum required settings for torque Master Slave function For P275 or P276 34 or 35 When the torque current of the master CFW 09 is positive the digital output DO1 or DO2 will be set to zero which will force the speed regulator of the slave to saturate positively producing a positive torque current When the torque current of the master CFW 09 is negative the digital output DO1 or DO2 will be set to 24 V which will force the speed regulator of the slave to saturate negatively producing a negative torque current 184 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range F
354. rogramming P224 and or P227 1 Increase E P Electronic Potentiometer is active when or 24 V Beyond parameters P265 and P267 5 itis also necessary setting P221 and or P222 to 7 Decrease E P Electronic Potentiometer is active when DI4 or 016 0 V Beyond parameters P266 and P268 5 itis also necessary setting P221 and or P222 to 7 Local Remote 0 V 24 V at the digital input respectively Speed Torque is valid for P202 3 and 4 Vector Control Sensorless and Vector Control with encoder 173 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes Speed Dlx Open 0 V Torque DIx Closed 24 V When Torque is selected the speed regulators gains P161 and P162 are not used and changed to Gp Proportional Gain 1 00 and Gi Integral Gain 0 00 Thus the Total Reference becomes the input of the Torque Regulator Refer to figure 6 26 When Speed is selected the speed regulator gains are defined again by P161 and P162 In applications with torque control proceed as described at P160 The Option DC Link Voltage Regulator must be used when P150 2 Refer to description of parameter P150 01815 designed to be used as Motor Thermistor PTC input on the option boards EBA EBB It can also be used with just one PTC XCA XC5 EBA EBB 018 P270 16 Temperature Inactive Inactive increase Without error Withou
355. rror 231 Fault Messages Display Page 2040 Inverter Overtemperature Pre charge Circuit 229 E05 Output Overload I x t Function 229 E06 229 E07 Encoder Fault 229 Valid for P202 4 Vector with Encoder E08 CPU Error watchdog 229 E09 229 E10 229 E13 Motor or Encoder with Inverted Wires 230 Self Tuning Valid for P202 4 E24 230 E32 230 E33 230 period at torque limitation Self Diagnosis Faut InemalDC Supply Undervoltage PLCWatchdogError E04 can be Pre charge Circuit Failure only in the following models gt 86 A 380 480 V gt 70 A 220 230 V gt 44 A 500 600 V and for all 500 690 V and 660 690 V models E04 can also occur when signal with inverted polarity is applied at analog inputs Al1 Al2 The E04 fault message can also occur in the models up to 130 A 200 230 V 142 A 380 480 V and 63 A 500 600 V when the temperature at the heatsink is lower than 10 C 33 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE Other Messages 34 Display rdy run Sub dCbr Description Inverter is Ready to be Enabled Inverter is Enabled Power Supply Voltage is Too Low for the Inverter Operation Undervoltage Inverter in DC Braking Mode Refer to P300 11 SAFETY NOTICES IN THE MANUAL 4 1 2 SAFETY NOTICES ON THE PRODUCT B 1 3 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS gt 1 SAFETY NOTICES This Manual contains all necessary information
356. ry Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes P169 0 2 x P295 to 1 8 x P295 This parameter limits the motor output current by reducing the speed Maximum Output 1 5 x P295 which avoids motor stalling under overload conditions Current 0 1 A lt 100 1 A gt 99 9 As the motor load increases the motor current also increases When For V F Control this current exceeds the value set at parameter P169 the motor speed P202 0 1 2 or 5 is reduced by using the deceleration ramp until the current value falls below the value set at P169 The motor speed is resumed when the overload condition stops Motor current 1691 ZN ZN LL N ts Speed VS 1 Decel 2 Accel Decel Ramp Ramp Ramp Accel Ramp P101 P103 100 102 gt During During During Acceleration Cont Duty Deceleration Figure 6 21 Curves showing the actuation of the current limitation P169 010 180 This parameter limits the value of the component of the motor current Maximum Forward 125 that produces forward torque The setting is expressed as a percentage Torque Current 1 96 value of the inverter rated current P295 100 Ados E The values of P169 P170 can be calculated from the maximum desired value for the motor current Imotor by using the following equation 100 x Imotor 100 x P410 P169 P170 96 EI Pd P295 P295 P170 0 to 180 This parameter limits the value of the component of the moto
357. s It is not recommended for motors bigger than 75 hp 55 kW Refer to explanation below 2 Without losses set P150 to 1 Only the DC Link voltage regulation 3 is active P151 factory setting is set at maximum this disables the DC Link 4 voltage regulation To enable it adjust according to table 6 8 Optimal Braking 5 The Optimal Braking is a unique method of stopping the motor that provides more braking torque than DC Injection Braking without requiring Dynamic Braking components In the case of DC Braking except for the friction losses only the rotor losses are used to dissipate the stored 6 energy due to the driven mechanical load With Optimal Braking both the total motor losses and the inverter losses are used In this way it is possible to achieve a braking torque of approximately 5 times higher than with the DC braking Refer to figure 7 6 15 This feature allows high dynamic performance without the use of a Dynamic Braking resistor 1063 to 1200 P296 28 Figure 6 15 shows a Torque x Speed curve of a typical 7 5 kKW 10 hp IV 1200 1V pole motor The braking torque developed at full speed with torque P169 and P170 limited by the CFW 09 at a value equal to the motor rated torque is given by TB1 point figure 6 15 TB1 value depends on the motor efficiency and disregarding the friction losses it is given by the following equation Leh Where 1 motor efficien
358. s activated by setting P203 to 1 Figure 6 47 shows the block diagram of the Academic PID regulator The transference function in the frequency domain of the Academic PID regulator is NAN y s Kp e s 1 sTd STI oubstituting the integrator by a sum and the derivative by the incremental quotient we will obtain an approximate value for the discrete recursive transfer equation shown below y k 1 Ta Kp e kTa 1 Ta Kie k 1 Ta Kd e kTa 2e k 1 Ta e k 2 where Kp Proportional Gain Kp P520 x 4096 Ki Integral Gain Ki P521 x 4096 Ta Ti x 4096 Kd Differential Gain Kd P522 x 4096 Td Ta x 4096 Ta 0 02 s sampling period of the PID Regulator SP reference has 13 bits max 0 to 8191 X process variable or controlled read at Al2 or Al3 has 13 bits maximum y kTa current PID output has 13 bits maximum y k 1 Ta previous OPID output e kTa current error SP k e k 1 Ta previous error SP k 1 X k 1 e k 2 Ta error of the two previous samplings SP k 2 X k 2 The feedback signal must be sent to the analog inputs 2 and 3 refer to figure 6 29 and 6 30 NOTE When using the PID function P233 must be set to 1 otherwise the minimum speed P133 will be added to the PID feedback 2 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION The setpoint can be defined Keypad parameter P525
359. s associated to an EDS file that has all information about the element This file is used by program of the network configuration during its configuration Use the file with the extension eds stored on the floppy disk contained in the Fieldbus kit Setting parameter P309 to 4 5 or 6 selects 2 4 or 6 input output words refer to item 8 12 7 With the assistance of the network configuration software define the number of words for the device according to the value set on parameter P309 The type of connection used for data exchange shall be set for Polled NOTE The PLC master must be programmed for Polled I O connection Signaling The electronic board has a bicolor LED at right topside indicating the status of the Fieldbus according to the table 8 16 285 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 12 5 DeviceNet Drive 286 Profile JP NOTE The red fault indications mean hardware problems of the electronic board The reset is realized by switching OFF ON the inverter If the problem persists replace the electronic board The electronic board is also fitted with other four bicolor LEDs placed at the right bottom side indicating the DeviceNet status according to figure 8 43 and table 8 19 Reserved C Network Status Module Reserved Network Status Figure 8 43 LEDs for status indication of the DeviceNet network LED Color Description Module Network Status Without supply Module Network S
360. s surface is NEMA 1 IP20 NEMA 1 rating does not protect against dust and water 46 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION a Sizes 1 and 2 4 mm 1 6 in max Air Flow b Sizes 3 to 8 Kit KMF Top Support Step 3 J Air Kit KMF Flow 4mm 1 6 in max Botton Support c Cutout Dimensions Refer to table 3 4 Sizes 3 to 8 LI Sizes 1 and 2 Li Figure 3 4 a to c Mounting procedure for the CFW 09 with the heatsink through the mounting surface 47 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION CFW 09 L1 H1 A1 B1 C1 D1 E mim Kit KMF Size mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Through in in in in in in in Surface Mounting item n 139 196 127 191 6 2 5 6 __ ___ we ee ee eee 5 47 7 72 5 00 7 52 0 24 0 10 0 24 17 167 2 Size 2 p ANE MA 7 00 10 87 6 57 10 67 0 24 0 10 0 24 Size 3 bw Lid P bi 417102514 7 00 14 64 6 57 15 75 1 44 0 59 0 31 Size 4 190 1 417102515 1 5 91 1 18 90 1 pA 0 59 Size 5 337 527 200 555 68 5 14 10 417102516 13 27 20 75 7 87 21 85 2 70 0 59 0 35 Size 6 ace nay bi 417102517 13 27 25 67 7 87 26 77 2 70 0 59 0 39 Size 7 A oe ii 417102518 13 27 31 97 7 87 33 07 2 70 0 59 0 39 412 68 5 16 22 m Nos 5 2 70 417102519 412 1122 275 1150 68 5 14 10 Size 16 22 44 17
361. scribed in item 8 14 3 CRC The last part of the message is the field for checking the transmission errors The used method is the CRC 16 Cycling Redundancy Check This field is formed by two bytes where the least significant byte CRC is transmitted first and only then the most significant byte is transmitted CRC CRC calculation is started by loading a 16 bit variable mentioned from now on as CRC variable with FFFFh value Then following steps are executed with the following routine 1 The first message byte only the data bits the start bit parity bit and stop bit are not used is submitted to the logic OR exclusive with the 8 least significant bits of the CRC variable returning the result to the CRC variable 2 CRC variable is displaced one position to the right in the direction of the least significant bit and the position of the most significant bit is filled out with zero O zero 3 After this displacement the flag bit bit that has been displaced out the CRC variable is analyzed by considering the following If the bit value is 0 zero no change is made If the bit value is 1 the CRC variable content is submitted to logic with a constant 001 value and the value is returned to the CRC variable 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the eight displacements have been realized 5 Repeat the steps 1 to 4 by using the next byte message until the whole message have been processe
362. se 338 9 1 5 660 690 V Power Supply 340 9 2 Electronics General 343 9 2 TADDIICable talia dS eo tek bit 344 9 9 Optional DEVIC 345 1 WO Expansion Board 345 9 3 2 Expansion Board EBB 4 2222222 345 OA Nechanieal 346 CFW 09 QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE FAULT AND STATUS MESSAGES Software V4 4X Application CFW 09 Model Serial Number Responsible Date Parameters Factory 7 User s Parameters Function Adjustable Range 0 to 999 READ ONLY PARAMETERS P001 to P099 P005 Motor Motor Frequency 00101020 0 to 1020 119 007 Motor Voltage 0 to 800 119 P009 Motor CO 0 to 150 0 119 012 Digital Inputs EC NN Inactive state 119 RL1 RL2 RL3 Status 1 Active 014 LastFaut Fault 10 71 121 015 PEE 121 017 121 P021 121 Software Version wax O o T o P024 A D Conversion Value of Al4 3276810 432767 12 P025 Conversion of 00 1023 o do Tt P026 AD Conversion Value of 010 1023 Sooo oo 121 P027 0000 22 P028
363. security level are restricted to the directory user 293 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 12 7 Use to the Fieldbus Helated Parameters of the CFW 09 8 12 7 1 Variables Read 294 from the Inverter In addition to the access control for the file system there is also an access control for the HTML pages of the communication board The file containing the access passwords is located under the directory user pswd and it is named web accs cfg As in the previous case each line of the Web accs cfg file represents an access account In order to change the user accounts for the HT ML pages create a text file with the same name web_accs cfg and insert in each line of this file a pair login password for the users with access permission After that transfer this new file through FTP to the communication board exactly as in the previous case NOTE It is strongly recommended to change all passwords of the EtherNet IP communication board after the start up of the device The new passwords will be effective only after powering down and up the CFW 09 NOTE When the inverter returns from the off line state the output values are reset There are two main parameters P309 and P313 P309 defines the used standard Fieldbus Profibus DP DeviceNet or EtherNet IP and the number of variables 1 exchanged with the master 2 4 or 6 The parameter P309 has the following options 0
364. solated Min high level 18 Vdc Isolated Digital Input Not used Max low level 3 Vdc Max Voltage 30 Vdc Input Current 11 mA 24 Isolated RS 485 serial Port Analog input 4 Frequency Reference Impedance 40 kQ 10 V to 10 V Program P221 4 or P222 4 14 500 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA m 0 V Reference for Analog Output Analog outputs signals 1p AGND internally 10 V to 10 NN 2 Yo i ANE 0 V Reference ex Analog Output lin 14 bits 0 006 96 of 10 V range internally grounded Allowed load RL gt 2 pcc Analog Output 4 Motor Current zm Avaliable to be connected to an external 2119 EN power supply to energise the encoder repeater output 8 Figure 8 1 XC4 terminal block description EBA board complete Differential analog input programmable on P246 10 V to 10 V or 0 to 20 4 to 20 mA lin 14 bits 0 006 of full scale range External power supply 5 V to 15 V Consumption 100 mA 5 V Outputs not included ENCODER CONNECTION Refer to item 8 2 INSTALLATION The board is installed on the CC9 control board secured with spacers and connected via terminal blocks XC11 24 V and XC3 JA NOTE For the CFW 09 Size 1 Models 6 A 7 A 10A and 13 A 220 230 V and 3 6 A 4 A 5 5 Aand 9 A 380 480 V the plastic cover must be removed to install the EBA board Mounting Instructions
365. speed Example 2 Reverse Fan driven by frequency inverter and cooling a cooling tower with PID controlling its temperature With the temperature increase the error becomes negative and the speed increases cooling down the tower P528 and P529 define the way the Process variable P040 will be shown P529 defines how many digits are indicated after the decimal point P528 must set according to the equation below S V Indication Process x 10 529 Feb Gain Al2 or AI3 where F S V Indication Process is the full scale value of the Process Variable corresponding to 10 V 20 mA at the Analog Input Al2 or AI3 used as feedback Example 1 Pressure Transducer 0 to 25 bar Output 4 to 20 mA Desired indication O to 25 bar F S Feedback Input AI3 Gain AI3 P242 1 000 Signal AI3 P243 1 4 to 20 mA P529 0 no digit after decimal point 25 x 10 P528 1 000 25 225 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P530 Engineering Unit of the Process Variable 1 P531 Engineering Unit of the Process Variable 2 P532 Engineering Unit of the Process Variable 3 P533 Value of Process Variable X P534 Value of Process Variable Y Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes Example 2 values are factory standards Desired indication 0 0 to 100 0 5 Feedback Input Al2 Gain Al2 P238 1 000 P529 1 one number af
366. ss The setting shall be done by gradually increasing the value of P302 which varies from 010 10 96 of the rated supply voltage until the desired braking torque is reached This parameter works only for the V F and VVW Control Modes For the Sensorless Mode refer to parameter P372 P305 P304 P303 Speed lt LO Reference O O a a Q A Figure 6 41 Actuation of the skip speed 197 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes This feature prevents the motor from operating permanently at speeds where the mechanical system enters into resonance causing high vibration or noise levels The passage through the skip speed band 2 x P306 is made at the programmed acceleration deceleration rates This function does not operate properly when two skip speeds overlapped P308 1 to 30 Sets the address of the inverter for the serial communication Refer to Serial Address 1 item 8 13 P309 0 to 10 Defines the Fieldbus standard to be used Profibus DP DP V1 Fieldbus 0 DeviceNet EtherNet IP or DeviceNet Drive Profile and the number of variables to be exchanged with the master Refer to item 8 12 7 P309 Fieldbus Options Inactive Profibus DP DP V1 2 I O Profibus DP DP V1 4 I O Profibus DP DP V1 6 I O DeviceNet 2 I O DeviceNet 4 I O DeviceNet 6 I O EtherNet IP 2 I O EtherNet IP 4 I O EtherNet
367. st be opened on the floor Open the wood box remove the expanded polystyrene protection The CFW 09 must be handled with hoist Check if CFW 09 nameplate data matches the purchase order m The equipment has not been damaged during transport If any problem is detected contact the carrier immediately If the CFW 09 is not to be installed immediately store it in a clean and dry room Storage temperatures between 25 C and 60 C Cover it to prevent dust dirt or other contamination of the inverter ATTENTION If the inverter is stored for long periods we recommend to power it up once a year during 1 hour For 220 230 V and 380 480 V models apply supply voltage of approximately 220 Vac three phase or single phase input 50 or 60 Hz without connecting motor at output After this energization wait 24 hours before installing it For 500 600 V 500 690 V and 660 690 V models use the same procedure applying a voltage between 300 and 330 Vac to the inverter input 41 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION This chapter describes the procedures for the electrical and mechanical installation of the CFW 09 These guidelines must be followed for proper CF W 09 operation 3 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3 1 1 Environment Conditions The location of the CFW 09 installation is an important factor to assure good performance and high product reliability For proper installation of the inverter we make the following recommendations
368. t Length 03h Object Value WEG ___ ________ 01h ___ Object Length 0Eh ObjectVale CFW 09 70A __ __ Object Length 05h 209 LS B8h 326 8 14 4 Communication Errors 8 14 4 1 Error Messages CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES In the example the Object Value has not been represented as hexadecimal value but with corresponding ASCII characters For instance for the object 00 the WEG value has been transmitted as being three ASCII characters that as hexadecimal have the values 57h W 45h E and 47h Errors can occur during the message transmission on network or in the content of the received messages Depending on the error type inverter may answer or not to the master When the master sends a message to an inverter configured at determined network address the inverter will not response if Error in the parity bit Error the CRC Timeout between transmitted bytes 3 5 times the time required for the transmission of an 11 bit word In the case of a successful reception of the message the inverter can detect problems and send an error message to the master indicating the problem that has been verified Invalid function error code 1 the requested function has not been implemented for the inverter Invalid data address error code 2 the data address register or bit does not exist Data value inval
369. t be installed M NOTE If the HMI has parameters saved of a different version than installed in the inverter to which it is trying to copy the parameters the operation will not be executed and the inverter will display the error E10 Error not permitted Copy Function Different Version are those that are different in x or y supposing that the numbering of Software Versions is described as Vx yz Example version V1 60 x 1 y 6 and z 0 stored in the HMI previously l Inverter version V1 75 gt x 1 y 27andz 5 P215 22 E10 6 7 Inverter version V1 62 gt 1 6andz 2 P215 2 gt normal copy 6 6 The procedure is as follows 1 Connect the Keypad to the inverter from which the parameters will be copied Inverter A Set P215 1 INV gt HMI to transfer the parameter values from the Inverter Ato the Keypad Press the key P204 resets automatically to 0 Off after the transfer is completed 4 Disconnect the Keypad from the inverter 5 Connect the same Keypad to the inverter to which the parameters will be transferred Inverter B Set P215 2 HMI INV to transfer the content of the Keypad memory containing the Inverter Aparameters to Inverter B Press the key When P204 returns to 0 the parameter transfer has been concluded Now Inverters A and B have the same parameter values Note In case Invert
370. t error Active E32 Temperature Inactive decrease Without error Active E32 Active E32 PTC resistance oscillation gt ohms 0 1k6 3k9 Figure 6 33 DI8 used as PTC input f DI8 should be used as normal digital input Program the parameter P270 to the required function and connect a resistor between 2 0 1600 series with the input 4 as indicated below XCA XC5 CONTACT CONTACT 018 DEACTIVATED P270 CLOSED ACTIVATED 270 to 1600 Q Figure 6 34 DI8 used as normal DI 174 Parameter Range Factory Setting Unit CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes The functions JOG and JOG are valid only for P202 3 and 4 The option Fieldbus sets the DI as a remote input for the Fieldbus system and in order to become effective it must be read as any other DI of the inverter Disable Flying Start Put 24 V at the digital input to disable Flying Start The function Loads user via DIx permits the memory selection of the user 1 or 2 process similar to P204 7 and P204 8 but the user is loaded from the transition of a DIx programmed for this function The memory of user 1 is loaded when the DIx status changes from low level to high level transition from 0 V to 24 V and P265 to P269 20 provided the current parameter contents of the inverter have been transferred previously to the parameter memory 1 P204 10
371. t is not enabled for the Fieldbus or C The parameter write is read only The fault indication described above will be removed from the Logical Status when the desired action is sent correctly Except for E27 case b which reset is via write in the Logical Control Example supposing that no digital output is programmed for Fieldbus thus when in position 3 the word 11h is written the inverter answer indicating E27 in E L To remove this indication from E L you must 1 Write zero in Pos 3 since no DO is programmed for Fieldbus 2 Change the variable of the logical control to remove from E L the E27 indication The removal of the fault indication from E L described above can also be realized by writing the code 999 in Pos 5 of the Variables written in the Inverter Except for the fault E27 in the cases a and b which reset is realized only through the writing in the Logical Control as above exemplified NOTE The faults E24 E25 E26 and E27 do not cause any change in the inverter operation status HMI displays E29 Fieldbus is inactive This display appears when the physical connection of the inverter to the Master is interrupted You can program in Parameter P313 the action that the inverter shall execute when the fault E29 is detected When the PROG key of the HMI is pressed the E29 Fault indication is removed from the display E30 Fieldbus Board is inactive This fault is displayed when 1 P309
372. tatus Fault not recoverable Module Network Status Green Board operating Module Network Status Red Flashing Smaller fault Network Status Off Without supply off line Network Status Link operating connected Network Status Critical fault at Link Network Status On line not connected Network Status Timeout of the connection Table 8 19 Signaling LEDs indicating the DeviceNet status Mm NOTE Use of the DeviceNet related CFW 09 Parameters Refer to item 8 12 7 The DeviceNet Drive Profile communication board has the purpose of making available at the product a communication interface for a DeviceNet network with the following characteristics It makes it possible the parameterization of the inverter via the network with direct access to the parameters through messages sent by the master It follows the Device Profile standard for AC and DC Inverters specified by the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor Association which defines a common set of objects for inverters that operate in a DeviceNet network With the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface the data exchanged with the DeviceNet network master present format and parameterization different from the data exchanged by using the normal DeviceNet board For more information on the parameterization and operation of this interface refer to the CFW 09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual 8 12 6 EtherNet IP PLC With EtherNet IP 192 168 0 1 HM
373. ter P152 gradually or increase the deceleration ramp time P101 and or P103 The inverter will not decelerate if the supply line is permanently under overvoltage Ud gt 151 In this case reduce the line voltage or increment P151 ie P152 DC Link X gt Speed Voltage Ud Speed Ramp Output Figure 6 14 Voltage regulation block diagram of the DC Link NOTE For large motors its recommended the use of the ramp holding function 135 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P151 DC Link Voltage Regulation Level For Vector Control P202 3 or 4 136 Range Factory Setting Unit 339 to 400 P296 400 1V Description Notes P151 defines the level for the DC Link voltage regulation during braking 0 The time of the deceleration ramp is automatically extended thus avoiding overvoltage error E01 The DC Link voltage regulation has two modes of operation 585 to 800 P296 1 800 1V 616 to 800 P296 800 1V 678 to 800 P296 800 1V 739 to 800 P296 800 1V 809 to 1000 P296 1000 1V 885 to 1000 P296 1000 1V 924 to 1000 P296 1000 1V 1 With losses Optimal braking set P150 10 0 In this mode the flux current is modulated so as to increase the losses in the motor there by increasing the braking torque It works better with lower efficiency 2 motors smaller motor
374. ter decimal point 100 0 x 10 P528 1000 1000 37 96 LCD display The Engineering Unit of the Process Variable is formed by three characters that are used for the indication of PO40 P530 defines the left 32 to 127 character P531 defines the central character and P532 defines the 32 right character Possible characters to chosen 32 to 127 Characters corresponding to the ASCII code from 32 to 127 32 Examples A B 43 3 Dy ies Ve 20 1 Oy Examples To indicate To indicate P530 b 98 P530 37 P531 a 97 P531 32 P532 r 114 P532 32 0 0 to 100 Used in the functions of the Digital Relay Outputs 90 0 i V Pr gt VPx and V Pr lt VPy aiming signaling alarm Full scale percentage values of the Process Variable 0 0 to 100 10 0 1 529 SEU P040 Los x100 226 Parameter P535 Wake Up Band P536 Automatic Set of P525 P537 Hysteresis for the Set Point Process Variable P538 Hysteresis VPx VPy Range Factory Setting Unit O to 100 0 1 0 or 1 0 0 to 100 1 1 0 0 to 50 0 1 0 0 1 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Description Notes The value of this parameter is used along with P212 Condition to Leave Zero Speed Disable providing additional condition to leave zero speed disable that is error of PID P535 Refer t
375. th negative values in supplement of 2 P025 and P026 indicate the A D conversion result in module of the V and W phase currents respectively 121 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter 027 Analog Output 1 28 Analog Output 2 29 Analog Output Analog Output AO4 P040 PID Process Variable P042 Powered Time 043 Enabled Time 122 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 0 to 100 i 0 1 0 0 to 100 0 1 10010 100 0 1 10010 100 0 1 010100 LCD 01065535 LED 010 65531 x10 1h 0 to 6553 5 0 1 h lt 999 9 1 h gt 1000 Description Notes Indicate the percentage value of the analog outputs AO1 to AO4 with respect to the full scale value The indicated values are obtained after the multiplication by the gain Refer to the description of parameters P251 to P258 It indicates the process variable in factory setting used as the PID Feedback The indication unit can be changed through P530 P531 and P532 scale can be changed through P528 and P529 Refer to detailed description in item 6 5 Special Function Parameters This parameter also allows to modify the PID set point see P525 when 221 0 or P222 0 Indicates the total number of hours that the inverter was powered The LED Display shows the total number of hours that the inverter was energize
376. the read value is 5 3 A 8 14 3 3 Function 05 This function is used to write a value to a single bit The bit value is Write oingle Coil Query Master Slave address Function Bit address byte high Bit address byte low Bit value byte high Bit value byte low CRC CRC 322 represented by using two bytes where FFOOh represents the bit that is equal to 1 and 0000h represents the bit that is equal to 0 zero It has the following structure the values are always hexadecimal and each field represents one byte Response Slave Slave address Function Bit address byte high Bit address byte low Bit value byte high Bit value byte low CRC CRC CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES Example to drive enable command bit 100 1 of a CFW 09 at the address 1 Query Master Response Slave Bit number low Bit number d 64h Bit value high i TEENS Bit value high FFh Bit value low 00h CRC CDh CRC ESh For this function the slave response Is an identical copy of the query sent by the master 914 34 Function 06 Write This function is used to write a value to a single register This function has Single Register following structure values are always hexadecimal values and each field represents one byte Query Master Response Slave Slave address Slave address Function Function Register address byte high Register address byte high Register address byte low
377. therNet cable to the inverter and make sure that the Link LED is ON LED 1 4 Open your WEB browser and type the inverter address on the network The factory default value is http 192 168 0 1 Make sure that JavaScript and cookies are enabled in the WEB browser The data access is protected by username and password The CFW 09 has the following factory default values Username web Password web Conectar se a 192 168 0 1 7 WN Quthorization Required Nome de usu rio v Lembrar minha senha 291 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 292 5 Atthe Configuration tab of the WEB page shown in figure X set if needed the Network Parameters Set also the value of parameter P309 6 1 If the inverter address on the network belongs to the reserved range 192 168 0 itis possible to use the DIP switches of the communication board for addressing purposes In this case the DIP switch represents the binary value of the last byte in the IP address eee Gee See NL 12345678 ON MSB LSB Example The DIP switch is set to 00010100 20 in decimal format Thus the inverter address on the network is 192 168 0 20 6 2 If the inverter has an IP address out of the default range 192 168 0 X deactivate the hardware addressing by setting the DIP switches to zero 00000000 6 3 If the network addressing is performed through a DHCP server select the box DHCP enabled and
378. till the DC Link Voltage leaves the actuation Refer to figure 6 12 616 to 800 P296 2 800 1V This DC Link Voltage Regulation ramp holding tries to avoid the inverter 678 to 800 P296 3 disabling through fault relating to DC Link Overvoltage E01 when the 800 deceleration of loads with high inertia is carried out or deceleration with 1V short times are performed 133 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Range Factory Setting Parameter Unit Description Notes 739 to 800 P296 4 800 1V P151 DC Link Voltage Ud P004 E01 Overvoltage Level Regulation Level Nominal 809 to 1000 P296 5 1000 1V 885 to 1000 P296 6 une 1000 1V 924 to 1000 P296 7 1000 1V Time 1063 to 1200 P296 8 Figure 6 12 Deceleration with ramp holding 1200 1V With this function you can achieve an optimized deceleration time minimum for the driven load This function is useful in application where loads with medium moment of inertia are driven that require short deceleration ramps If even so the inverter is disabled during the acceleration due to overvoltage E01 reduce the value of P151 gradually or increase the deceleration ramp time P101 and or P103 In case the supply line is permanently under overvoltage Ud gt P151 the inverter cannot decelerate this case reduce the line voltage increment P151 If even
379. tion Notes If the difference between Real Speed and N t Total Speed Reference remains greater than the value set at parameter P292 for a period longer than that set at parameter P351 the inverter will trip with an error code E33 99 9 E33 15 disabled If the CFW 09 remains at torque limitation for a period longer than the value set at P352 the inverter will trio with an error code E34 999 E34 is disabled NOTE When the CFW 09 is used in master slave applications disable this function on the slave inverter Defines the time to activate the brake i e the time that elapses between the condition N Nx and the brake activation This adjustment is needed to ensure that the motor current will be reduced after the brake activation If this value is lower than time needed to activate the mechanical braking jerking swinging or even falling may happen If this value is greater than that set at P351 or P352 the inverter may trip with error code E33 or E34 respectively This is the dead time that ensures the braking activation Any other Start Stop command is not accepted during this period Defines the time that the CFW 09 waits before accepting a new Start command after the motor is stopped During the period set at P355 the commands are ignored Function valid for commands via digital input only Parameter P356 Delay for Ramp Enable
380. tion procedures CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES CONFIGURATIONS Expansion Power Encoder Customer Board Supply Voltage Action EBC1 01 External 5 V 5V Commutate switch S8 to ON refer to figure 8 9 External 8 to 15 V 8 to 15 V None EBC1 02 Internal 5 V None EBC1 03 Internal 12 V None Table 8 5 board configuration NOTE The terminals 10 22 and 10 23 refer to figure 8 9 should be used only for encoder supply when encoder power supply is not coming from DB9 connection MOUNTING OF THE ENCODER For mounting the encoder on the motor follow the recommendations below Couple the encoder directly to the motor shaft use a flexible coupling without torsional flexibility M Both the shaft and the metallic frame of the encoder must be electrically isolated from the motor min spacing 3 mm 0 119 in Use high quality flexible couplings to prevent mechanical oscillation backlash The electrical connection must be made with shielded cable maintaining a minimum distance of about 254 mm 10 in from other wiring power control cables etc If possible install the encoder cable in a metallic conduit At start up program Parameter P202 type of control 4 vector with encoder to operate the motor with speed feedback through incremental encoder For more details about Vector Control operation refer to chapter 5 Connector Connector Igna escription Encoder Signa
381. to 472 500 690 V and 100 Ato 428 A 660 690 V in the panel in an extractable form The inverter is mounted in the panel like a sliding drawer thus making easier the assembling and maintenance works When requesting this kit please specify the following tem Notes Size 10 450 A to 600 A 380 480 V and Size 10E 247 A to 472 A 500 690 V and 255 A to 428 A 660 690 V Panel width 1000 mm 89 37 in Size 10 450 A to 600 A 380 480 V and Size 10E 247 A to 472 A 500 690 V and 255 A to 428 A 660 690 V Panel width 800 mm 31 50 in ize 9 312 A to 361 A 380 480 V 417104898 KIT KME CFW 09Mg L 800 2 2 37 12 Ato 361 380 480 Panel width 800 mm 31 50 in Size 8 211 Ato 240 A 380 480 V and Size 8E 107 Ato 211 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 179 A 660 690 V Panel width 600 mm 23 62 in Size 8 211 A to 240 A 380 480 V Size 8E 107 Ato 211 A 500 690 V and 100 A to 179 A 660 690 V Panel width 800 mm 31 50 in Size 7 142 A 380 480 V and 44 A to 79 A 500 600 V Painel width 600 mm 23 62 in 417104899 KIT KME CFW 09 M10 L 1000 417104467 KME CFW 09 10 800 417104896 KME CFW 09 8 600 417104897 KME CFW 09 M8 L 800 417104895 KME CFW 09 7 600 Note Please refer to drawings in item 9 4 Guide base of the KIT KME for panel mounting Panel support Lateral guides for the car Figure 8 53 Mounting of the KIT KME on the inverter 329
382. trol cable 3x 2 Min 10 0 14 0 _ 110 4 33 Cable glands for power cable 7 20 0 28 3 2 13 0 S Me 18 0 n Cable glands for fan wiring 167 6 57 184 7 24 Air Flow 200 7 87 234 9 21 Outlet 12 5 0 49 gt a S 5 S z Q Qd 8 8 8 Air Flow Inlet Figure 8 55 Mechanical data Size 1 dimensions in Cable glands for control cable 3x Min 10 0 110 4 33 14 0 Cable glands _ B power cable 3x Min 13 0 p uu Max 18 0 i 25 do 4 Cable glands ag 8 for fan wiring 12 0 63 172 6 77 199 7 83 216 8 50 238 9 37 Air Flow 230 9 05 280 11 02 Outlet i 2 T i 2 Air Flow Inlet Figure 8 56 Mechanical data Size 2 dimensions mm in 331 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 16 3 8 16 4 332 Electrical Installation Closing the Inverter The electrical installation is the same as CFW 09 standard Refer to chapter 3 item 3 2 to make a correct electrical installation NOTE To assure the NEMA 4X total protection it is necessary to use correct cables It is recommended to use armored multi core cables For example one tetra polar armored cable for Power supply R S T plus grounding and another tetra polar armored cable for output motor connection The wire sizing and fuses are presented in table
383. tween LO CAL Mode and REMOTE Mode Enabled when P220 2 Keypad LOC or 3 Keypad REM Reverses the motor direction of rotation Enabled when P223 2 Keypad FWD or 3 Keypad REV for Local Mode and or P226 2 Keypad FWD or 3 Keypad REV for Remote Mode The keys described below are enabled when P221 0 Keypad for Local Mode and or P222 0 Keypad for Remote Mode The parameter P121 contains the speed reference set by the keypad When pressed it increases the speed reference When pressed it decreases the speed reference CHAPTER 4 KEYPAD HMI OPERATION wz NOTE Reference Backup The last frequency Reference set by the keys a and Gi is stored when the inverter is stopped or the AC power is removed provided P120 1 Reference Backup active is the factory default To change the frequency reference before starting the inverter the value of parameter P121 must be changed 4 22 Head Only Variables Parameters P002 to P099 are reserved for the display of read only values The and Status factory default display when power is applied to the inverter is PO02 Motor speed in rpm The user can scroll through the various read only parameters or use the factory configured display of the key values This is done by pressing the start key a Some selected read only variables can be viewed following the procedure below I Om IBL 1 Press 4588 b 4 H Press BEE 1 Press otan Spear I CD WV
384. ty of personnel electrical shock risk when using inverters in IT networks About the use of a differential relay at the inverter input The indication of phase to ground short circuit must be processed by the user in order to indicate only a fault message or to turn off the inverter Check with the relay manufacturer its proper operation with frequency inverters because of the existing high frequency leakage currents flowing through the inverter cable and motor parasitic capacitances to the earth 59 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION a Models 180 A to 240 380 480 V For IT networks remove the jumper c Models 2 9 A to 14 A 500 600 V J8 jumper position X11 Grounded network X9 IT network e Models 44 A to 79 A 500 600 V g Models 247 A to 472 A 500 600 V and 225 A to 428 A 660 690 V MOH ie bob 22272920009 0000 4 8 8 8 0 8
385. ulator Procedure for manual setting 1 Select the acceleration P100 and or deceleration P101 time according to the application 2 Set the speed reference to 75 96 of the maximum value Configure the analog output or AO4 to Real Speed by setting P255 or P257 to 2 4 Block the speed ramp Start Stop Stop and wait until the motor stops 5 Release the speed ramp Start Stop Start observe the motor speed signal at the analog output AO3 or AO4 with an oscilloscope 6 Check among the options in figure 6 20 which waveform best represents the signal measured with the oscilloscope N V N V N V t s t s t S a Low Gain s b Optimized Speed c High Gain s Regulator Figure 6 20 Types of response for the speed regulator Settings of P161 and P162 as a function of the type of response presented in figure 6 20 a Increase the proportional gain P161 and or increase the integral gain P162 b Speed regulator is optimized c Decrease the proportional gain P161 and or decrease the integral gain P162 Parameter P163 Local Speed Reference Offset P164 Remote Speed Reference Offset These para meters P160 to P164 are shown on the display s only when P202 3 4 Vector Control P165 Speed Filter This para meter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 Vector Control P166 Speed Regulator Differential Gain
386. ult storing The energy required for motor running is obtained from the kinetic energy of the motor inertia during its deceleration As soon as the line is reestablished the motor accelerates again to the speed defined by the reference After line loss t0 the DC Link voltage Ud starts to decrease in a rate that depends on the motor load condition and may reach the undervoltage level t2 if the Ride Through function is not operating The time required for this condition typical for rated load situates in a range from 5 to 15 ms With Ride Through function active the line loss is detected when Ud voltage becomes lower than the Ud line loss value t1 The inverter immediately starts a controlled motor deceleration regenerating the energy into the DC Link and thus maintaining the motor running where the Ud voltage is regulated to the Ud Ride Through value Ifthe line loss is not recovered the motor remains in this condition as long as possible depending on the energy equilibrium until the undervoltage condition E02 at t5 occurs If the line loss is recovered t3 before the undervoltage condition the inverter detects its reestablishment when the Ud voltage reaches the Ud Loss Recover level t4 Then the motor is accelerated according to the set ramp from the current speed value up to the value defined by the active speed reference Refer to figure 6 42 If the input voltage drops to a value between param
387. unction Specifications DI Start Stop 6 Isolated Digital Inputs DI2 FWD REV Section Remote Mode Minimum High Level 18 Vdc 3 E m gt lt JOG Remote Mode Input Current DgiimusCommm Digital nputsGommon 000 4 Isolated 24 Vdc 8 Capac 90 mA Grounded by a 249 resistor Positive Reference for Potentiometer 5 4 5 Capacity 2 mA Valid for Al1 and AI2 differential resolution 10 bits 0 to 10 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Negative Reference for Potentiometer 4 7 5 Capacity 2 mA Analog Input 2 Valid for Al1 and AI2 No Function Impedance 400 0 to 10 500 0 to 20 4 to 20 mA Analog Output 1 Speed 0 to 10 Ry gt 10 Max load resolution 11bits Analog Input 1 Speed Reference Remote Mode JJ m TI gt gt a 20 2 Tl GND 1 0 V Reference for Analog Outputs Grounded by 5 1 O resistor Analog Output Motor Current 0 to 10 Ry gt 10 Max load resolution 11 bits gt gt gt no no A 20 GND 2 0 V Reference for Analog Outputs Grounded by a 5 1 resistor dd Terminal XC1A Factory Default Function Specification 2 RL1 NC Relay Output No Fault 22 RL1NO RL2 NO Relay Output Speed gt P28
388. until P202 is reached Press the PROG key to enter the programming mode Use the and keys to select the type of control Sensorless Use the a and keys to select the type of control with Encoder LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY CHAPTER 5 START UP DESCRIPTION Password value factory default 5 Exit the programming mode Type of Control Selection 0 60 Hz 1 V F 50 Hz 2 V F Adjustable 3 Sensorless Vector 4 Vector with Encoder 5 VVW Enter the programming mode Selected Type of Control 3 Sensorless Vector Selected Type of Control 4 Vector with Encoder 103 CHAPTER 5 START UP Press the Gros key to save the selected option and start the tuning routine after changing to Vector Control Mode Press the and use the Q and keys to set the correct motor rated voltage value Press the PROS key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode Press the key to to the next parameter Gros Press the PROG key to enter the programming mode and keys to set the correct motor rated current value Press the roc key to save the programmed value and exit the programming mode N Press the key to to the next parameter 104 LED DISPLAY LCD DISPLAY DESCRIPTION Motor Rated Voltage Range 0 to 690 V Programmed Motor Rated Voltage
389. urrent 200 or E05 may occur due to high motor currents at low frequencies Nominal los 1 2 Nominal Frequency 30 Hz 60 Hz Figure 6 4 P202 0 V F 60 Hz curve Output Voltage Nominal E 1 2 Nominal 55 Frequency 25 Hz 50 Hz Figure 6 5 P202 1 V F 50 Hz curve 129 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Parameter P137 Automatic Torque Boost This parame ter is shown on the display s only when P202 0 1 2 V F Control P138 Slip Compensation This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 0 1 2 Control 130 Range Factory Setting Unit Description Notes 0 00 to 1 00 The automatic Torque Boost compensates for the voltage drop in the 0 00 stator resistance as a function of the motor active current 0 01 The criteria for setting P137 the same as for the parameter 136 Speed Torque Boost Motor Reference P136 a Voltage 1 Automatic Torque Boost Current P137 Figure 6 6 Block diagram P137 Output Voltage Nominal 1 2 Nominal Boost Zone lx 1 2 Nom Nominal d Figure 6 7 V F curve with automatic torque boost 10 0 to 10 0 P138 for values between 0 0 and 10 0 96 is used in the Motor Slip 0 0 Compensation output frequency function which comp
390. ust be set to 1 OFF Transfer Rate baud rate The transfer rate of a Profibus DP network is defined during the master configuration and only one rate 15 permitted in the same network The Profibus DP board has automatic baud rate detection and the user does not need to configure it on the board The supported baud rates are 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits 5 45 45 kbits s 93 75 kbits s 187 5 kbits s 500 kbits s 1 5 Mbits s 3 Mbits s 6 Mbits s and 12 Mbits s Node Address The node address is established by means of two rotating switches on the electronic Profibus DP board permitting the addressing from 1 to 99 addresses Looking onto the front view of the board with the inverter in normal position the switch at left sets the ten of the address while the left switch sets the unit of the address Address set left rotary switch x 10 set right rotary switch x 1 NOTE The node address can not be changed during operation Configuration File GSD File Each element of a Profibus DP network is associated to a GSD file that has all information about the element This file is used by program of the network configuration Use the file with the extension gsd stored on the floppy disk contained in the Fieldbus kit Signaling The electronic board has a bicolor LED at right underside indicating the status of the Fieldbus according to the table 8 16 and figure 8 40 below 1 Hz Fault during the RAM test Red 4 Hz Fault during th
391. variables you can change the speed reference read the inverter status enable or disable the inverter etc refer to item 8 13 5 1 Basic Variables Register nomenclature used to represent both parameters and basic variables during data transfer Internal Bits bits that are accessed only through the serial interface and that are used for inverter status controlling and monitoring item 8 13 3 2 defines the resolution of the parameters and variables transmitted via serial interface 317 CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 318 Available Functions and Response Times In the Modbus RTU protocol specification is defined the functions used for accessing different types of registers described in the specification In the CFW 09 both parameters and basic variables are defined as being holding type registers referenced as 4x In addition to these registers it is also possible to access the internal controlling and monitoring bits directly referenced as Ox Following services or functions are available in the CFW 09 frequency inver ter for accessing these registers Read Coils Description reading of internal register blocks or coils Function code 01 Broadcast not supported Response time 5 to 10 ms Read Holding Registers Description reading of register blocks of holding type Function code 03 Broadcast not supported Response time 5 to 10 ms Write Single Coil Description writing in a single
392. ve 1 Active CL 2 Direction of rotation 0 counter clockwise 1 clockwise 1 General enabling 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Start Stop 0 Stop 1 Start NOTE The inverter will execute only the command indicated in the low order bit when the corresponding high order bit has the value 1 one When the high order bit has the value 0 zero the inverter will disregard the value of the corresponding low order bit CHAPTER 8 CFW 09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES NOTE CL 13 The function to save the changes of the parameters content in EEPROM occurs usually when the HMI is used The EEPROM admits a limit number of writings 100 000 In the applications where the speed regulator is saturated but the torque control is desired you must change the current limitation value at P169 P170 valid for P202 3 and 4 In this torque control condition check if P160 control type 1 Regulator for torque control When the network Master is writing in P169 P170 continuously avoid to save the changes in the EEPROM by setting CL 13 1 and CL 5 1 To control the functions of the Logical Control you must set the respective inverter parameters with the Fieldbus option a Local Remote selection P220 b Speed reference P221 and or P222 C Direction of rotation P223 and or P226 d General Enabling Start Stop P224 and or P227 Jog Selection P225 and or P228 2 Motor Speed Reference This vari
393. with Tape Inverter Side Do Not Ground Connect to Ground Screw located on the CC9 Board and on support plate of the CC9 Board Figure 3 14 Shield connection 4 For wiring distances longer than 50 m 150 ft it is necessary to use galvanic isolators for the XC1 11 to XC1 20 analog signals 5 Relays contactors solenoids or electromagnetic braking coils installed near inverters can generate interference in the control circuit In order to eliminate this interference connect RC suppressors in parallel with the coils of AC relays Connect a free wheeling diode in case of DC relays coils 6 When external keypad HMI is used Refer to chapter 8 separate the cable that connects the keypad to the inverter from other cables maintaining a minimum distance of 10 cm 4 in between them Connection 1 Keypad Start Stop Local Mode With the factory default setting you can operate the inverter in the local mode This operation mode is recommended for users who are operating the inverter for the first time without additional control connections For start up according to this operation mode follow chapter 5 Connection 2 2 Wire Control Start Stop Remote Mode Valid for factory default setting and inverter operating in remote mode For the factory default programming the selection of the operation mode Local Remote is made via the key CE fault is Local P fault of the k Ren default is ocal Pass
394. y if an optional DeviceNet Drive Profile Number of I O 2 communication kit were used Words If the option 3 instances 102 103 is programmed in P335 it will be possible to program in P346 the number of words exchanged with the master from 2 up to 7 words The modification of this parameter will become valid only after cycling the power of the inverter In order to get more information on the parameterization and the operation of the DeviceNet Drive Profile interface refer to the CFW 09 frequency inverter DeviceNet Drive Profile Communication Manual 207 CHAPTER 6 DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 6 3 1 Parameters for Crane Applications and for Torque Master Slave Function P351 to P368 Parameter P351 4 Delay for E33 opeed without Control 8 This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 3or 4 P352 Delay for E34 Long Period at Torque Limitation JI This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 3 or 4 P353 Delay for N Nx Brake Activation P354 Delay for Resetting the Integrator of the Speed Regulator This parameter is shown on the display s only when P202 4 vector with encoder P355 Delay for Accepting new Start Stop commands 208 Range Factory Setting Unit 0 0 to 99 9 99 9 0 15 010999 999 1s 0 0 to 20 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 15 0 0 to 10 0 1 0 0 15 Descrip

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  取扱説明書  取扱説明書 - サポート・よくある質問  Style Guidelines for Programming in C/C++  ATENÇÃO :  Manual de Instruções    ficha tecnica evo r en 140:1998  CP 340 Manual  Bedienungsanleitung  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file